JP2021100505A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine which can enhance amusement.SOLUTION: A Pachinko machine 10 comprises: a game area into which a game ball shot by shooting means is guided; and a specific area which a game ball moving in the game area can enter. The game machine further comprises a plurality of special areas which are provided at positions where there are a case in which the game ball moving in the specific area reaches the special area and a case in which the game ball does not reach. As the plurality of special areas, at least a first special area and a second special area are provided. The game machine is configured such that there are a case in which the game ball moving in the specific area does not reach the first special area but reaches the second special area and a case in which the game ball does not reach the second special area but reaches the first special area. The game ball moving in the specific area is visible from the front of the game machine, and a privilege advantageous to the player is given by making the game ball reach the plurality of predetermined game areas including the first special area and the second special area.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

There is a pachinko machine as a kind of game machine. In pachinko machines, when a game ball launched by a launching means enters a starting ball entry means provided on a game board, a winning / failing lottery is held to determine whether or not a special gaming state advantageous to the player is generated. The variable display means is used to perform variable display for teaching the result of the winning / failing lottery (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2006-271480

By the way, as a gaming machine, there is a demand for new improvements in interest, such as by constantly incorporating new configurations.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest.

The gaming machine of the present invention
Equipped with multiple means of achieving specific conditions
The condition achievement means includes a first condition achievement means capable of achieving the first specific condition and a second condition achievement means capable of achieving the second specific condition.
It is characterized in that a privilege advantageous to the player is given by achieving a plurality of predetermined specific conditions including at least one of the first specific condition and the second specific condition.

The gaming machine may be a pachinko machine.

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest.

It is a front view which shows the pachinko machine in one Embodiment. It is a perspective view which shows the pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which shows the state which opened the inner frame and the front frame set. It is a front view which shows the structure of the inner frame, the game board and the like. It is a rear view which shows the structure of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which shows the state which opened the inner frame, the back pack unit and the like. It is a block diagram which shows the main electrical composition of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline of various counters used for game control. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing by a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the normal processing by a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows NMI interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process. It is a flowchart which shows the hit / fail determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st type determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd type determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the reach determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passing process. It is a flowchart which shows the special display control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the variation display setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the discrimination information setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the variable winning device control process. It is a flowchart which shows the variable winning device control process. It is a flowchart which shows the end setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the normal display control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary figure fluctuation setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary figure discrimination information setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning apparatus control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st residual sphere monitoring processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd residual sphere monitoring processing. It is a flowchart which shows the reception interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing of a payout control device. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process of a sub-control device. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline of various counters used for determining a decorative pattern. It is a flowchart which shows the update process of a counter. It is a flowchart which shows the hold information storage process. It is a flowchart which shows the hold process. It is a flowchart which shows the hit display process. It is a front view which shows the visual appearance mode of a decorative pattern display device. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display mode (remaining display, etc.) in the decorative symbol display device in the jackpot state. It is explanatory drawing which shows the E1 table (and shows the correspondence relationship between a jackpot type and a type determination counter C2). It is explanatory drawing which shows the E2 table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the E3 table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the E4 table. It is a time chart which shows the opening and closing pattern of the variable winning apparatus in the jackpot state of 13RS. It is a time chart which shows the opening and closing pattern of the variable winning device in the jackpot state of 8RS. It is a time chart which shows the opening and closing pattern of the variable winning apparatus in the jackpot state of 8RN. It is a front schematic diagram which shows the central unit and the like of the 2nd Embodiment. It is a front schematic diagram which shows the lottery unit of 3rd Embodiment. It is a front schematic diagram which shows the specified number of times sorting apparatus in another embodiment. It is a front schematic diagram which shows the display board of the specified number of times sorting apparatus in another embodiment.

Hereinafter, an embodiment (first embodiment) of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as a “pachinko machine”) will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. As shown in FIG. 3 and the like, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 as a fixed frame constituting the outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and an inner frame 11 as a game board mounting frame is provided on one side of the outer frame 11. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable. In FIG. 3, for convenience, the game members (nails, accessories, etc.) arranged on the surface of the game board 30, the glass unit 137 attached to the front frame 14 as the front frame, and the like are omitted.

As shown in FIG. 6 and the like, the outer frame 11 has an upper frame component 11a and a lower frame component 11b made of a wooden plate, and the left side frame component 11c and the right side frame component 11d are extruded from an aluminum alloy. It is made of a material, and each of the frame constituent parts 11a to 11d is assembled in a rectangular frame shape as a whole by a detachable fastener such as a screw.

An upper hinge 81 and a lower hinge 82 are attached to the upper and lower ends of the left side frame component 11c, respectively (see FIG. 1). The upper and lower hinges 81 and the lower hinge 82 rotatably support the upper and lower parts of the inner frame 12, whereby the inner frame 12 can be opened and closed. Then, the inner frame 12 and the like are housed in the space formed inside the outer frame 11.

Further, the right side frame constituent portion 11d is formed with an extending wall portion 83 projecting from the vicinity of the rear end portion in the width direction toward the inside of the outer frame 11. The extending wall portion 83 covers the entire upper and lower sections corresponding to the locking device 600 (see FIG. 6) provided on the back side of the right side portion of the inner frame 12 from the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 5). In addition, as shown in FIG. 3, a pair of upper and lower receiving portions 84, 85 for locking the locking member of the locking device 600 are provided on the front surface side of the extending wall portion 83. Further, a pressing portion 86 that abuts on the inner frame opening detection switch 92, which will be described later, is projected from the lower receiving portion 85 toward the inside of the outer frame 11.

Further, a resin curtain plate decoration 87 is attached to the lower side frame component 11b. A rib 88 projecting upward is integrally formed at the inner part of the upper surface of the curtain plate decoration 87. This makes it difficult for a gap to be formed between the inner frame 12 and the inner frame 12.

As shown in FIG. 3, the opening / closing axis of the inner frame 12 is set along the upper and lower sides on the left side when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10, so that the inner frame 12 can be opened to the front side with this opening / closing axis as the axis. It has become. The inner frame 12 is mainly composed of a resin base 38 having a rectangular outer shape, and a substantially elliptical window hole 39 is formed in the central portion of the resin base 38.

Further, a front frame 14 is attached to the front side of the inner frame 12 so as to be openable and closable. Similar to the inner frame 12, the front frame 14 can be opened to the front side with the opening / closing axis set along the upper and lower sides on the left side when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10 as an axis. The front frame 14 may be configured to be directly openly supported by the outer frame 11 instead of being supported via the inner frame 12.

The front frame 14 has a rectangular outer shape like the inner frame 12, and covers almost the entire front side of the inner frame 12 in the closed state. A substantially elliptical window portion 101 is formed in the central portion of the front frame 14. As a result, the game board 30 (game area) mounted on the rear surface of the inner frame 12 can be visually recognized from the outside through the window portion 101 of the front frame 14 and the window hole 39 of the inner frame 12. The detailed configuration of the game board 30 will be described later.

As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, a lower plate 15 as a ball tray is provided on the front side of the front frame 14 at the center of the lower portion thereof, and the game ball discharged from the lower payment outlet 16 is the lower plate 15. It can be stored inside. Further, on the front side of the lower plate 15, a ball pulling lever 25 for discharging the game ball from the lower plate 15 is provided.

On the right side of the lower plate 15, a game ball launching handle (hereinafter referred to as “handle 18”) is provided as an operating means (launching operating means) protruding toward the front side. The handle 18 is provided with a rotation operating body 18a as an operation unit provided so as to be rotatable, and a touch as a touch detecting means capable of detecting that a human touches the handle 18 at a position (not shown). A sensor and a variable resistor as an operation amount detecting means for detecting the operation amount of the operation portion of the handle 18 are provided. Then, when the handle 18 is rotated clockwise, the game ball is launched by the launching device 60 as a launching means, which will be described later, with a strength corresponding to the amount of the rotating operation. Further, the handle 18 is provided with a stop lever 18b as a stop operation means that can be pressed by the thumb of the right hand holding the handle 18. In the state where the stop lever 18b is pressed, even if the handle 18 is held, the launching device 60 is prohibited from launching the game ball. Therefore, it is possible to rotate the handle 18 while prohibiting the firing of the game ball, or to temporarily stop the firing of the game ball while holding the handle 18.

As shown in FIG. 2, above the lower plate 15, an upper plate 19 capable of storing game balls given (paid out) to the player from the inside of the pachinko machine 10 via the upper payout outlet 17 is provided. There is. The upper plate 19 is a ball tray that temporarily stores the game balls and guides them toward the launching device 60, which will be described later, while arranging them in a row. When the upper plate 19 is full of game balls, the game balls to be paid out are guided to the lower plate 15 via the lower plate continuous passage 71 and the lower payment outlet 16, which will be described later.

A lending switch 121, a return switch 122, and a balance display unit 124 are provided on the upper surface side (peripheral portion of the storage portion) of the upper plate 19. In a game hall or the like, when the lending switch 121 is operated with a game card having a balance inserted (inserted) into the CR unit arranged on the (left) side of the pachinko machine 10, the lending switch 121 is operated in response to the operation. The rental ball is supplied to the upper plate 19. On the other hand, the return switch 122 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the CR unit. In addition, the balance display unit 124 displays how much the balance of the card inserted in the CR unit is.

Further, on the upper surface side of the upper plate 19, a ball removal button 123 is configured to be able to appear and disappear up and down, and is always urged to the side protruding from the upper surface of the upper plate 19 by an urging means (not shown). By pressing the ball removal button 123, the space between the upper plate 19 and the lower plate 15 is opened, and the game ball stored in the upper plate 19 is guided to the lower plate 15. .. That is, the player can move the game ball on the upper plate 19 to the lower plate 15 at any time by operating the ball removal button 123.

In addition, an effect button 125 and a cross button 126 as effect operation means are provided on the upper surface side of the upper plate 19. The effect button 125 has a built-in LED, and by pressing the effect button 125 and the cross button 126, a corresponding effect can be performed on the decorative pattern display device 42 or the like, which will be described later, or the effect content can be changed. It is done.

Further, on the front surface of the front frame 14, various light emitting means such as lamps are provided around the front frame 14. These light emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game by changing and controlling the light emitting mode according to the change of the gaming state or the like. For example, an annular illumination portion 102 having a light emitting means such as an LED is provided on the peripheral edge of the window portion 101. Further, error indicator lamps 104 that light up when a predetermined error occurs are provided on both sides of the annular illumination portion 102. A large number of fine through holes corresponding to the speaker SP (see FIG. 3) provided on the back surface of the front frame 14 are formed in the upper portion of each error indicator lamp 104 in the annular illumination portion 102.

A glass unit 137 is attached to the back side of the front frame 14. The glass unit 137 is not a conventional pair of front and rear rectangular plate glasses that are attached to each other in a front and rear pair, but is attached after being assembled into a round shape as a whole.

Next, the inner frame 12 will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the game board 30 is mounted on the inner frame 12 on the rear side of the window hole 39 in a state of being in contact with the back side of the resin base 38. Therefore, the substantially central portion of the front surface of the game board 30 is exposed to the front surface side of the inner frame 12 through the window hole 39.

Further, a launching device 60 and a launching rail 61 for guiding the game ball immediately after being launched by the launching device 60 are attached to the lower front portion of the inner frame 12 (resin base 38), that is, at a position below the window hole 39. There is. In this embodiment, a solenoid type launcher is adopted as the launcher 60. Further, above the launching device 60, a ball feeding device that guides the game balls guided from the upper plate 19 to the launching position of the launching device 60 one by one by driving a built-in driving means (for example, a solenoid). 63 is provided.

Next, the configuration of the game board 30 (game area) will be described with reference to FIG. The game board 30 includes a general winning device 31, a first variable winning device 32a (first variable winning means) as a variable winning means, a second variable winning device 32b (second variable winning means), and starting. A first start winning device 33a (first starting ball entering means), a second starting winning device 33b (second starting ball entering means), a through gate 34, a variable display device unit 35, etc. are arranged as ball entering means. Has been done. As is well known, when a game ball enters (wins) various winning devices such as the general winning device 31, the variable winning devices 32a and 32b, and the starting winning devices 33a and 33b, it is detected by various detection switches and the upper plate 19 or the lower plate 19 or the lower. A predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the plate 15.

In the present embodiment, 3 balls are entered in the starting winning devices 33a and 33b, 10 balls are entered in the general winning device 31 and 10 balls are entered in the variable winning devices 32a and 32b. If there is a ball, 10 game balls are paid out. Further, even if the game ball passes through the through gate 34 (which is not discharged to the back surface side of the game board 30) through which the game ball passes in the game area, the game ball is not paid out. In addition, the first starting winning device 33a, the general winning device 31, and the through gate 34 are configured so that a game ball moving in the game area can always enter or pass through. The two starting winning devices 33b and the variable winning devices 32a and 32b are configured to change the state between an open state in which the game ball can be entered and a closed state in which the game ball cannot be entered.

As will be described in detail later, the first start winning device 33a and the second start winning device 33b include a condition establishment detecting means for detecting a winning game ball and a first starting winning switch 224a as a starting winning ball detecting means, respectively. , A second start winning switch 224b is provided. When a game ball is detected by the start winning switch 224a and 224b, whether or not to generate a jackpot state as a special gaming state in which the first variable winning device 32a and the second variable winning device 32b are opened. In addition to the winning / failing lottery, the special display devices 43a and 43b, which will be described later, and the decorative symbol display device 42 perform variable display. Then, if the winner is won by the winning or losing lottery, the jackpot state will be given.

In addition, the game board 30 is provided with an out port 36 corresponding to the lowermost part of the game area, and a game ball that has not won a prize in various winning devices such as the general winning device 31 can use the out port 36. It is discharged to the outside of the game area through it. Further, in the game board 30, a large number of nails (game nails) are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game balls, and various members (roles) such as a windmill are arranged. ing.

A variable display device unit 35 is arranged at a substantially central portion of the game area. In the variable display device unit 35, a center frame 47 is arranged so as to surround the decorative symbol display device 42, which will be described later. A pair of left and right entry ports 151 are provided on the upper part of the center frame 47, and the game balls that enter the inside of the center frame 47 through the entry openings 151 are left and right side portions of the decorative symbol display device 42. It is guided on the stage 153 formed below the decorative symbol display device 42 via the warp flow path 152 extending vertically along the above. The game ball guided on the stage 153 falls from the top of the stage 153 to the front game area, or rolls on the stage 153 and then enters the pocket 154 formed on the inner back side of the center of the stage 153. .. In addition, the pocket 154 communicates with the guide passage 155 leading to the game area directly above the first start winning device 33a, and the game ball entering the pocket 154 has a relatively high probability of being described later. The ball is inserted into the first start winning device 33a.

A first start winning device 33a is arranged at a lower position of the variable display device unit 35. The first starting winning device 33a protrudes forward from the front portion of the game board 30, and a winning opening (starting winning opening) through which the game ball can always win is opened on the upper side thereof. The first starting winning device 33a of the present embodiment is not provided with a configuration (opening / closing member or the like) that changes the ease of entering the game ball into the first starting winning device 33a.

A first variable winning device 32a is provided at a lower right position of the first starting winning device 33a. The first variable winning device 32a of the present embodiment has a first specific area 141a in which a game ball moving in the game area can enter, and a first ball opening 142a (large) serving as an entrance to the first specific area 141a. A first opening / closing member 143a (shutter) for opening / closing the winning opening) and a solenoid (not shown) for opening / closing the first opening / closing member 143a are provided. By opening and closing the opening / closing member 143a, the first variable winning device 32a is switched between the closed state and the open state. The first variable winning device 32a is normally in a closed state in which a game ball cannot enter, and is in an open state in which a game ball can enter in a corresponding jackpot state.

The first variable winning device 32a of the present embodiment has a configuration in which the first variable winning device 32a opens upward (the first ball opening 142a is provided on the upper surface side), and the width of the front and rear of the first ball opening 142a is It is wider than the diameter of the game ball, and the left and right widths of the first entry ball opening 142a are wider than three times the diameter of the game ball. Further, the first opening / closing member 143a has a substantially rectangular plate shape, has a closed position that protrudes into the game area and closes the first ball entry opening 142a, and is retracted from the game area by being pulled toward the game board 30. 1 It is configured so that it can be slid back and forth between the opening position and the opening position of opening the ball entry 142a. That is, when the first opening / closing member 143a is in the open position, the first variable winning device 32a is opened, and when the first opening / closing member 143a is in the closed position, the first variable winning device 32a is in the closed state. ..

Further, the upper surface of the first opening / closing member 143a in the closed position is inclined downward toward the left side (the central portion side in the lateral width direction of the game area). Therefore, even if the game ball is placed on the first opening / closing member 143a in the closed state of the first variable winning device 32a, the game ball does not stay on the first opening / closing member 143a, and the game area. You will be guided to the downstream side of.

Further, the first variable winning device 32a enters the first entry count switch 226a and the first specific area 141a as pre-detection means capable of detecting all the game balls that have entered the first specific area 141a. , The first special entry section 145a as a special area where the game ball detected by the first entry count switch 226a can enter, the first non-special entry section 146a, and the first special entry section 145a. The first special entry detection switch 223a as the arrival detection means for detecting the game ball that has entered the ball, and the first non-special entry detection switch 222a that detects the game ball that has entered the first non-special entry section 146a. And, the switching means for guiding the game ball detected by the first ball entry count switch 226a to either the first special ball entry section 145a or the first non-special entry section 146a, and the first distribution as an influence means. It is equipped with a device 149a. The discharge detection means is configured by the first special ball entry detection switch 223a and the first non-special ball entry detection switch 222a.

The first sorting device 149a has a closed position (regulated state) that regulates entry into the first special entry section 145a and an open position (allowable state) that allows entry into the first special entry section 145a. It is configured so that it can be slid back and forth between the spaces. That is, if the first distribution device 149a is in the open position when the game ball that has entered the first specific area 141a reaches the first distribution device 149a, the game ball enters the first special ball entry portion 145a. Then, if the first sorting device 149a is in the closed position, the game ball enters the first non-special ball entry portion 146a. The first distribution device 149a is driven and controlled by the main control device 261 described later. Further, as will be described in detail later, in the present embodiment, in the jackpot state, three or more game balls enter the first special ball entry portion 145a of the first variable winning device 32a, and the first special ball entry detection switch. When the detection by the 223a is performed three times or more, the probability variation mode described later is given.

In addition, in the present embodiment, basically, from the time when the game ball enters the first ball opening 142a of the first variable winning device 32a until the game ball is detected by the first special ball detection switch 223a. It takes about 0.5 seconds.

Further, in the present embodiment, when a game ball is to be entered into the first start winning device 32a by arranging a game nail or the like provided in the game area, the game ball is placed in a variable display device unit in the game area. It is necessary to pass (left-handed) through the area (left-handed area) located on the left side of 35, and even if it is passed through (right-handed) the area (right-handed area) located on the right side of the variable display device unit 35. Even if), it is not possible to enter the ball into the first start winning device 32a. On the other hand, when the game ball is entered into the first variable winning device 32a, it is necessary to pass the game ball through the right side region, and even if the game ball is passed through the left side region, the first variable winning device 32a It is almost impossible to enter the ball.

In the lower part of the right side region, a second start winning device 33b is provided at a position on the upper right side of the first variable winning device 32a. The second start winning device 33b includes a pair of blade members 37 provided so as to be rotatable and displaceable adjacent to the left and right sides of a winning opening (starting winning opening) into which a game ball can enter. In the present embodiment, when the blade member 37 is in the closed position extending vertically, there is no room for the game ball to pass between the tip portions of the pair of blade members 37 and the game nail, and the second start The winning device 33b is in a closed state in which it is impossible to insert a game ball. On the other hand, by changing the blade member 37 to an open position that opens outward, the second start winning device 33b secures a gap through which the game ball passes between the blade member 37 and the game nail, and the game ball enters the ball. Is allowed, and the blade member 37 guides the game ball moving to the side of the start winning opening of the second starting winning device 33b to the starting winning opening (the game ball is easily entered). Become.

In the upper part of the right side region, a through gate 34 is provided above the second start winning device 33b so that the game balls flowing down the game area can pass through one by one. As will be described in detail later, the through gate 34 includes a through gate switch 225 capable of detecting a game ball passing through the through gate 34. In the present embodiment, the through gate 34 is not provided in the left side region.

Further, when a game ball is detected by the through gate switch 225, a ball entry support lottery (open lottery) for whether or not to open the second start winning device 33b is performed, and the normal symbol display device 41 is performed. In order to teach the result of the ball entry support lottery, a variable display is performed. Then, when the ball is won in the ball entry support lottery, the second start winning device 33b is opened for a specified time after the end of the variation display.

In the present embodiment, there are a "low probability state" in which a jackpot is won with a predetermined probability in a winning / failing lottery, and a "high probability state" in which a jackpot is won with a higher probability than a low probability state in a winning / failing lottery. Further, a "high ball entry state" as a second ball entry state in which the blade member 37 of the second start winning device 33b is opened relatively frequently to facilitate the entry of the game ball into the second start winning device 33b. There is a "low ball entry state" as a first ball entry state in which the time zone in which the blade member 37 is opened is reduced as compared with the high ball entry state. Hereinafter, among the normal game states in which the winning / failing lottery is performed, the state of the low probability state and the low ball entry state is referred to as the "normal mode", and the state of the low probability state and the high ball entry state is referred to as the "time reduction mode (or time reduction mode)". , Time saving mode) ”, and the state of high probability state and high ball entry state is called“ probability variation mode ”. In addition to these game modes, it is also possible to provide a high probability state and a low ball entry state (latent probability mode).

The high ball entry state includes, for example, (1) a state in which the fluctuation display time in the normal symbol display device 41 is shorter than that in the low ball entry state, and (2) a single opening time of the second start winning device 33b (2). (Specified time) is longer than in the low ball entry state, (3) The specified number of game balls that can be entered per opening of the second start winning device 33b is larger than in the low ball entry state. (4) The number of times the second start winning device 33b is opened per winning of the ball entry support lottery is larger than that in the low ball entry state, and (5) The winning probability of the ball entry support lottery is higher than in the low ball entry state. For example, it should be in a high state. The high ball entry state in this embodiment adopts the configurations of (1), (2), (4), and (5) above. Of course, the present invention is not limited to this, and any one of the configurations (1) to (5) or any combination of these configurations (1) to (5) may be adopted as the "high ball entry state". .. As a result, it becomes easy for the game ball to win the second start winning device 33b frequently, the number of times the winning / failing lottery is executed increases, and the decrease in the number of balls held by the player is suppressed, resulting in a good ball holding state. ..

Further, in the present embodiment, the normal mode and the probability variation mode are continued until the jackpot state occurs, whereas the time reduction mode is the variable display on the special display devices 43a and 43b even if the jackpot state does not occur. Is performed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this example), the process ends, and the mode shifts to the normal mode.

A second variable winning device 32b is provided at a position above the second starting winning device 33b and below the through gate 34 in the lower right portion of the center frame 47. The second variable winning device 32b of the present embodiment has a second specific area 141b in which a game ball moving in the game area can enter, and a second ball opening 142b (large) serving as an entrance to the second specific area 141b. A second opening / closing member 143b for opening / closing the winning opening) and a solenoid (not shown) for opening / closing the second opening / closing member 143b are provided, and the solenoid is driven and controlled (by a main control device 261 described later) to drive and control the second opening / closing member 143b. The second variable winning device 32b is switched between the closed state and the open state by opening and closing. The second variable winning device 32b is normally in a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter, and is in an open state in which the game ball can enter in the corresponding jackpot state.

The second opening / closing member 143b of the present embodiment is rotatably supported around a shaft portion (not shown) extending in the front-rear direction at the lower portion of the second ball entry opening 142b, and is a second variable winning prize. In the closed state of the device 32b, the second opening / closing member 143b extends vertically to close the second ball entry opening 142b. On the other hand, in the open state of the second variable winning device 32b, the second opening / closing member 143b opens to the right (the upper surface is slightly inclined upward toward the right) and flows down to the right of the second variable winning device 32b. The game ball that has been played is received by the back surface (upper surface) of the second opening / closing member 143b and guided to the second ball entry opening 142b.

Further, the second variable winning device 32b has a second ball entry count switch 226b capable of detecting all the game balls that have entered the second specific area 141b, and a second ball entry device 32b that has entered the second specific area 141b and has a second ball entry. A game in which a second special entry section 145b, a second non-special entry section 146b, and a second special entry section 145b are entered as a special area in which a game ball detected by the count switch 226b can enter. The second special ball entry detection switch 223b that detects a ball, the second non-special ball entry detection switch 222b that detects a game ball that has entered the second non-special ball entry section 146b, and the second non-special ball entry count switch 226b. It is provided with a second distribution device 149b that guides the detected game ball to one of the second special ball entry section 145b and the second non-special entry section 146b.

The second sorting device 149b has a closed position (regulated state) that regulates entry into the second special entry section 145b and an open position (allowable state) that allows entry into the second special entry section 145b. It is configured so that it can be slid back and forth between the spaces. That is, if the second distribution device 149b is in the open position when the game ball that has entered the second specific area 141b reaches the second distribution device 149b, the game ball enters the second special ball entry portion 145b. Then, if the second sorting device 149b is in the closed position, the game ball enters the second non-special ball entry portion 146b. The second distribution device 149b is driven and controlled by the main control device 261 described later. Further, as will be described in detail later, in the present embodiment, in the jackpot state, one or more game balls enter the second special ball entry portion 145b of the second variable winning device 32b, and the second special ball entry detection switch When the detection by 223b is performed one or more times, the probability variation mode is given.

The jackpot types of the present embodiment include a 13-round probability variation jackpot (hereinafter referred to as "13RS"), an 8-round probability variation jackpot (hereinafter referred to as "8RS"), and an 8-round normal jackpot (hereinafter referred to as "8RN"). ). Regarding "13RS", the first variable winning device 32a or the second variable winning device 32b is opened for 28 seconds or 1.8 seconds, or the first variable winning device 32a or Eight game balls enter the second variable winning device 32b as one round, and after this is repeated 13 times, the jackpot state ends.

In particular, as shown in FIG. 47, in the "13RS" of the present embodiment, the first variable winning device 32a is opened for a maximum of 28 seconds in the first round and the third to thirteenth rounds, and the second "13RS-1" is a pattern in which the second variable winning device 32b is opened for a maximum of 28 seconds in the round, and the first variable winning device 32a is the longest in the first, third, fifth, seventh, ninth, and eleventh rounds. In the second, fourth, sixth, eighth, tenth, and twelfth rounds, the first variable winning device 32a is opened for a maximum of 1.8 seconds, and in the thirteenth round, the second variable winning device 32b is opened. Is a pattern that is open for a maximum of 28 seconds, and the first variable winning device 32a is opened for a maximum of 28 seconds in the first, third, fifth, seventh, ninth, and eleventh rounds. In the 4th, 6th, 8th, 10th, and 12th rounds, the 1st variable winning device 32a is opened for a maximum of 1.8 seconds, and in the 2nd round, the 2nd variable winning device 32b is opened for a maximum of 1.8 seconds. The pattern "13RS-3" is provided in which the second variable winning device 32b is opened for a maximum of 28 seconds in the 13th round.

In the present embodiment, during the round in which the second variable winning device 32b is in the open state for 28 seconds, the second distribution device 149b is also in the open position, and the game ball is placed on the right side of the game area. If it is launched into the area (if it is launched to the right), the game ball can almost certainly be entered into the second special entry portion 145b of the second variable winning device 32b in the round, and after the jackpot state is completed. Is given a probabilistic mode.

Further, in the round in which the variable winning devices 32a and 32b are opened for 1.8 seconds, it is a game property of whether or not one game ball enters the variable winning devices 32a and 32b, and sometimes two balls are entered. Although it is conceivable that three balls will enter, or very rarely, there is not much hope for increasing the number of game balls (game value) acquired by the player. Therefore, although the number of game values that can be acquired by "13RS-2" and "13RS-3" is smaller than that of "13RS-1" (the number of rounds in which the number of game balls can be expected to increase is actually 7 rounds), the first round. Since the second variable winning device 32b is opened for 28 seconds in the 13th round, the probability variation mode is substantially given after the jackpot state ends.

Regarding "8RS", after the first variable winning device 32a or the second variable winning device 32b is opened for 28 seconds, or the first variable winning device 32a is opened for 1.8 seconds. One round is that the game is closed for 1 second and then opened for 28 seconds, or that eight game balls enter the first variable winning device 32a or the second variable winning device 32b. After that is repeated 8 times, the jackpot state ends.

In particular, as shown in FIG. 48, in the "8RS" of the present embodiment, the first variable winning device 32a is opened for a maximum of 28 seconds in the first and seventh rounds, and the first in the second to sixth rounds. The variable winning device 32a is opened for a maximum of 1.8 seconds, then closed for 1 second and then opened for 28 seconds, and in the 8th round, the second variable winning device 32b is opened for a maximum of 28 seconds. The pattern "8RS-1" and the first variable winning device 32a are opened for a maximum of 28 seconds in the first, sixth and seventh rounds, and the first variable winning device 32a is opened in the second to fifth rounds. It is a pattern in which the second variable winning device 32b is opened for a maximum of 28 seconds in the eighth round after being opened for a maximum of 1.8 seconds, closed for 1 second, and then opened for 28 seconds. "8RS-2" is provided. Regarding "8RS", the game ball can be entered into the second special ball entry portion 145b of the second variable winning device 32b in the eighth round, and the "probability variation mode" is given after the jackpot state ends. It has become.

Regarding "8RN", the first variable winning device 32a is opened for 28 seconds, the first variable winning device 32a is opened for 1.8 seconds, closed for 1 second, and then opened for 28 seconds. The jackpot state ends after the state is set or eight game balls enter the first variable winning device 32a as one round, which is repeated eight times.

In particular, as shown in FIG. 49, in the "8RN" of the present embodiment, the first variable winning device 32a is opened for a maximum of 28 seconds in the first, seventh, and eighth rounds, and in the second to sixth rounds. "8RN-1", which is a pattern in which the first variable winning device 32a is opened for a maximum of 1.8 seconds, closed for 1 second, and then opened for 28 seconds, and the first, sixth to eighth. In the round, the first variable winning device 32a is opened for a maximum of 28 seconds, and in the second to fifth rounds, the first variable winning device 32a is opened for a maximum of 1.8 seconds and then closed for 1 second. After that, the pattern "8RN-2" which is opened for 28 seconds and the first variable winning device 32a in the first, third, seventh, and eighth rounds are opened for a maximum of 28 seconds, and the second, fourth, and fourth to fourth. In the 6th round, the first variable winning device 32a is opened for a maximum of 1.8 seconds, then closed for 1 second, and then opened for 28 seconds. In the 4th, 7th and 8th rounds, the 1st variable winning device 32a is opened for a maximum of 28 seconds, and in the 2nd, 3rd, 5th and 6th rounds, the 1st variable winning device 32a is opened for a maximum of 1.8 seconds. "8RN-4", which is a pattern that is closed for 1 second and then opened for 28 seconds, and the first variable winning device 32a is open for a maximum of 28 seconds in the first, fifth, sixth, and eighth rounds. In the 2nd, 4th, and 7th rounds, the first variable winning device 32a is opened for a maximum of 1.8 seconds, closed for 1 second, and then opened for 28 seconds. -5 "is provided.

For "8RN", there is no opportunity for the second variable winning device 32b to be opened. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the jackpot state of "8RN", the first sorting device 149a is set to the open position while the first variable winning device 32a is opened for 1.8 seconds. ing. In "8RN-1", the first variable winning device 32a has five opportunities to be opened for 1.8 seconds, and in "8RN-2" to "8RN-5", the first variable winning device 32a is 1 . There are 4 chances to be open for 8 seconds. Further, in the present embodiment, in the jackpot state of "8RN", when the first special ball entry detection switch 223a is detected three or more times, the probability change mode is given after the jackpot state ends. .. It is not necessary for the first special ball entry detection switch 223a to detect three game balls in one opportunity when the first variable winning device 32b is opened for 1.8 seconds, from the start to the end of the jackpot state. If the first special ball entry detection switch 223a can detect three game balls in the meantime (by the end of the last opportunity when the first variable winning device 32b is opened for 1.8 seconds), the probability change mode is set. You can get the right.

With the above configuration, in the jackpot state of "8RN", while the first variable winning device 32a is open for 28 seconds, the first variable winning device is firmly entered to the upper limit of the round. Aiming at the opportunity that the 32a is opened for 1.8 seconds, the jackpot state is advanced with the goal of allowing the game ball to enter the first variable winning device 32a and, by extension, the first special ball entry portion 145a three times. It becomes. Since it takes about 0.5 seconds from when the game ball is inserted into the first variable winning device 32a until it is detected by the first special ball entry detection switch 223a, immediately after the opening of the first opening / closing member 143a to 1 Until the lapse of 3 seconds, there is a chance that the game ball is substantially entered into the first variable winning device 32a and detected by the first special ball entry detection switch 223a. Further, the game ball can be launched every 0.6 seconds by the launching device 60, and a plurality of game balls are specially entered in one opportunity when the first variable winning device 32b is opened for 1.8 seconds. There is a possibility that the ball will enter 146a. When the number of detections of the first special ball entry detection switch 223a is less than 3 times in the jackpot state of "8RN", the "time reduction mode" is given after the jackpot state ends. In the jackpot state of "13RS" and "8RS", the second special ball entry detection switch 223b is detected only once, and the "probability change mode" is given after the jackpot state ends. Even in the jackpot states of "13RS" and "8RS", if the second special ball entry detection switch 223b is not detected even once, the "time reduction mode" is given after the jackpot state ends.

As shown in FIG. 4, adjacent to the upper right portion of the substantially elliptical game area, a variable display for teaching the result of the winning / failing lottery performed when the game ball enters the first start winning device 33a. (Result teaching display) is performed, the first special display device 43a as the lottery result teaching means, and the result of the winning / failing lottery performed when the game ball enters the second starting winning device 33b are taught. A special display means for performing variable display (result teaching display), a second special display device 43b as a lottery result teaching means, and start winning devices 33a and 33b during variable display on the special display devices 43a and 43b. When a game ball is entered, the first hold display device 46a and the second hold display device 46b and the through gate 34 as hold display means indicating that the variation display corresponding to the entry is stored on hold. The normal symbol display device 41 as a normal display means for teaching the result of the ball entry support lottery performed based on the passage of the game ball, and the through gate during the variable display in the normal symbol display device 41. When the game ball passes through the 34, a normal hold display device 44 indicating that the variation display corresponding to the passage is held and stored is provided so as to be visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first special display device 43a, the second special display device 43b, the first hold display device 46a, the second hold display device 46b, the normal symbol display device 41, and the normal hold display device 44 will be described later. The display is directly controlled by the main control device 261 as the main control means.

The first special display device 43a is composed of four LEDs (first special figure lamp). Then, upon the entry of the game ball into the first start winning device 33a, the first special display device 43a is configured to perform the switching display (variable display) of the first special figure lamp.

The second special display device 43b is composed of four LEDs (second special figure lamp). Then, when the game ball enters the second start winning device 33b, the second special display device 43b switches and displays the second special figure lamp (variable display).

Further, after the variable display is performed on the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b for a predetermined time, the variable display is stopped based on the result of the winning / failing lottery. That is, the lighting mode when the variation display is stopped (combination of the special drawing lamps that are lit) is associated with various results of the winning / failing lottery, and the winning / failing lottery depends on the lighting mode when the variation display is stopped. The result of, that is, "big hit" or "missing" is definitely displayed.

Further, in the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b, depending on the lighting mode (stop mode) to be stopped, the jackpot type, that is, any of "13RS", "8RS", and "8RN" You will also be taught if there is one. In addition, there are not one but a plurality of stop modes of the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b that teach various jackpot types and the fact that they are out of order, and one of them is selected to display the stop. Will be done.

As shown in FIG. 43, in the winning / failing lottery performed when the game ball enters the first starting winning device 33a, the winning / failing is performed when the game ball enters the second starting winning device 33b. Compared to the lottery, if you win the jackpot state, the ratio of being distributed to "13RS" and "8RS" is higher, and even if you win "8RN", the game ball is relatively the first special ball entry detection switch. The ratio of being assigned to "8RN-1", which makes it easier for 223a to detect three or more times, is high.

Further, the stop display on the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b is configured to be maintained for a specified time, and the next fluctuation display can be started after the specified time has elapsed (after the fluctuation interval). Has been done. Further, if the next fluctuation display is not performed even after the specified time has elapsed after the stop display on the first special display device 43a or the second special display device 43b, the first special display device 43a or the second special display device 43a or the second. The special display device 43b is configured to switch from a lighting mode indicating the result of the winning / failing lottery to a lighting mode indicating a standby state in which variable display is not performed. It should be noted that the lighting mode indicating the result of the winning / failing lottery may be maintained as it is.

The first hold display device 46a and the second hold display device 46b are each composed of two LEDs (first hold lamp and second hold lamp). In the present embodiment, the variation display (hereinafter, referred to as "first variation display") based on the entry of the game ball into the first start winning device 33a can be held and stored up to four times. Further, the variation display based on the entry of the game ball into the second start winning device 33b (hereinafter, referred to as “second variation display”) is also configured to be hold-stored for up to four times.

Further, for example, when the first fluctuation display is held for one time, the first hold lamp on the left side (inner circumference side of the game area) lights up, and when the first fluctuation display is held for two times, the first fluctuation display is held for two times. , When the left and right first hold lamps are lit and the first fluctuation display is held three times, the first hold lamp on the left side blinks and the first hold lamp on the right side is lit, and the first change When the display is held for 4 times, the left and right first hold lamps blink. If a game ball newly wins a prize in the start winning devices 33a and 33b during the jackpot state, the fluctuation display for that amount is also reserved.

In the present embodiment, the reserved variable display is basically digested in the reserved order, but when both the first variable display and the second variable display are reserved, the second variable display is used. The variable display is preferentially digested. That is, if the second variation display triggered by the winning of the second starting winning device 33b is not completely digested, the first variation display triggered by the entry of the ball into the first starting winning device 33a is performed. There is no configuration. For example, when one of the first hold lamps is lit, a game ball enters the second start winning device 33b and one of the second hold lamps is lit, the first variation display is postponed. The second variation display will be performed first.

The ordinary symbol display device 41 is composed of two LEDs (normal symbol lamps). Then, the normal symbol display device 41 has a configuration in which, for example, the normal map lamp on the right side (outer peripheral side of the game area) blinks (variably displays) when the game ball passes through the through gate 34. There is. Further, after the variable display is performed on the normal symbol display device 41 for a predetermined time, the variable display is stopped based on the result of the ball entry support lottery. That is, the lighting mode when the fluctuation display is stopped (combination of the lighting normal lamps) is associated with various results of the ball entry support lottery, and the lighting mode when the fluctuation display is stopped depends on the lighting mode. The result of the ball entry support lottery is definitely displayed. For example, lighting both the left and right Fuzu lamps indicates "winning", and lighting only the left Fuzu lamp indicates "off".

The normal hold display device 44 is composed of two LEDs (normal hold lamps). In the present embodiment, the variable display of the normal symbol display device 41, which is performed based on the passage of the game ball through the through gate 34, can be held and stored up to four times. For example, when the fluctuation display of the normal symbol display device 41 is held for one time, the normal hold lamp on the left side (inner circumference side of the game area) lights up, and when the normal symbol display device 41 is held for two times, the left and right normals are normal. The hold lamp lights up, and when three times are held, the left side normal hold lamp blinks, and the right side normal hold lamp lights up, and when four times are held, the left and right normal hold lamps. Flashes. If the game ball newly passes through the through gate 34 during the jackpot state, the fluctuation display for that amount is also reserved.

Further, the variable display device unit 35 is provided with a decorative symbol display device 42 as an effect display means capable of displaying a decorative symbol, which is composed of a liquid crystal display device. The decorative symbol display device 42 is configured to variably display the decorative symbol as an effect in accordance with the variable display by the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b. Hereinafter, the variable display of the decorative symbol on the decorative symbol display device 42 is also referred to as “effect variable display”, and the effect variable display corresponds to the teaching-corresponding effect. Further, the display content of the decorative symbol display device 42 is controlled by the sub control device 262 and the display control device 45, which will be described later. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 42, the sub control device 262 is based on the command from the main control device 261 so as to correspond to the result displayed by the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b. Auxiliary display contents are determined, and based on the determination, display is performed by the display control device 45.

As shown in FIG. 41, the decorative symbol display device 42 is provided with, for example, three symbol display areas (upper symbol display area, middle symbol display area, lower symbol display area), and each symbol is provided. In the display area, a plurality of types of decorative symbols (for example, numerical symbols with numbers 1 to 9) are sequentially displayed (variably displayed), and then in order for each symbol display area (for example, upper symbol display area → lower). Decorative symbols are stopped and displayed (in the order of symbol display area → middle symbol display area). For example, when the occurrence of the jackpot state is confirmed by the main control device 261, the first or second special display devices 43a and 43b display the jackpot, and the decorative symbol display device 42 displays the jackpot. (For example, in the upper symbol display area, the middle symbol display area, and the lower symbol display area, the same decorative symbols are stopped and displayed so as to line up on a predetermined effective line), and the jackpot state is displayed. It will be started.

When the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination corresponding to the jackpot, for example, the same decorative symbol is stopped and displayed on a predetermined effective line in the upper symbol display area and the lower symbol display area as a preliminary step. The Rukoto. In this way, the reach state is a state in which the same symbol is stopped and displayed on a predetermined effective line in the upper symbol display area and the lower symbol display area, and the variable display is still performed in the middle symbol display area. Of course, just because a reach state occurs does not necessarily mean that it will be a big hit, and it may come off.

In the present embodiment, after the reach state occurs, in the middle symbol display area, the same decorative symbol (reach symbol) that is stopped and displayed in the upper symbol display area and the lower symbol display area is stopped and displayed on the same effective line. If doublet is displayed (when doublet is stopped), a jackpot state is given. Further, when the number pattern of the decorative pattern has an odd number of doublets, "13RS" or "8RS" is generated, and when the number pattern has an even number of doublets, "13RS", "8RS", or , "8RN" occurs, and when getting doublet of "7", "13RS" is generated.

In the present embodiment, as an effect of teaching or suggesting the game mode in which the player is staying, a plurality of effect stages (with different backgrounds and the like) are prepared in the decorative symbol display device 42. More specifically, the "probability change stage" that confirms that you are staying in the probability change mode, the "normal stage" that confirms that you are staying in the normal mode, and the "pull back" that you are staying in the time reduction mode. There is a "stage". That is, when "13RS" and "8RS" are won, the stage shifts to the "probability change stage" after the jackpot state ends. If the player wins the "8RN", the player shifts to the "pullback stage" after the jackpot state ends. Further, when the variation display is performed 100 times in the pullback stage, the stage shifts to the "normal stage". In addition, it may be configured so that it may shift to the pullback stage without teaching that the probability variation mode is given when "8RS" is won (variation display is performed 100 times in the pullback stage in the probability variation mode). If so, it may be taught that it is in the probability variation mode).

Further, in the present embodiment, the fact that the variable display performed based on the entry of the game ball into the starting winning devices 33a and 33b is suspended (the right to execute the variable display is obtained) is the decorative symbol. It is also taught in the display device 42. In the present embodiment, a hold icon 461 indicating that the variable display is held and stored is displayed at the lower part (hold display area 462) of the decorative symbol display device 42.

At the bottom of the left side region, a general winning device 31 is arranged along the peripheral edge of the game region. The general winning device 31 projects forward from the front surface of the game board 30, and a winning opening at which the game ball can always win is opened on the upper side thereof.

Further, the game board 30 includes an inner rail component 51 and an outer rail component 52, and is attached with a rail 50 that guides the game ball launched from the launching device 60 to the upper part of the game board 30. As a result, the game ball launched by the rotation operation of the handle 18 is guided through the launch rail 61 and the rail 50 into the game area formed between the game board 30 and the glass unit 137.

A return ball prevention member 53 is attached to the tip end portion (upper left portion in FIG. 4) of the inner rail component 51. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the game ball once guided from the rail 50 to the game area returns to the inside of the rail 50. Further, a return rubber 54 is attached to a substantially tip portion (upper right portion in FIG. 4) of the outer rail component portion 52. The game ball launched with a momentum equal to or higher than a predetermined value hits the return rubber 54 and is returned to, for example, the substantially central portion side of the game board 30.

Further, in the present embodiment, the outer rail component 52 is interrupted at the upper right portion of the game board 30, and the inner rail component 51 is interrupted at the lower right portion of the game board 30. Therefore, the game area is defined by the inner peripheral surfaces of the rail 50 and the window hole 39 of the resin base 38. However, since the rail 50 may flow backward until the game ball launched by the launching device 60 passes through the return ball prevention member 53, the parallel portions of the inner and outer rail constituent parts 51 and 52 are excluded from the game area. Be taken.

As shown in FIG. 3, a ball passage unit 70 is provided below the window portion 101 on the back side of the front frame 14. The ball passage unit 70 includes a lower plate continuous passage 71 that connects the payout mechanism unit 352 to the lower payout outlet 16 of the lower plate 15, and an upper plate continuous passage 73 that connects the payout mechanism unit 352 to the upper plate 19. Further, there is a gap of a predetermined distance between the launch rail 61 provided on the front side of the inner frame 12 and the rail 50 (outer rail component 52), and the ball passage unit 70 of the front frame 14 has the gap. A foul ball passage 72 is formed to guide the more dropped game ball to the lower plate 15. As a result, if the game ball launched from the launching device 60 does not reach the return ball prevention member 53 and returns to the rail 50 as a foul ball, the foul ball returns to the lower plate 15 via the foul ball passage 72. It is discharged.

Further, a launch ball passage 74 is provided which communicates between the upper plate 19 and the ball feeding device 63 and guides the game ball stored in the upper plate 19 to the ball feeding device 63. In addition, a communication hole (not shown) communicating with the lower plate communication passage 71 is formed in the launch ball passage 74 (a downstream portion of the upper plate 19 is also possible), and a first shutter (not shown) for opening and closing the communication hole (not shown). (Not shown) is provided. The first shutter is always urged to the closed position side that closes the communication hole by an urging means (not shown). Further, the first shutter is interlocked with the ball pulling button 123, and is configured to be displaced to an opening position for opening the communication hole when the ball pulling button 123 is pressed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 2, the lower plate 15 is formed with a discharge port 15a capable of discharging the game balls stored in the lower plate 15 to the outside of the pachinko machine 10, and the discharge port 15a is provided. A second shutter 15b for opening and closing is provided. The second shutter 15b is always urged to the closed position side that closes the discharge port 15a by an urging means (not shown). Further, the second shutter 15b is configured to be interlocked with the ball pulling lever 25 (for example, connected or integrally formed), and when the ball pulling lever 25 is pressed (to the left). Is configured to be displaced to an open position that opens the discharge port 15a.

Further, reference numeral 67 in FIGS. 3 and 4 is a payout passage for guiding the game ball paid out by the payout mechanism unit 352, which will be described later, to the front of the inner frame 12, and the upper plate continuous passage 73 (upper plate 19). It is divided into a passage leading to the lower plate and a passage leading to the lower plate continuous passage 71 (lower plate 15). A shutter 68 is provided below the payout passage 67, and when the front frame 14 is open, the shutter 68 protrudes forward due to the urging force of a spring or the like to almost close the outlet of the payout passage 67. There is. Further, in the state where the front frame 14 is closed, the shutter 68 is pushed open by the rear end portion on the entrance side of the lower plate connecting passage 71. It should be noted that the entrances (ball inflow portions) of the lower plate communication passage 71 and the upper plate communication passage 73 are adjacent to each other, and the respective entrances and the payout passage 67 are separated by a predetermined distance in the closed state of the front frame 14. The game ball can pass through the gap between them. Therefore, when the upper plate 19 and the upper plate connecting passage 73 are filled with the game balls, the game balls to be paid out flow to the lower plate connecting passage 71 side (overflow to the entrance side of the lower plate connecting passage 71), and the lower plate connecting passage 71 overflows. It will be paid out to the lower plate 15 through the passage 71.

In addition, the ball passage unit 70 is provided with a full detection switch (not shown) for detecting a game ball located in the lower plate continuous passage 71. By the presence of the fullness detection switch, it is grasped that the lower plate 15 is full of game balls (the lower plate 15 is full of game balls and the game balls are staying in the lower plate continuous passage 71). be able to. In the present embodiment, based on the fact that the game ball is continuously detected by the fullness detection switch for a predetermined time, an error notification that teaches that the lower plate 15 is full by using the display and voice of the decorative symbol display device 42 is notified. Is controlled. When the stagnation of the game ball in the lower plate continuous passage 71 is eliminated and the game ball is no longer detected by the full detection switch (when the game ball is not continuously detected for a predetermined time), the error notification state is released.

Next, the rear configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5, 6 and the like. On the back surface of the pachinko machine 10, various control boards are arranged so as to be arranged vertically and horizontally so as to be partially overlapped in the front-rear direction, and further, a game ball supply device (payout mechanism) for supplying the game balls. And a protective cover made of resin are attached. The payout mechanism and the protective cover are integrated as one unit, and the resin portion is generally referred to as a back pack. Therefore, the unit is referred to as a "back pack unit 203" here.

First, the back configuration of the game board 30 will be described. As shown in FIG. 6, a resin frame cover that covers the center frame 47 from behind is provided on the back side of the variable display device unit 35 (see FIG. 4) arranged corresponding to the through hole in the center of the game board 30. The 213 is provided so as to project rearward. Further, on the back side of the frame cover 213, a decorative symbol display device 42, a display control device 45, and a sub control device 262, which are liquid crystal display devices facing forward from the opening of the frame cover 213, can be attached and detached in a state of being stacked back and forth. It is attached to.

The decorative symbol display device 42 is housed in a storage box 42a having an opening for exposing the display unit (liquid crystal screen) of the decorative symbol display device 42 to the front side of the pachinko machine 10, and is housed in the back surface of the frame cover 213. It is fixed to the side. The display control device 45 is housed in the substrate box 45a and fixed to the back side of the decorative symbol display device 42 (storage box 42a). The sub control device 262 is housed in the board box 262a and fixed to the back side of the display control device 45 (board box 45a). In the frame cover 213, an LED control board or the like for driving the LED or the like built in the center frame 47 is arranged. Further, the storage box 42a and the substrate boxes 45a and 262a are made of a transparent resin material or the like so that the inside can be visually recognized.

Below the frame cover 213, a back frame set 215 is attached to the game board 30 so as to cover the general winning device 31, the variable winning devices 32a, 32b, the starting winning devices 33a, 33b, etc. from behind. The back frame set 215 is provided with a ball collection mechanism for collecting game balls that have won prizes in various winning devices (not shown). The game ball collected by the ball collection mechanism is guided to the discharge passage portion 217, which will be described later, and is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 from the discharge chute of the discharge passage portion 217.

Further, in the present embodiment, the back frame set 215 functions as a mounting base for the main control device 261. More specifically, the board box 263 on which the main control device 261 is mounted is rotatably supported by the back frame set 215 and can be opened rearward.

The main control device 261 is housed in a substrate box 263 made of a transparent resin material or the like. The substrate box 263 includes a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing member. The substrate box 263 connected by the sealing member has a structure that cannot be opened unless a predetermined trace is left. As a result, it is possible to easily detect that the substrate box 263 has been illegally opened.

Further, the game board 30 is provided with a ball entry detection switch that detects a game ball that has entered the various winning devices, corresponding to various winning devices such as the general winning device 31. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, a general winning switch 221 is provided at a position corresponding to the general winning device 31, and the first variable winning device 32a has a first winning ball count switch 226a and a first special. A ball entry detection switch 223a and a first non-special entry ball detection switch 222a are provided, and the second variable winning device 32b includes a stand 2 entry ball count switch 226b, a second special entry detection switch 223b, and a second. 2 A non-special ball entry detection switch 222b is provided. Further, the first start winning device 33a and the second starting winning device 33b are provided with a first starting winning switch 224a and a second starting winning switch 224b. Further, a through gate switch 225 is provided at a position corresponding to the through gate 34.

Although not shown, the back frame set 215 includes a general winning switch 221, a ball entry count switch 226a, 226b, a special entry detection switch 223a, 223b, a non-special entry detection switch 222a, 222b, and a through. A first board surface relay board that is electrically connected to the gate switch 225 via a cable connector is provided. The first board surface relay board relays the general winning switch 221 and the like and the main control device 261, and is electrically connected to the main control device 261 via a cable connector. On the other hand, the first start winning switch 224a and the second starting winning switch 224b are directly connected to the main control device 261 via the connector cable without passing through the relay board.

The detection results detected by the various ball entry detection switches are taken into the main control device 261. Then, a payout command (number of game balls to be paid out) according to the winning situation is transmitted from the main control device 261 to the payout control device 311, and a predetermined number of game balls are transmitted based on the output signal from the payout control device 311. Is paid out (except when detected by the through gate switch 225).

In addition, although not shown, on the back surface of the game board 30, a solenoid for a large winning opening that opens the large winning opening of the variable winning devices 32a and 32b, a solenoid for the sorting devices 149a and 149b, and a second start winning prize. A solenoid or the like for opening and closing the blade member 37 of the device 33b is provided. Further, the back frame set 215 is also provided with a second board surface relay board (not shown) that relays these solenoids and motors to the main control device 261.

Next, the configuration of the back pack unit 203 will be described. As shown in FIG. 5, the back pack unit 203 is a combination of a resin-molded back pack 351 and a game ball payout mechanism portion 352. Further, the back pack unit 203 is supported so as to be openable and closable with respect to the left side portion (right side in FIG. 5) of the inner frame 12, and can be opened rearward with the open / close axis extending in the vertical direction as the axis. ing. In addition, an external terminal plate 240 is provided on the upper left portion (upper right portion in FIG. 5) of the back pack unit 203.

The external terminal plate 240 is for relaying various information transmissions to a hall computer or the like in a game hall, and is provided with a plurality of external connection terminals. For convenience, no code is attached, but for example, a terminal for outputting information on the current game state (start of variable display, start of jackpot state, start of probabilistic mode, continuation of probabilistic mode, etc.), open detection switch described later. Outputs information on various error states such as terminals for outputting information on opening of the front frame 14 and inner frame 12 detected by 91 and 92, ball entry error, lower plate full tank error, tank ball no error, and payout error. A terminal for outputting information regarding the number of prize balls paid out from the payout control device 311 and the like are provided. Further, in the present embodiment, the external terminal plate 240 is also provided with terminals for outputting the detection information of the first special ball entry unit 145a and the second special ball entry unit 145b (during the jackpot state). The second start winning device 33b (blade member 37), the first variable winning device 32a (first opening / closing member 143a), the second variable winning device 32b (second opening / closing member 143b), the first sorting device 149a, and the like. A terminal for outputting information or the like indicating the state of the second sorting device 149b may be provided.

The back pack 351 is integrally molded with, for example, ABS resin, and includes a protective cover portion 354 that protrudes rearward of the pachinko machine 10 and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. The protective cover portion 354 has a shape in which the left and right side surfaces and the upper surface are closed and only the lower surface is open, and has a size sufficient to cover at least the frame cover 213. However, in the present embodiment, the protective cover portion 354 also covers the upper portion and the right portion (the portion on the left side in FIG. 5) of the substrate box 263. As a result, in the closed state of the back pack unit 203, the sealing member provided on the right side of the board box 263 and the terminal part (board side connector) provided along the upper edge of the main control device 261 are covered. It will be.

The payout mechanism portion 352 is arranged so as to bypass the protective cover portion 354. That is, a tank 355 opened on the upper side is provided above the protective cover portion 354, and the game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 355. Below the tank 355, for example, a tank rail 356 having two rows of ball passages in the horizontal direction and gently inclining toward the downstream side is connected, and a case rail 357 is connected vertically to the downstream side of the tank rail 356. Has been done. The payout device 358 is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 357, and a required number of game balls are appropriately paid out according to a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor or the like. Then, the game balls paid out from the payout device 358 are supplied to the upper plate 19 and the like.

Further, the payout mechanism unit 352 is provided with a payout relay board 381 that relays a signal of a payout command from the payout control device 311 to the payout device 358, and a power switch board 382 that takes in the main power supply from the outside. There is. For example, an AC 24V main power supply is supplied to the power switch board 382 via a voltage converter, and the power is turned on or off by the switching operation of the power switch 382a.

Below the back pack unit 203 (board box 263), a lower frame set 251 that is pivotally supported by the left side portion (right side in FIG. 5) of the inner frame 12 and can be opened rearward is provided. As shown in FIG. 6, the lower frame set 251 is formed with a discharge passage portion 217 into which the game balls collected by the ball recovery mechanism described above flow in, and the game balls are placed in the most downstream portion of the discharge passage portion 217. A discharge chute (not shown) for discharging to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 is formed. That is, the game balls that have won each prize device such as the general prize device 31 are collected via the ball collection mechanism of the back frame set 215, and are further discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 through the discharge chute of the discharge passage portion 217. The out port 36 is also connected to the discharge passage portion 217, and the game ball that has not won a prize in any of the winning devices is also discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 via the discharge chute. In the present embodiment, the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 are configured as separate bodies and can be opened and closed independently, but the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 are integrally formed. You may do it.

Further, as shown in FIG. 5, the power supply / emission control device 310, the payout control device 311 and the CR unit connection board 314 are detachably attached to the back side of the lower frame set 251 in a state of being stacked in the front-rear direction. Has been done. The power supply / launch control device 310 includes a launch control circuit 312 and a power supply circuit 313, is housed in a board box 313a, and is fixed to the back side of the lower frame set 251.

Further, the payout control device 311 is housed in the board box 311a and fixed to the back side of the board box 313a (power supply / emission control device 310). The board box 311a in which the payout control device 311 is housed is provided with a sealing member in the same manner as the board box 263 in which the main control device 261 is housed, so that an opened trace of the board box 311a remains. There is.

In addition, the CR unit connection board 314 is housed in the board box 314a and fixed to the back side of the board box 313a (power supply / emission control device 310). The substrate boxes 311a, 313a, and 314a are made of a transparent resin material or the like, and the inside can be visually recognized.

Further, the payout control device 311 is provided with a state return switch 321 protruding outward from the board box 311a. For example, when the state return switch 321 is pressed when a payout error such as ball clogging of the payout motor occurs, the payout motor is rotated in the forward and reverse directions, and the ball jam is cleared (return to the normal state).

Further, the power supply circuit 313 is provided with a RAM erasing switch 323 protruding outward from the board box 313a. This pachinko machine 10 has a backup function, and can maintain the state at the time of power failure even in the unlikely event of a power failure, and can be restored to the state at the time of power failure when recovering from the power failure (recovery of power). it can. Therefore, if the power is turned off in the normal procedure (for example, when the game hall is closed), the state before the power is turned off is stored in memory. Therefore, if you want to return to the initial state when the power is turned on, hold down the RAM erase switch 323 while turning on the power. Is thrown in.

Further, as shown in FIG. 6, a locking device 600 is provided on the back side of the right side portion of the inner frame 12. The locking device 600 includes a cylinder lock 700 (see FIG. 1 and the like) exposed on the front side of the front frame 14, and an inner frame is formed by inserting a key into the keyhole of the cylinder lock 700 and rotating it in one direction. 12 can be unlocked, and the front frame 14 can be unlocked by rotating the other. In the present embodiment, the inner frame 12 is locked to the outer frame 11, and the front frame 14 is locked to the inner frame 12.

As described above, the right side frame component 11d of the outer frame 11 is formed with an extending wall portion 83 that covers the entire upper and lower sections corresponding to the locking device 600 from the back side of the inner frame 12 (FIG. 5). reference). This makes it difficult to allow the wire rod or the like to enter from the back side of the outer frame 11 and operate the locking device 600 with the wire rod or the like. As a result, the defense performance can be improved. Further, the extension wall portion 83 is configured to cover the right end portion (the left end portion in FIG. 5) of the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 from the back side, and when the inner frame 12 is closed, the extension wall portion 83 has a configuration. The back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 cannot be opened.

Further, as shown in FIG. 4, a front frame opening detection switch 91 for detecting the opening of the front frame 14 is provided on the lower right front side of the inner frame 12 (on the right side of the launching device 60), and FIG. 5 shows. As shown, an inner frame opening detection switch 92 for detecting the opening of the inner frame 12 is provided at the lower right (lower left in FIG. 5) on the back side of the inner frame 12. The front frame opening detection switch 91 and the inner frame opening detection switch 92 each have a detection unit that can appear and disappear with respect to the switch main body, and the front frame opening detection switch 91 is provided so that the detection unit faces forward. The inner frame opening detection switch 92 is provided so that the detection unit faces rearward. Then, when the detection unit is in a state of protruding from the switch body, an on signal is output to the main control device 261 and the detection unit is pressed toward the switch body, and when the detection unit is immersed in the switch body, an off signal is output. It is configured to output to the main control device 261. That is, when the front frame 14 is closed, the detection unit is pressed by the back surface of the front frame 14 to turn off the front frame opening detection switch 91, and when the front frame 14 is opened, the detection unit returns to the protruding state and is turned on. Become. Similarly, when the inner frame 12 is closed, the inner frame opening detection switch 92 is turned off by being pressed by the pressing portion 86 integrally formed with the receiving portion 85 of the outer frame 11, and is detected when the inner frame 12 is opened. The part returns to the protruding state and turns on.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The main control device 261 as the main control means is equipped with a CPU 501 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The CPU 501 includes a ROM 502 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 501, and a RAM 503 that is a memory that temporarily stores various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 502 is executed. And various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built-in. However, the CPU, ROM, and RAM may not be integrated into a single chip, but may be integrated into a chip for each function.

The RAM 503 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the CPU 501 and the return address of the control program executed by the CPU 501 are stored, and a work area (work area) in which various flags, counters, I / O values, etc. are stored. ) And a backup area 503a.

Further, the RAM 503 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply circuit 313 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, and the data is stored in the stack area, the work area, and the backup area 503a. All data is backed up.

When the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, the backup area 503a is used when the power is turned off (including when a power failure occurs) in order to restore the state of the pachinko machine 10 to the state before the power was turned off when the power is turned on again. This is an area for storing the stack pointer, each register, the value of I / O, etc. (same as above). Writing to the backup area 503a is executed when the power is turned off by the main process, and conversely, restoration of each value written in the backup area 503a is the main process when the power is turned on (including power on due to power failure elimination. The same applies hereinafter). Is executed in. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 501 is configured to input a power failure signal SK1 output from a power failure monitoring circuit 542, which will be described later, when the power is turned off due to a power failure or the like. Upon occurrence, power failure processing (NMI interrupt processing) is immediately executed.

If at least the data stored in the stack area and the backup area 503a are backed up, it is not always necessary to back up the data stored in all the areas. For example, the data stored in the stack area and the backup area 503a may be backed up, and the data stored in the work area may not be backed up.

An input / output port 505 is connected to the CPU 501 containing the ROM 502 and the RAM 503 via a bus line 504 composed of an address bus, a data bus, and the like. The RAM erase switch circuit 543, the payout control device 311 and the sub control device 262, the first and second special display devices 43a and 43b, the ordinary symbol display device 41, and the like, which will be described later, are connected to the input / output port 505. With this configuration, the above-mentioned special display devices 43a and 43b and the ordinary symbol display device 41 are directly controlled by the main control device 261. On the other hand, the decorative symbol display device 42 is controlled via the sub control device 262.

In addition, for convenience, various relay boards and the like are not shown, but the input / output port 505 has a general winning switch 221 and a special winning detection switch 223a and 223b, a non-special winning detection switch 222a and 222b, and a starting winning switch 224a. , 224b, through gate switch 225, ball entry count switch 226a, 226b and other various detection switches, hold display devices 46a and 46b, normal hold display device 44 and other information display devices, power supply / launch control device 310, payout control. Various boards such as device 311 and sub-control device 262, solenoids for opening and closing the variable winning devices 32a and 32b, and various electric components such as a motor for opening and closing the second starting winning device 33b (blade member 37) are connected. Has been done. That is, the main control device 261 is provided with a plurality of terminal portions (board-side connectors) for connecting the connectors of various cable connectors, and the input / output ports 505 are configured by these terminal portions and the like.

The sub control device 262 (sub control board) as the sub control means includes a CPU 551 that is an arithmetic unit, a ROM 552 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 551, and a control program that is stored in the ROM 552. RAM553, input / output port 554, bus line 555, which is a memory for temporarily storing various data, etc., are provided, and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit (not shown) are provided. It has. The RAM 553 is a memory that temporarily stores work data and flags used when the CPU 551 executes various programs.

The CPU 551, ROM 552, and RAM 553 are connected to the input / output port 554 via the bus line 555, and the display control device 45 is connected to the input / output port 554. Further, a speaker SP, an effect button 125, a cross button 126, an annular illumination unit 102, an error display lamp 104, and the like are connected to the input / output port 554.

The CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 causes the display control device 45 to execute display control based on, for example, a command signal (for example, a fluctuation pattern command) transmitted from the main control device 261 and causes the decorative symbol display device 42 to display the display. As described above, in the present embodiment, it is taught that the first and second special display devices 43a and 43b controlled by the main control device 261 have won the jackpot, and the sub control device 262 is used. In the decorative symbol display device 42 controlled by the above, the decorative symbol variation display is performed as an effect display in accordance with the variation display of the special symbol in the special display devices 43a and 43b.

Further, the payout control device 311 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 358. The CPU 511, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 512 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the CPU 511, and a RAM 513 that is used as a work memory or the like.

Like the RAM 503 of the main control device 261, the RAM 513 of the payout control device 311 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the CPU 511 and the return destination address of the control program executed by the CPU 511 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored, and a backup area 513a.

The RAM 513 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply circuit 313 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, and all stored in the stack area, work area, and backup area 513a. Data is backed up. If the data stored in at least the stack area and the backup area 513a is backed up, it is not always necessary to back up the data stored in all the areas. For example, the data stored in the stack area and the backup area 513a may be backed up, and the data stored in the work area may not be backed up.

In the backup area 513a, when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of power off, each register, and the like, in order to restore the state of the pachinko machine 10 to the state before the power off when the power is turned on again. This is an area for storing values such as I / O. The writing to the backup area 513a is executed when the power is turned off by the main process, and the restoration of each value written in the backup area 513a is executed in the main process when the power is turned on. Similar to the CPU 501 of the main control device 261, the NMI terminal of the CPU 511 is also configured so that the power failure signal SK1 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the CPU 511, NMI interrupt processing as power failure processing is immediately executed.

In the work area, a payout permission flag in which the payout permission of the prize ball by the payout control device 311 is set, a command reception flag set when a command transmitted from the main control device 261 is received, and a main control device 261 There is a command buffer that stores the commands sent from.

The payout permission flag is a flag for setting the payout permission of the prize ball, and is turned on when a specific command for permitting the payout of the prize ball is transmitted from the main control device 261 and the specific command is received, and is set as the initial setting. It is turned off when the process is restored or the power is restored before the power is cut off. In the present embodiment, the specific commands include a payout initialization command instructing the initial processing of the RAM 513 of the payout control device 311, a prize ball command instructing the payout of the prize ball, and the main control device 261 being powered back. These are the three payout return commands that are sent in the case.

The command reception flag is a flag for confirming whether or not the payout control device 311 has received a command. It is turned on when any command is received, and like the payout permission flag, initial setting processing or power cutoff. It is turned off when the command is returned to the previous position, and is turned off when the command received by the command judgment process is judged.

The command buffer is composed of a ring buffer that temporarily stores commands transmitted from the main control device 261. The ring buffer has a predetermined storage area, commands are stored with regularity from the start to the end of the storage area, and when commands are stored in all the storage areas, the start of the storage area is used. The return command is configured to be updated. Therefore, when the command is stored and when the command is read, the storage pointer and the read pointer in the command buffer are updated, and the command is stored and read based on the respective pointers.

An input / output port 515 is connected to the CPU 511 containing the ROM 512 and the RAM 513 via a bus line 514 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The RAM erase switch circuit 543, the main control device 261, the power supply / launch control device 310 (launch control circuit 312), the payout device 358, the CR unit connection board 314, and the like are connected to the input / output port 515, respectively.

The CR unit connection board 314 is a ball rental operation unit (rental switch 121 and return switch 122) on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 and a CR unit (card reader unit, ball) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10 in a game hall or the like. The rental unit) and the payout control device 311 are electrically connected to each other. Then, information on the ball lending operation unit by the player or the ball lending operation to the CR unit is input to the CR unit, and the balance of the game value is stored in the card which is the recording medium inserted in the CR unit. If so, the balance of the card is subtracted, and the payout request signal of the number of game balls corresponding to the subtraction is output to the payout control device 311. The recording medium of the CR unit is not limited to the card type, and may be a coin type or a stick type.

Further, the payout control device 311 periodically sends a CR unit connection signal indicating that the CR unit connection board 314 and the CR unit are electrically connected to the launch control circuit 312 of the power supply / launch control device 310. It is configured to output every (for example, every 2 msec).

The launch control circuit 312 of the power supply / launch control device 310 permits or prohibits the launch of the game ball by the launch device 60. A handle 18, a payout control device 311 and a main control device 261 are electrically connected to the launch control circuit 312. Further, in the launch control circuit 312, the dial position signal from the variable resistor indicating the rotation operation amount (rotation angle) of the handle 18 (rotation operation body 18a) and the player touch the handle 18 from the handle 18. It is configured to be able to input a touch signal from the touch sensor indicating that the player is present and a firing switch signal indicating that the player is not operating the stop lever 18b. Further, the launch control circuit 312 is configured to be able to input a CR unit connection signal indicating that the CR unit connection board 314 and the CR unit are electrically connected from the payout control device 311.

Then, the launch control circuit 312 outputs a launch state signal to the main control device 261 on condition that the touch signal, the launch switch signal, and the CR unit connection signal are input, and the main control device 261 launches. On condition that the status signal is input, the launch permission signal and the ball feed signal are output to the launch control circuit 312. The main control device 261 is configured to output a firing permission signal at intervals of 0.6 seconds while the firing status signal is being input.

Further, the launch control circuit 312 is configured to drive the ball feed device 63 and send the game ball to the launch position when the ball feed signal is input. In the state where the preparatory ball detection sensor provided in the ball feed device 63 and capable of detecting whether or not the game ball exists at the launch position detects that the game ball already exists at the launch position, the ball feed device 63 Is not driven (even if the ball feed signal is received, the game ball is not sent to the launch position).

Further, the launch control circuit 312 drives the launch device 60 (launch solenoid) on condition that a touch signal, a launch switch signal, a CR unit connection signal, (dial position signal), and a launch permission signal are input. It is configured to let you. As a result, the game ball set at the launch position is launched by the launch device 60 with a strength based on the dial position signal.

Further, the power supply circuit 313 includes a power supply unit 541 that supplies power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 542 that monitors power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM erase switch circuit 543 that is connected to the RAM erase switch 323. And have.

The power supply unit 541 supplies the main control device 261, the payout control device 311 and the like with the necessary operating power to each of them through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 541 takes in an AC 24-volt power supply supplied from the outside and generates a + 12V power supply for driving various switches and motors, a + 5V power supply for logic, a backup power supply for RAM backup, and the like. These + 12V power supply, + 5V power supply, and backup power supply are supplied to the main control device 261, the payout control device 311 and the like. It should be noted that operating power is supplied to various switches, motors, and the like via a control device to which they are connected.

The power failure monitoring circuit 542 is a circuit that outputs a power failure signal SK1 to each NMI terminal of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 and the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 542 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 541, and determines that a power failure (power failure) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volt. The power failure signal SK1 is output to the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311. By the output of the power failure signal SK1, the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the power failure processing (NMI interrupt processing).

Even after the DC stable 24 volt voltage becomes less than 22 volt, the power supply unit 541 normally outputs the control system drive voltage of 5 volt for a sufficient time to execute the power failure processing. It is configured to maintain a value. Therefore, the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 can normally execute and complete the power failure processing.

The RAM erase switch circuit 543 is a circuit that takes in the switch signal of the RAM erase switch 323 and clears the backup data of the RAM 503 of the main control device 261 and the RAM 513 of the payout control device 311 according to the state of the switch 323. When the RAM erase switch 323 is pressed, the RAM erase switch circuit 543 outputs the RAM erase signal SK2 to the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the RAM erase switch 323 is pressed (including turning on the power by eliminating the power failure), the data of the respective RAMs 503 and 513 are cleared in the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311. To.

The display control device 45 executes the variable display of the decorative symbol on the decorative symbol display device 42 in accordance with the instruction from the sub control device 262. The display control device 45 includes a CPU 521, a program ROM 522, a work RAM 523, a video RAM 524, a character ROM 525, a video display processor (VDP) 526, an input port 527, an output port 259, and a bus line 530, 531. And have. The input / output port 554 of the sub control device 262 is connected to the input port 527. Further, the CPU 521, the program ROM 522, the work RAM 523, and the VDP 526 are connected to the input port 527 via the bus line 530. An output port 529 is connected to the VDP 526 via a bus line 531 and a decorative symbol display device 42, which is a liquid crystal display device, is connected to the output port 529.

The CPU 521 of the display control device 45 receives the display command transmitted from the sub control device 262 via the input port 527, analyzes the received command, or performs a predetermined arithmetic process based on the received command to control the VDP 526. (Generation of internal command for VDP526) is executed. As a result, the display control in the decorative symbol display device 42 is performed.

The program ROM 522 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 521, and the work RAM 523 is a memory for temporarily storing work data and flags used when executing various programs by the CPU 521. Is.

The video RAM 524 is a memory for storing display data displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42, and by rewriting the contents of the video RAM 524, the display contents of the decorative symbol display device 42 are changed. The character ROM 525 is a memory for storing character data such as a symbol displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42.

The VDP 526 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates the LCD driver (liquid crystal drive circuit) incorporated in the decorative symbol display device 42. Since the VDP526 is made into an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and its substance can be said to be a microcomputer chip having a built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 526 adjusts the timings of the CPU 521, the video RAM 524, and the like to intervene in reading and writing data, and reads out the display data stored in the video RAM 524 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the decorative symbol display device 42.

Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be described. In the present embodiment, the CPU 501 provided in the main control means and the main control device 261 as the winning / failing lottery means draws lots using various counter information at the time of the game. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8, a winning / failing random number counter C1 as a winning / failing random number generation means used for a winning / failing lottery for whether or not to generate a jackpot state, and a type used for determining a jackpot type (type lottery). The determination counter C2, the variation selection counter C3 used to determine whether or not to generate the reach state in the decorative symbol display device 42, the initial value random number counter CINI used to set the initial value of the hit / fail random number counter C1, and the first The first variation type counter CS1 and the second variation type counter CS2 used for determining the variation display time of the second special display devices 43a and 43b (decorative symbol display device 42), and the second start winning device 33b are open. It is decided to use the ordinary symbol random number counter C4 used for the ball entry support lottery. The fluctuation selection counter C3 is also used for drawing a reach pattern when the decorative symbol display device 42 is disengaged and fluctuates. Further, the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are also used for the fluctuation pattern selection (effect pattern selection) of the decorative symbol display device 42.

The counters C1, C2, C3, CINI, CS1, CS2, and C4 are loop counters in which 1 is added to the previous value each time the counter is updated, and after reaching the upper limit value, the counter returns to 0, which is the lower limit value. Each counter is periodically updated, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 503 (excluding the random number initial value counter CINI).

The RAM 503 has a special variable hold area as a hold storage means for storing each value (hit / fail related information) of the hit / miss random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, and the change selection counter C3, and the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4. There is a normal fluctuation holding area where is stored. The ordinary variable hold area includes four hold areas (hold first to hold fourth areas) and one execution area. In each holding area of the normal fluctuation holding area, the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 is stored in time series according to the passage history of the game ball to the through gate 34. By adopting this configuration, it is possible to hold the variable display on the normal symbol display device 41 up to four times.

Further, the special fluctuation holding area includes a first special fluctuation holding area having four holding areas (holding first to holding fourth areas), a second special fluctuation holding area, and one execution area. There is. In each holding area of the first special fluctuation holding area, each value of the winning / failing random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, and the fluctuation selection counter C3 is set according to the winning history of the game ball to the first starting winning device 33a. Stored in series. In each holding area of the second special fluctuation holding area, each value of the winning / failing random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, and the fluctuation selection counter C3 is set according to the winning history of the game ball to the second starting winning device 33b. Stored in series. By adopting this configuration, the fluctuation display (first fluctuation display and second fluctuation display) in the special display devices 43a and 43b can be held up to four times, respectively. The four holding areas provided in the first and second special variable holding areas are assigned holding area numbers such as the first holding area to the fourth holding area, and are newly acquired. The winning / failing related information is stored in the holding area having the smaller holding area number among the holding areas in which the winning / failing related information is not stored.

Explaining each counter in detail, for example, the winning / failing random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 437, reaches the upper limit value as the closing price (that is, 437), and then 0, which is the lower limit value as the opening price. It is configured to return to. Normally, when the hit / miss random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI at that time is read as the next initial value of the hit / miss random number counter C1. The initial value random number counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the pass / fail random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 437), and is updated once for each timer interrupt and repeatedly updated within the remaining time of normal processing. On the other hand, the hit / miss random number counter C1 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt in this embodiment), and the value of the hit / miss random number counter C1 is stored in the hit / miss random number counter buffer. Then, at the timing when the game ball wins the first start winning device 33a or the second start winning device 33b, the value of the hit / miss random number counter C1 stored in the hit / miss random number counter buffer is stored in the special fluctuation holding area.

Further, in the present embodiment, the number of values of the hit / miss random number counter C1 that is a big hit in the low probability state (normal mode, time reduction mode) is two, and the value is "7,177", which is a high probability. The number of values of the hit / miss random number counter C1 that is a big hit in the state (probability variation mode) is 8, and the value is “7 to 10, 177 to 180”. In the present embodiment, the ROM 502 is provided with two winning / failing determination tables as winning value storage means that are referred to when determining whether or not the value of the winning / failing random number counter C1 corresponds to a jackpot. There is a first hit / fail determination table in which "7, 177" is stored as a jackpot value, and a second hit / fail determination table in which "8 to 10, 178 to 180" are stored as jackpot values.

The type determination counter C2 is configured to be added one by one in order within the range of 0 to 599, for example, to reach the upper limit value (that is, 599) and then return to the lower limit value of 0. Further, the ROM 502 is provided with two type determination tables that are referred to when determining which jackpot type the value of the type determination counter C2 corresponds to, and enters the first start winning device 33a. The first type judgment table that is referred to when a big hit is won in a ball-based winning / failing lottery, and the second type judgment that is referred to when a big hit is won in a winning / losing lottery based on a ball entering the second starting winning device 33b. There is a table. Then, when a jackpot is won in the winning / failing lottery, the type of the jackpot state to be given is determined based on the value of the type determination counter C2 (the type lottery is performed), and the jackpot state of the determined type is given. The Rukoto.

The type determination counter C2 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt in this embodiment), and the value of the type determination counter C2 is stored in the type determination counter buffer. Then, at the timing when the game ball wins the first start winning device 33a or the second start winning device 33b, the value of the type determination counter C2 stored in the type determination counter buffer is stored in the special fluctuation holding area of the RAM 503. ..

The fluctuation selection counter C3 has a configuration in which, for example, 1 is added in order within the range of 0 to 238, the upper limit value (that is, 238) is reached, and then the value returns to 0, which is the lower limit value. In the present embodiment, after the reach state is generated for the decorative symbol by the variable selection counter C3, the reach state is also generated as the "front-back off reach" in which the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol and stopped. After, the final stop symbol will be drawn by lottery for "reach other than front and rear deviation" where the symbol stops at a position other than before and after the reach symbol, and "complete deviation" where the reach state does not occur. In the present embodiment, the ROM 502 has one reach determination table that stores the correspondence between the value of the fluctuation selection counter C3 and the reach pattern. For example, the game ball to the first start winning device 33a The first reach determination table referred to when determining the reach pattern (when there is no big hit) based on the value of the fluctuation selection counter C3 acquired when the ball is entered, and the game ball to the second start winning device 33b. It is also possible to provide a second reach determination table that is referred to when determining the reach pattern (when there is no big hit) based on the value of the fluctuation selection counter C3 acquired with the entry of the ball.

The variation selection counter C3 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt in this embodiment), and the value of the variation selection counter C3 is stored in the variation selection counter buffer. Then, at the timing when the game ball wins the first start winning device 33a or the second start winning device 33b, the value of the fluctuation selection counter C3 stored in the fluctuation selection counter buffer is stored in the special fluctuation holding area of the RAM 503. ..

Further, of the two fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2, one of the fluctuation type counters CS1 is added one by one in order within the range of 0 to 255, and after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 255), it is the lower limit value. The other variable type counter CS2 is configured to return to 0, for example, is added one by one in order within the range of 0 to 31, reaches the upper limit value (that is, 31), and then returns to the lower limit value of 0. It has become. In addition, the variation time of the variation display on the special display devices 43a and 43b is associated with the rough variation pattern (reach pattern of normal reach, super reach, premium reach, etc.) of the variation display on the decorative symbol display device 42. If the fluctuation time of the special display devices 43a and 43b is determined, the fluctuation pattern of the decorative symbol display device 42 is also determined (the fluctuation pattern of the decorative symbol display device 42 that fits exactly within the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display of the special display devices 43a and 43b). Is to be selected). For example, the fluctuation time is determined based on the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the stop display mode in the special display devices 43a and 43b is determined by the fluctuation type counter CS2 (for example, in the case of corresponding to the jackpot of 13RS, the 13RS It may be configured to determine one of the stop display modes corresponding to the jackpot).

The counter or the like used to determine the fluctuation time or fluctuation pattern is not particularly limited, and can be appropriately changed for each model. For example, the reach pattern of the decorative symbol can be determined only by the first variable type counter CS1, or the reach pattern of the decorative symbol can be determined by combining the first variable type counter CS1 and the stop symbol.

Further, the variable type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated once each time the normal processing described later is executed once, and are repeatedly updated even within the remaining time of the normal processing. Then, the buffer values of CS1 and CS2 are acquired when the decorative symbol display device 42 determines the variation pattern at the start of the variation of the decorative symbol.

The size and range of each counter are only examples and can be changed arbitrarily. However, it is desirable that the magnitudes of the hit / fail random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, the fluctuation selection counter C3, the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are all different prime numbers, and are not synchronized in any case.

Further, the ordinary symbol random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter in which, for example, 1 is added in order in the range of 0 to 232, the upper limit value (that is, 232) is reached, and then the value returns to 0, which is the lower limit value. The normal symbol random number counter C4 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt in this embodiment), and the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 is acquired when the game ball passes through either the left or right through gate 34. The number of winning random numbers in the low ball entry state is 31, and the range is "1 to 31". On the other hand, the number of winning random numbers in the high-entry state is 232, and the range is "1-232". That is, in the present embodiment, for the ROM 502, the low entry support determination table referred to in the entry support lottery in the low entry state and the high entry reference in the entry support lottery in the high entry state. A ball support judgment table is prepared. Then, when the value of the winning normal symbol random number counter C4 is acquired, the normal symbol display device 41 performs the variable display for a predetermined time, and then (the normal symbol lamps constituting the normal symbol display device 41 blink alternately). After that, the stop display is displayed in the mode (lighting pattern) corresponding to the winning, and the second start winning device 33b is opened in a pattern corresponding to the game mode at that time.

Next, each control process executed by the CPU 501 in the main control device 261 will be described with reference to the flowchart. The processing of the CPU 501 is roughly divided into a main processing that is started when the power is turned on, a timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (at a cycle of 2 msec in this embodiment), and a stop signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). There is an NMI interrupt process that is activated by the input of, and for convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process will be described first, and then the main process will be described.

FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process, and this process is executed by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261, for example, every 2 msec. First, in step S301, reading processing of various winning switches is executed. That is, the state of various switches (excluding the RAM erase switch 323) connected to the main control device 261 is read, the state of the switch is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved. On the other hand, if there is no detection information, the process proceeds to the next process as it is.

If there is detection information of various winning switches, the value of the corresponding prize ball counter is added. Further, in the external output processing of the normal processing described later, the prize ball command based on the value of each prize ball counter is output to the payout control device 311, and the prize ball is given based on the prize ball command (the game ball is paid out). ). Further, when the prize ball command is output, the value of each prize ball counter is reset.

In step S302, the random number initial value update process is executed. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0.

Further, in step S303, the random number update process is executed. Specifically, the hit / fail random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, the variation selection counter C3, and the ordinary symbol random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and when the counter values reach the maximum values, they are cleared to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1, C2, C3, and C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503.

After that, in step S304, the start winning process associated with winning the first and second starting winning devices 33a and 33b is executed, and in step S305, the through gate passing process accompanying the passage of the game ball to the through gate 34 is executed. To do. In the following step S306, a firing permission command setting process for performing processing such as transmitting a firing permission signal to the firing control circuit 312 of the power supply / firing control device 310 is performed. After that, in step S307, the remaining ball monitoring process for monitoring the game ball in the second variable winning device 32b is performed, and then the timer interrupt process is temporarily terminated.

Here, the start winning process in step S304 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the RAM 503, the number of hold areas of the first variation display triggered by the winning of the first start winning device 33a (the number of hold areas in the hold area of the first special change hold area in which the winning / failing related information is held and stored). ) Is counted by the first hold counter Na, and the number of holds of the second fluctuation display triggered by the winning of the second start winning device 33b (the winning / failing related information in the hold area of the second special change hold area is held and stored. A second hold counter Nb for counting the number of hold areas) is provided. A total number of pending counters may be provided to count the total number of pending variable displays (the total number of pending first variable displays and the number of pending second variable displays).

Further, in the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area and each holding area, a winning / failing random number storage area for storing the value of the winning / failing random number counter C1, a winning type random number storage area for storing the value of the type determination counter C2, and a variation selection counter C3 A reach random number storage area for storing values is provided.

Further, in the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area, is it the first variation display based on the entry into the first start winning device 33a, or the second variation display based on the entry into the second start winning device 33b? A variable storage area is provided in which information indicating the above is stored. Hereinafter, "information indicating that the first variable display is stored in the variable storage area" is also referred to as "the first variable flag is set on", and "the second variable display is stored in the variable storage area". "The information indicating the above is stored" is also referred to as "the second fluctuation flag is set on".

First, in step S501, it is determined from the detection information of the second start winning switch 224b whether or not the game ball has won the second start winning device 33b. If an affirmative determination is made in step S501, it is determined in step S502 whether or not the value of the second hold counter Nb is less than the upper limit value (“4” in this embodiment). If a negative determination is made in step S501 or S502, the process proceeds to step S511. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S502, the process proceeds to step S503, and the second hold counter Nb is incremented by one.

In the following step S504, the addition display processing of the second hold display device 46b (second hold lamp) corresponding to the increase in the number of hold of the second variable display by one is performed. That is, when the pair of left and right second hold lamps are both off, the left second hold lamp is turned on, the left second hold lamp is on, and the right second hold lamp is off. If this is the case, both the left and right second hold lamps are lit, and if both the left and right second hold lamps are lit, the right second hold lamp remains lit and the left second hold lamp is lit. Is blinking, and when the second hold lamp on the left side is in the blinking state and the second hold lamp on the right side is in the lit state, a process for blinking both the left and right second hold lamps is performed.

After step S504, in step S505, each value of the hit / miss random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, and the variation selection counter C3 updated by the random number update process of step S303 (the hit / fail random number counter buffer, the type determination counter buffer, and Each value stored in the fluctuation selection counter buffer) is stored in the first area (win / fail random number storage area, winning type random number storage area, reach random number storage area) among the vacant hold areas of the second special fluctuation hold area. To do. After step S505, the process proceeds to step S506.

In step S506, a hit / fail determination process is performed to determine whether or not the value of the hit / miss random number counter C1 newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area is a value corresponding to the jackpot. The details of the pass / fail determination process will be described later.

In the following step S507, when it is determined in step S506 that the value of the hit / miss random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to the jackpot, the jackpot is based on the value of the type determination counter C2 newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area. Performs type determination processing to determine the type of. The details of the type determination process will be described later.

In the following step S508, when it is determined in step S506 that the value of the hit / fail random number counter C1 is not the value corresponding to the jackpot, the value of the fluctuation selection counter C3 newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area is used as a deviation. Performs reach determination processing to determine the type of reach at the time of fluctuation. The details of the reach determination process will be described later.

Here, the details of the pass / fail determination process in step S506 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S5101, whether or not the value of the hit / miss random number counter C1 newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area matches any of the values "7" and "177" stored in the first hit / miss determination table. To determine. By the way, "7" and "177" are values that are big hits in both the low probability state and the high probability state.

In FIG. 14, for convenience, the process of step S5101 is simplified and described, but in reality, it is determined whether or not the value of the hit / miss random number counter C1 is "7", and the determination is negative. If it is determined, it is determined whether or not the value of the hit / miss random number counter C1 is "177", and if it is determined affirmatively by either of these determinations, it is determined affirmatively in step S5101, and which determination is made. If a negative determination is made in, the negative determination is made in step S5101.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S5101, the first pass / fail flag is turned on in step S5102, and then this process ends. On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S5101, in step S5103, the value of the hit / miss random number counter C1 newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area is the value stored in the second hit / miss determination table "8 to 10". It is determined whether or not it is any of "178 to 180". By the way, "8 to 10, 178 to 180" is a value that is a big hit only in the high probability state (probability variation mode). Even in the determination process, it is actually determined one by one whether or not the value of the hit / miss random number counter C1 and each value corresponding to the jackpot match as described above.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S5103, the second pass / fail flag is turned on in step S5104, and then this process ends. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5103, that is, if the result is "off" even in a high probability state, the present process is terminated as it is. In the present embodiment, the first pass / fail flag and the second pass / fail flag and the second are obtained by storing (overwriting) a specific value in the pass / fail random number storage area (in the hold area where the win / loss related information is newly stored). It is assumed that the pass / fail flag is set to ON, but it is also possible to provide the first pass / fail flag and the second pass / fail flag separately from the pass / fail random number storage area.

Next, the second type determination process in step S507 will be described with reference to FIGS. 16 and 43 (see the column of the second start winning ratio). First, in step S5301, it is determined whether or not the first or second pass / fail flag is set to ON in the hit / fail determination process performed immediately before. If a negative determination is made in step S5301 (there is no possibility that a jackpot state will occur), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S5301 (a jackpot state may occur), the type determination counter newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area is referred to in step S5302. It is determined whether or not the value of C2 matches the value "0 to 119" corresponding to "13RS-1". If an affirmative determination is made in step S5302, the 13RS-1 flag is turned on in step S5303, and then this process ends.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5302, it is determined in step S5304 whether or not the value of the type determination counter C2 matches the values "120 to 149" corresponding to "13RS-2". If an affirmative determination is made in step S5304, the 13RS-2 flag is turned on in step S5305, and then this process ends.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5304, it is determined in step S5306 whether or not the value of the type determination counter C2 matches the value "150 to 179" corresponding to "13RS-3". If an affirmative determination is made in step S5306, the 13RS-3 flag is turned on in step S5307, and then this process ends.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5306, it is determined in step S5308 whether or not the value of the type determination counter C2 matches the value "180 to 239" corresponding to "8RS-1". If an affirmative determination is made in step S5308, the 8RS-1 flag is turned on in step S5309, and then this process ends.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5308, it is determined in step S5310 whether or not the value of the type determination counter C2 matches the value "240 to 299" corresponding to "8RS-2". If an affirmative determination is made in step S5310, the 8RS-2 flag is turned on in step S5311, and then this process ends.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5310, it is determined in step S5312 whether or not the value of the type determination counter C2 matches the value "300 to 479" corresponding to "8RN-1". If an affirmative determination is made in step S5312, the 8RN-1 flag is turned on in step S5313, and then this process ends.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5312, it is determined in step S5314 whether or not the value of the type determination counter C2 matches the value "480 to 539" corresponding to "8RN-2". If an affirmative determination is made in step S5314, the 8RN-2 flag is turned on in step S5315, and then this process ends. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5314, the 8RN-5 flag is turned on in step S5316, and then this process ends. In this embodiment, various jackpots such as the 13RS-1 flag are stored (overwritten) in the winning type random number storage area (in the holding area where the winning / failing related information is newly stored). It is assumed that the flag indicating the type is turned on, but it is also possible to provide a flag indicating various jackpot types separately from the winning type random number storage area.

Next, the reach determination process in step S508 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S5401, it is determined whether or not the first pass / fail flag is set in the hit / fail determination process performed immediately before. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5401, that is, if a big hit occurs in both the low-probability state and the high-probability state (a big hit state always occurs), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5401, that is, if a jackpot state does not occur (may be out of order) at least in a low probability state, the reach determination table is taken into consideration in step S5402, and a new hit state is added. It is determined whether or not the value of the fluctuation selection counter C3 stored in the special fluctuation holding area matches any of the values "0, 1" corresponding to the "front-back deviation reach". If an affirmative determination is made in step S5402, in step S5403, the front-rear flag indicating the occurrence of front-rear out-of-reach is turned on, and then this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5402, the reach determination table is taken into consideration in step S5404, and the value of the variation selection counter C3 newly stored in the special variation holding area corresponds to "reach other than front-rear deviation". It is determined whether or not the value matches any of the values "2 to 21". If an affirmative determination is made in step S5404, this process ends after turning on the flags other than before and after in step S5405.

Further, when a negative determination is made in step S5404, that is, when the variation display ends without going through the reach state, the present process ends as it is. In the present embodiment, by storing (overwriting) a specific value in the reach random number storage area (in the hold area where the hit / miss related information is newly stored), the front / rear flag and the non-front / back flag are set. Although it is assumed that it is set to ON, it is also possible to set a front / rear flag and a flag other than the front / rear flag separately from the reach random number storage area.

Returning to the description of FIG. 13, in step S509 following step S508, a fluctuation time determination process for determining the second fluctuation time of the second variation display is performed. That is, the fluctuation time is grasped based on the value of the first fluctuation type counter CS1 by referring to the fluctuation time determination table corresponding to the game mode (here, there is a high possibility that it is the probability variation mode or the time reduction mode). Further, the grasped fluctuation time is stored in the corresponding holding area in the second special fluctuation holding area (the value of the first fluctuation type counter CS1 in the holding area is not erased).

In step S510 following step S509, the starting command setting process is performed. The starting command includes variation information (information used to determine the content of the variation display) indicating the results of the hit / fail determination process, the type determination process, the reach determination process, and the variation time determination process, and the first command. Information indicating whether the fluctuation information is triggered by entering the starting winning device 33a or the second starting winning device 33b is included, and the sub control device 262 is subjected to the next external output processing (see step S201). It is output.

After the process of step S510, or when a negative determination is made in step S501 or step S502, in step S511, whether or not the game ball has won the first start winning device 33 is determined by the first start winning switch 224a. It is determined by the detection information of. If a negative determination is made in step S511, the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if affirmative determination is made, in step S512, the value of the first hold counter Na that counts the number of hold of the variable display triggered by winning the first start winning device 33a is the upper limit value (in the present embodiment). It is determined whether or not it is less than "4"). If a negative determination is made in step S512, the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S512, the process proceeds to step S513, and one inkment of the first hold counter Na is performed.

In the following step S514, the addition display process of the first hold display device 46a (first hold lamp) corresponding to the increase in the number of hold of the first variable display by one is performed. That is, when the pair of left and right first hold lamps are both off, the left first hold lamp is turned on, the left first hold lamp is on, and the right first hold lamp is off. If this is the case, both the left and right first hold lamps are lit, and if both the left and right first hold lamps are lit, the right first hold lamp remains lit and the left first hold lamp is lit. Is blinked, and when the first hold lamp on the left side is in the blinking state and the first hold lamp on the right side is in the lit state, a process for blinking both the left and right first hold lamps is performed.

After step S514, in step S515, each value of the winning / failing random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, and the variation selection counter C3 is stored in an empty holding area (winning / failing random number storage area, winning type random number storage) in the first special fluctuation holding area. Store in area (reach random number storage area). After step S515, the process proceeds to step S516.

In step S516, a hit / fail determination process is performed to determine whether or not the value of the hit / miss random number counter C1 newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area is a value corresponding to the jackpot. The details of the pass / fail determination process have already been described above.

In the following step S517, when it is determined in step S514 that the value of the hit / miss random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to the jackpot, the jackpot is based on the value of the type determination counter C2 newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area. Performs the first type determination process for determining the type.

Here, the first type determination process in step S517 will be described with reference to FIGS. 15 and 43 (see the column of the first start winning ratio). First, in step S5201, it is determined whether or not the first or second pass / fail flag is set to ON in the hit / fail determination process performed immediately before. If a negative determination is made in step S5201 (there is no possibility that a jackpot state will occur), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S5201 (a jackpot state may occur), the type determination counter newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area is referred to in step S5202. It is determined whether or not the value of C2 matches the value "0,1" corresponding to "13RS-1". If an affirmative determination is made in step S5202, the 13RS-1 flag is turned on in step S5203, and then this process ends.

On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S5202, the first type determination table is referred to in step S5204, and the value of the type determination counter C2 matches the value "2, 3" corresponding to "13RS-2". Determine whether or not to do so. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5204, the 13RS-2 flag is turned on in step S5205, and then this process ends.

On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S5204, the first type determination table is referred to in step S5206, and the value of the type determination counter C2 matches the value "4,5" corresponding to "13RS-3". Determine whether or not to do so. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5206, the 13RS-3 flag is turned on in step S5207, and then this process ends.

On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S5206, the first type determination table is referred to in step S5208, and the value of the type determination counter C2 matches the value "6 to 81" corresponding to "8RS-1". Determine whether or not to do so. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5208, the 8RS-1 flag is turned on in step S5209, and then this process ends.

On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S5208, the first type determination table is referred to in step S5210, and the value of the type determination counter C2 matches the values "82 to 119" corresponding to "8RS-2". Determine whether or not to do so. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5210, the 8RS-2 flag is turned on in step S5211, and then this process ends.

On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S5210, the first type determination table is referred to in step S5212, and the value of the type determination counter C2 matches the value "120 to 159" corresponding to "8RN-1". Determine whether or not to do so. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5212, the 8RN-1 flag is turned on in step S5213, and then this process ends.

On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S5212, the first type determination table is referred to in step S5214, and the value of the type determination counter C2 matches the value "160 to 239" corresponding to "8RN-2". Determine whether or not to do so. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5214, the 8RN-2 flag is turned on in step S5215, and then this process ends.

On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S5214, the first type determination table is referred to in step S5216, and the value of the type determination counter C2 matches the value "240 to 359" corresponding to "8RN-3". Determine whether or not to do so. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5216, the 8RN-3 flag is turned on in step S5217, and then this process ends.

On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S5216, the first type determination table is referred to in step S5218, and the value of the type determination counter C2 matches the value "360 to 479" corresponding to "8RN-4". Determine whether or not to do so. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5218, the 8RN-4 flag is turned on in step S5219, and then this process ends. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5218, the 8RN-5 flag is turned on in step S5220, and then this process ends.

Returning to the description of FIG. 13, in step S518 following step S517, when it is determined in step S516 that the value of the hit / miss random number counter C1 does not correspond to the jackpot, the fluctuation newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area Based on the value of the selection counter C3, the reach determination process for determining the reach type is performed. The details of the reach determination process (see FIG. 16) have already been described above.

In step S519 following step S518, a fluctuation time determination process for determining the first fluctuation time of the first fluctuation display is performed. That is, the first fluctuation time is grasped based on the value of the first fluctuation type counter CS1 by referring to the fluctuation time determination table corresponding to the game mode (here, there is a high possibility that the mode is the normal mode). Further, the grasped fluctuation time is stored in the corresponding holding area in the first special fluctuation holding area (the value of the first fluctuation type counter CS1 in the holding area is not erased).

After step S519, in step S520, the starting command setting process is performed, and this process ends. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the first start winning device 33a or the second start winning device 33b, the value of the winning / failing random number counter C1 or the like is directly stored in the special fluctuation holding area, and then the winning / failing determination process is performed. , Type determination processing, and reach determination processing are executed, but the configuration is not particularly limited to such a configuration. For example, a temporary storage area for temporarily storing the values of the hit / miss random number counter C1 and the like is provided, and the hit / fail judgment process, the type judgment process, and the type judgment process for the information stored in the temporary storage area are provided. After executing the reach determination process, a configuration may be adopted in which the data is stored in the hold area of the corresponding special change hold area.

The process of extracting the value of the pass / fail random number counter C1 in steps S505 and S515 constitutes the discriminant value extraction process, and the value of the pass / fail random number counter C1 extracted in steps S505 and S515 is also stored in the special fluctuation holding area. The process constitutes the discriminant value storage process. Further, a function of extracting and storing the value of the pass / fail random number counter C1 constitutes an information acquisition means. Further, the process of determining whether or not the value of the hit / miss random number counter C1 in steps S506 and S516 (step S5101, step S5103) is a value corresponding to winning constitutes the first hit / miss determination process, and the determination result is obtained. The processing of step S5102 and step S5104 to store (set the corresponding flag) constitutes the result storage processing.

Next, the through-gate passage processing (step S305) of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 11) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In step S601, whether or not the game ball has passed through the through gate 34 is determined based on the detection information of the through gate switch 225. If a negative determination is made in step S601, the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S601, that is, if it is determined that the game ball has passed through the through gate 34, the number of pending fluctuation displays performed by the normal symbol display device 41 is counted in step S602. It is determined whether or not the value of the normal hold counter Nc is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). If a negative determination is made here, this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S602, that is, on the condition that the passage of the game ball to the through gate 34 is confirmed and the value of the normal hold counter Nc is <4, the process proceeds to step S603 and the normal hold counter is reached. Nc is incremented by 1.

Further, in the following step S604, the addition display processing of the normal hold display device 44 (normal hold lamp) corresponding to the increase in the number of hold of the variable display in the normal symbol display device 41 is performed. That is, when the pair of left and right normal hold lamps are both off, the left normal hold lamp is turned on, the left normal hold lamp is on, and the right normal hold lamp is off. When both the left and right normal hold lamps are lit, the left normal hold lamp blinks while the right normal hold lamp is lit, and the left normal hold lamp is lit. When the lamp is blinking and the normal hold lamp on the right side is lit, the process for blinking both the left and right normal hold lamps is performed.

After step S604, in step S605, a random number related to success or failure is acquired. Specifically, the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 updated by the random number update process in step S303 is stored in the first free storage area of the normal fluctuation holding area of the RAM 503. After that, the through gate passing process is completed.

Next, the remaining ball monitoring process (step S307) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 11) will be described. In particular, in the present embodiment, in the remaining ball monitoring process, the first remaining ball monitoring process corresponding to the first variable winning device 32a and the second remaining ball monitoring process corresponding to the second variable winning device 32b are sequentially performed. It has come to be called.

First, the first remaining ball monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG. 29. In step S1301, it is determined whether or not the first remaining ball monitoring flag indicating that the game ball is being monitored in the first specific area 141a of the first variable winning device 32a is set to ON.

If affirmative determination is made in step S1301, whether or not the game ball has entered the first specific area 141a of the first variable winning device 32a based on the detection information of the first ball entry count switch 226a in step S1302. To determine. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1302, in step S1303, the value of the first ball entry counter that counts the number of game balls existing in the first specific area 141a of the first variable winning device 32a is added by 1. After step S1303, in step S1304, a first ball entry count command is set to transmit the ball entry into the first specific area 141a to the sub control device 262.

After step S1304 or when a negative determination is made in step S1302, in step S1305, a game ball enters the first special entry portion 145a based on the detection information of the first special entry detection switch 223a. Determine if it has been done. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1305, in step S1306, a first special ball entry counter is used as a counting means for counting the number of times the game ball has entered the first special ball entry unit 145a during the jackpot state. Add 1

Further, in step S1307, a first special ball entry command is set as a arrival command for transmitting the ball entry to the first special ball entry unit 145a to the sub control device 262. In addition, after step S1307, in step S1308, the value of the first ball entry counter is subtracted by 1.

Further, after step S1308, or when a negative determination is made in step S1305, in step S1309, a game is played in the first non-special ball entry unit 146a based on the detection information of the first non-special ball entry detection switch 222a. Determine whether or not the ball has entered. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1309, the value of the first ball entry counter is subtracted by 1 in step S1310.

After step S1310, or if a negative determination is made in step S1309, in step S1311, it is determined whether or not the jackpot round is in progress. Whether or not the jackpot round is in progress is determined by whether or not "2", which is a value set during the round period, is stored in the hit situation storage area described later. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1311, the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1311, it is determined in step S1312 whether or not the value of the first ball entry counter is "0". If an affirmative determination is made in step S1312, the first remaining ball monitoring flag is turned off in step S1313, and then this process ends.

If a negative determination is made in step S1312, the value of the first monitoring timer is subtracted by "1" in step S1314. In the first monitoring timer, at the end of the round in which the first variable winning device 32a is opened (at the start of the following interval), the game ball that has entered the first variable winning device 32a is in the first specific area 141a. A value corresponding to a sufficient time (3 seconds in this example) to be discharged to the outside is set.

After step S1314, in step S1315, it is determined whether or not the value of the first monitoring timer is "0". If a negative determination is made in step S1315 (the game ball remains in the first specific region 141a, but it is a period in which it is not strange that the game ball remains), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S1315, in step S1316, the error display lamp 104 is turned on, and other illuminated parts such as the annular illuminated portion 102 are set to correspond to the corresponding mode, via the external terminal plate 240. After performing error processing that outputs an error information signal to the hall computer of the game hall, interrupts the game (maintains the stored information (does not store new memory), and does not allow the game to proceed), the book End the process. The error processing is appropriately set for each model. For example, in the error processing in step S1316, a configuration may be configured to indicate the possibility that ball clogging has occurred in the first specific area 141a. .. Further, the ball entry counter may also acquire a negative value, and if the value is negative, error processing corresponding to fraudulent activity may be performed.

If a negative determination is made in step S1301, the game ball enters the first specific area 141a of the first variable winning device 32a based on the detection information of the first ball entry count switch 226a in step S1317. Determine if it is. If a negative determination is made in step S1317, the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when the affirmation is affirmed in step S1317, in step S1318, the error display lamp 104 is turned on, and other illuminated parts such as the annular illuminated portion 102 are set to correspond to the corresponding mode, via the external terminal plate 240. The error information signal is output to the hall computer of the game hall, and the game is interrupted (the stored information is maintained (no new memory is stored), but the game is not advanced), and then the book is performed. End the process.

Next, the second remaining ball monitoring process (for example, performed following the first remaining ball monitoring process) will be described with reference to FIG. 30. In step S1501, it is determined whether or not the second remaining ball monitoring flag indicating that the game ball is being monitored in the second specific area 141b of the second variable winning device 32b is set to ON.

If affirmative determination is made in step S1501, whether or not the game ball has entered the second specific area 141b of the second variable winning device 32b based on the detection information of the second ball entry count switch 226b in step S1502. To determine. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1502, in step S1503, the value of the second ball entry counter that counts the number of game balls existing in the second specific area 141b of the second variable winning device 32b is added by 1. After step S1503, in step S1504, a second ball entry count command is set to transmit the ball entry into the second specific area 141b to the sub control device 262.

After step S1504 or when a negative determination is made in step S1502, in step S1505, a game ball enters the second special entry portion 145b based on the detection information of the second special entry detection switch 223b. Determine if it has been done. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1505, the value of the second ball entry counter is subtracted by 1 in step S1506.

After step S1506, in step S1507, it is determined whether or not the second specific ball entry flag indicating that the game ball has entered the second special ball entry section 145b is set to ON. If a negative determination is made in step S1507, the second specific entry flag is set to ON in step S1508. Further, in step S1509, a second special ball entry command is set to transmit the ball entry to the second special ball entry unit 145b to the sub control device 262.

Further, after step S1509 or when a negative determination is made in step S1505, in step S1510, a game is played in the second non-special entry detection switch 222b based on the detection information of the second non-special entry detection switch 222b. Determine whether or not the ball has entered. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1510, the value of the second ball entry counter is subtracted by 1 in step S1511.

After step S1511, or if a negative determination is made in step S1510, in step S1512, it is determined whether or not the jackpot round is in progress. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1512, the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1512, it is determined in step S1513 whether or not the value of the second ball entry counter is "0". If an affirmative determination is made in step S1513, the second remaining ball monitoring flag is turned off in step S1514, and then this process ends.

If a negative determination is made in step S1513, the value of the second monitoring timer is subtracted by "1" in step S1515. In the second monitoring timer, at the end of the round in which the second variable winning device 32b is opened (at the start of the following interval), the game ball that has entered the second variable winning device 32b is in the second specific area 141b. A value corresponding to a sufficient time (3 seconds in this example) to be discharged to the outside is set.

After step S1515, in step S1516, it is determined whether or not the value of the second monitoring timer is "0". If a negative determination is made in step S1516, the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1516, the error processing is performed in step S1517, and then this processing is terminated.

If a negative determination is made in step S1501, the game ball enters the second specific area 141b of the second variable winning device 32b based on the detection information of the second ball entry count switch 226b in step S1518. Determine if it is. If a negative determination is made in step S1518, the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S1518, in step S1519, the error display lamp 104 is turned on, and other illuminated parts such as the annular illuminated portion 102 are set to correspond to the corresponding mode, via the external terminal plate 240. The error information signal is output to the hall computer of the game hall, and the game is interrupted (the stored information is maintained (no new memory is stored), but the game is not advanced), and then the book is performed. End the process.

FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing NMI interrupt processing, and this processing is executed by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt, the state of the main control device 261 when the power is turned off is stored in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503.

That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SK1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 501 in the main control device 261. Then, the CPU 501 interrupts the control during execution and starts the NMI interrupt process, and in step S401, the power failure occurrence information is stored in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 as the setting of the power failure occurrence information, and the NMI interrupt process is performed. finish.

The above NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout control device 311, and the power outage occurrence information is stored in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513 by the NMI interrupt. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SK1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311, and the CPU 511 interrupts the control during execution. The NMI interrupt process shown in FIG. 12 is started. The contents are as described above.

Next, the flow of the main processing executed by the CPU 501 in the main control device 261 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This main process is started by resetting when the power is turned on.

First, in step S101, the initial setting process associated with the power-on is executed. Specifically, for example, 1 is set in order to set a predetermined value in the stack pointer and wait for the control device on the sub side (sub control device 262, payout control device 311, etc.) to be in an operable state. Wait processing is executed for about seconds. In the following step S102, RAM access is permitted.

After that, the data backup process is executed for the RAM 503 in the CPU 501. That is, in step S103, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 323 provided in the power supply circuit 313 of the power supply / emission control device 310 is pressed (ON), and if it is pressed, the backup data is cleared (erased). Therefore, the process proceeds to step S112. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 323 is not pressed, in the following step S104, it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. Here, if it is not set, the backup data is not stored, so that the process proceeds to step S112 in this case as well. If the power failure occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a, the RAM determination value is calculated in step S105, and in the subsequent step S106, whether or not the RAM determination value matches the RAM determination value saved at the time of power interruption. That is, determine the effectiveness of the backup. If the RAM determination value calculated here does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is turned off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and the process proceeds to step S112 in this case as well.

In the process of step S112, an initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the sub control device 262, the payout control device 311 and the like. After that, the process proceeds to the RAM initialization process (step S113 and the like). The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 503. Instead of this RAM determination value, it is also possible to determine the effectiveness of the backup based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 503 is correctly saved.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when it is desired to return to the initial state when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 323. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 323 is turned on, the process proceeds to the RAM initialization process (step S113 or the like). Further, when the power failure occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like), the process proceeds to the initialization process of the RAM 503 (step S113 or the like) in the same manner. That is, in step S113, the used area of RAM 503 is cleared to 0, and in the following step S114, the initial value of RAM 503 is set. After that, interrupt permission is set in step S111, and the process proceeds to normal processing described later.

On the other hand, when the RAM erase switch 323 is not pressed (step S103: NO), it is a condition that the power failure occurrence information is set and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal. In addition, the processing at the time of power restoration (processing at the time of power failure restoration) is executed. That is, in step S107, the stack pointer before the power off is restored, and in step S108, the power off occurrence information is cleared.

In step S109, a command for returning the control device on the sub side to the gaming state when the power is turned off is transmitted. In step S110, the used register is restored from the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. After that, interrupt permission is set in step S111, and the process proceeds to normal processing described later.

Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In this normal process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, the processes of steps S201 to S210 are executed as periodic processes having a cycle of 4 msec, and the counter update processes of steps S211 and S212 are executed in the remaining time.

First, in step S201, control signals based on the settings of the special display devices 43a and 43b and the start winning device 33 updated in the previous normal processing are transmitted to each device, and output data such as commands are sent to the sub side. Executes external output processing such as sending to each control device.

For example, when the decorative symbol display device 42 displays the variation of the decorative symbol, a variation pattern command or the like is transmitted to the sub control device 262. That is, the variation pattern command is used to cause the decorative symbol display device 42 to display (effect display) according to the display (variation display of the special symbol) performed by the first and second special display devices 43a and 43b. This is a command output to the sub-control device 262. On the other hand, the sub-control device 262 in which the variation pattern command or the like is input is based on the command, and based on the command, the variation mode of the decorative symbol display device 42 (variation display of the decorative symbol that teaches or suggests the result of the winning / failing lottery, and decoration The effect display, etc. performed together with the variation display of the symbol) is determined, and the display control device 45 is instructed to display (variation display) the variation mode on the decorative symbol display device 42.

The variation pattern command includes information for identifying the variation type of the decorative pattern such as normal reach, super reach, and premium reach. On the other hand, in the sub control device 262, the relationship between these variation pattern commands and the variation type of the decorative symbol is stored in a table. Then, the sub control device 262 determines the effect pattern of the variation display based on the variation pattern command, and controls the display control device 45, the voice, and the like.

Here, the variation type of the decorative pattern will be described. "Normal reach" is a reach pattern in which no special effect is displayed except for changes in the decorative pattern. In the probability variation mode and the time reduction mode, the variation display time is shortened as compared with the normal mode even in the case of various reach. For example, the fluctuation display time (variation time) from which the normal reach is derived is "12 seconds" or "15 seconds" in the normal mode, and "9 seconds" or "12 seconds" in the probability variation mode and the time reduction mode. ". Even in the normal mode, the first variation display that starts from the state in which four first variation displays are held is also temporarily shortened, and the variation time of the first variation display is normal reach. For example, it is set to "9 seconds" or "12 seconds".

"Super Reach" is a reach in which characters and the like are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 in addition to the decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol (after the reach state is established), thereby giving the player a sense of expectation. It is a pattern. In the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display from which the super reach is derived is "25 seconds" or "30 seconds" in the normal mode, "22 seconds" or "27 seconds" in the probability variation mode and the time reduction mode. It is "seconds". The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display when super reach occurs may be set to "25 seconds" or "30 seconds" in any game mode.

"Premium reach" is an effect mode that can be derived only when a jackpot state occurs, and during the variable display of the decorative symbol (after the reach state is established), in addition to the decorative symbol, a character having a pattern different from that of the super reach, etc. Is displayed, which is a reach pattern that gives the player a sense of expectation. The fluctuation display from which the premium reach of the present embodiment is derived has a longer fluctuation time than the fluctuation display from which the super reach is derived, and has the same length in both the high-entry state and the low-entry state ( For example, 60 seconds).

In addition, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display, which is "completely off" without reaching any reach state, is set to "10 seconds" in the normal mode and "6 seconds" in the probability variation mode and the time reduction mode.

Further, the sub control device 262 determines a stop symbol (combination of stop symbols) of the variation display of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display device 42 based on the variation pattern included in the variation pattern command and the information of the variation time. , Stop display after the fluctuation time elapses. That is, when "13RS" is won, the variation display is stopped and displayed by the combination of decorative symbols consisting of any of 1 to 9 (combination of jackpot symbols), and when "8RS" is won, the variation display is stopped. , 1-6, 8 or 9 is a combination of decorative symbols (combination of jackpot symbols), and the variable display is stopped and displayed, and if a normal jackpot ("8RN") is won, 2, The variable display is stopped and displayed by the combination of decorative symbols (combination of jackpot symbols) consisting of even-numbered doublets of any of 4, 6 and 8.

The combination of the front-rear off symbol corresponds to the "front-back off reach" in which the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol after the reach occurs. The combination of symbols other than the front and rear disengagement corresponds to the "reach other than the front and rear disengagement" in which the final stop symbol stops at a position other than the front and back of the reach symbol after the reach occurs. The combination of completely off symbols corresponds to "complete off" in which even reach does not occur. Further, as will be described in detail later, when the sub-control device 262 receives the fluctuation pattern command, the sub-control device 262 determines the combination of symbols stored in the counter buffer of the corresponding RAM 553 as the stop symbol. In the main control device 261, any one of a combination of jackpot symbols, a combination of probabilistic jackpot symbols, a combination of 13RS jackpot symbols, a combination of front and rear off symbols, a combination of symbols other than front and rear deviation, and a combination of completely off symbols It may be configured to determine, set a symbol command to specify it, and output it to the sub-control device 262 together with the variation pattern command.

After step S201, in step S202, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated. More specifically, like other counters, the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are incremented by 1, and when those counter values reach the upper limit values (255 and 31 in this embodiment), they are cleared to 0, respectively. To do. Then, the update values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503.

In the following step S203, the prize ball counting signal received from the payout control device 311 is read. Next, in step S204, the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 311 is read.

After that, in step S205, the special display control process is executed. In this process, the first and second special display devices 43a and 43b are controlled, and the jackpot determination and the setting of the variable display in the special display devices 43a and 43b and the decorative symbol display device 42 are performed. Details of this special display control process will be described later.

In step S206, the variable winning device control process is executed. In this process, control regarding the variable winning device 32 is performed. The details of the variable winning device control process will be described later.

In step S207, the normal display control process is executed. In this process, control regarding the normal symbol display device 41 is performed. The details of the normal display control process will be described later.

In step S208, the start winning device control process is executed. In this process, control is performed on the second start winning device 33b (blade member 37). The details of the start winning device control process will be described later.

After that, in step S209, it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. If the power failure occurrence information is not set in the backup area 503a, whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process has been reached in step S210, that is, a predetermined time from the start of the previous normal process (4 msec in this example). ) Has passed or not. Then, if the predetermined time has already passed, the process proceeds to step S201, and the processes after step S201 are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not passed since the start of the previous normal processing, the random number initial value counters CINI and the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal processing. It is repeatedly executed (step S211 and step S212).

That is, in step S211, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (437 in this example), it is cleared to 0.

Further, in step S212, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated (similar to step S202). Specifically, the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter values reach the maximum values (255 and 31 in this example), they are cleared to 0, respectively. Then, the changed values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503.

Here, since the execution time of each process of steps S201 to S209 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the pass / fail random number counter C1) can be randomly updated and fluctuates in the same manner. The type counters CS1 and CS2 can also be updated at random.

Further, if the power failure occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 (step S209: YES), the power is cut off, so that the processes after step S213 are performed as the power failure process when the power is turned off. Be struck. In the power failure processing, first, the occurrence of each interrupt processing is prohibited in step S213, the contents of each register used by the CPU 501 are saved in the stack area in step S214, and the stack pointer value is backed up in the backup area 503a in step S215. Remember in.

After that, in step S216, a power off notification command indicating that the power is cut off is transmitted to another control device (payout control device 311 or the like). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated in step S217 and stored in the backup area 503a. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 503. After that, the RAM access is prohibited in step S218, and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely cut off and the process cannot be executed.

The process of step S209 is the end of a series of processes corresponding to the state change of the game performed in steps S201 to S208, or the end of one cycle of the processes of steps S211 and S212 performed within the remaining time. It is executed at the timing. Therefore, in the normal processing of the main control device 261, since the information on the occurrence of the power failure is confirmed at the end of each processing, the amount of data stored in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 is smaller than that in the case where each processing is in progress. And can be easily memorized. Further, when returning to the state before the power is cut off, since the amount of data stored in the backup area 503a is small, it can be easily returned and the processing load of the main control device 261 can be reduced. .. Further, since the occurrence of interrupt processing is prohibited before the data is stored (step S213), it is possible to prevent the data from being changed when the power is cut off, and the state before the power is cut off can be reliably stored. ..

Next, the special display control process in step S205 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. First, in step S801, it is determined whether or not the value of the fluctuation interval timer for measuring the remaining time of the fluctuation interval set after the fluctuation display of the special display devices 43a and 43b is "0". If a negative determination is made in step S801, that is, if it is within the period of the fluctuation interval, the value of the fluctuation interval timer is subtracted by one in step S802, and then this process ends. That is, for example, when the fluctuation interval is set to 1 second (1000 msec) and "249 (" 250 "in the configuration where step S802 is performed before step S801)" is set in the fluctuation interval timer. In this process, the value of the variable interval timer is subtracted by "1" every 4 msec, and becomes "0" after 1 second.

On the other hand, when the affirmative determination is made in step S801, that is, when it is not the fluctuation interval period, the hit situation storage area is referred to in step S803, and it is determined whether or not the state is other than the jackpot state at present. ..

During the jackpot state, the first variable winning device 32a (in this example, the second variable winning device 32b is opened in the first round) after the display mode corresponding to the jackpot is stopped and displayed on the special display devices 43a and 43b. The opening period, which is the period until (there is no pattern to be in a state) is released, and the first (until the elapse of the predetermined time limit as the upper limit of one round or the winning upper limit is reached). The round period in which the 1 variable winning device 32a or the 2nd variable winning device 32b is opened, the 1st variable winning device 32a (set following each round period), and the 2nd variable There is an interval period, which is a period during which the winning device 32b is closed, and an ending period, which is a period after the interval period after the final round, until the variable display of the special display devices 43a and 43b can be started. ..

In the hit status storage area of the present embodiment, "0" is stored in a state other than the jackpot state, and in the jackpot state, "1" is stored during the opening period, "2" is stored during the round period, and the interval is set. "3" is stored during the period, and "4" is stored during the ending period. That is, in the step S803, it is determined whether or not "0" is stored in the hit situation storage area, and it is determined whether or not the jackpot state is in progress.

If a negative determination is made in step S803, that is, if the jackpot state is in effect, the present process is terminated as it is, while if an affirmative determination is made in step S803, the special figure described in detail in step S804 will be described later. By observing the setting status of the display flag, it is determined whether or not the first or second special display devices 43a and 43b (decorative symbol display device 42) are performing variable display. Specifically, when the special figure display flag is on, it is considered to be in variable display, and when the special figure display flag is off, it is considered to be in stop display, which corresponds to the state in which variable display is stopped. .. As will be described in detail later, the special figure display flag is turned on when starting the variable display of the first and second special display devices 43a and 43b, and the first and second special display devices 43a and 43b. The variable display is turned off when the stop display is displayed.

If a negative determination is made in step S804, that is, if neither the jackpot state nor the fluctuation display is in progress, the process proceeds to step S805, and the second fluctuation display is suspended when the ball enters the second start winning device 33b. It is determined whether or not the value of the second hold counter Nb for counting the number is larger than "0".

If an affirmative determination is made in step S805, that is, if even one second variation display is held and stored, 1 is subtracted from the second hold counter Nb in step S806. In the present embodiment, when the second variation display is reserved and stored by the determination process in step S805, the second variation display is executed without executing the first variation display. That is, even if the first variation display is held and stored earlier than the second variation display, the second variation display is prioritized and digested (the first variation display is postponed). ing.

In the following step S807, a process of shifting the data stored in the second special fluctuation holding area is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the hold 1st to 4th areas of the 2nd special variable hold area to the execution area side, and is the process of shifting the hold 1st area → the execution area and the hold 2nd. The data in each area is shifted in the order of area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area.

After step S807, in step S808, the second fluctuation flag of the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area is set to be turned on. In the following step S809, the subtraction display process of the second hold display device 46b (second hold lamp) corresponding to the decrease of the number of hold of the second variable display by one is performed. That is, when the pair of left and right second hold lamps are both blinking, the second hold lamp on the right side is turned on while the second hold lamp on the left side is blinking, and the second hold lamp on the left side is blinking. When the second hold lamp on the right side is lit, both the left and right second hold lamps are turned on, and when both the left and right second hold lamps are on, the second hold lamp on the left side is turned on. Turn off the second hold lamp on the right side while keeping the light on, and turn off both the left and right second hold lamps when the second hold lamp on the left side is on and the second hold lamp on the right side is off. Perform the process to make it.

After step S809, in step S810, the variable display setting process described in detail later is performed, and then this process ends.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step S805, that is, if no second variation display is held and stored, the first variation triggered by entering the first start winning device 33a in step S811. It is determined whether or not the first holding counter Na that counts the number of holdings displayed is greater than 0.

If a negative determination is made in step S811, the process proceeds to step S812, and the fluctuation standby state in which the fluctuation display is not performed on both the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b. A standby display setting for deriving the corresponding display mode (for example, the first and second first special figure lamps in the lower row or the mode in which only the second special figure lamp is lit) is set. That is, the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b of the present embodiment are maintained in a stop mode during the fluctuation interval (in a mode showing the result of the winning / failing lottery) after the fluctuation is stopped. However, when the fluctuation interval ends (furthermore, the passage of a predetermined time may be a condition), the display mode is switched to the display mode indicating that the fluctuation standby state is in effect. After step S812, this process ends.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S811, 1 is subtracted from the first hold counter Na in step S813. In the following step S814, a process of shifting the data stored in the first special fluctuation holding area is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the hold 1st to 4th areas of the 1st special fluctuation hold area to the execution area side, and is a process of shifting the hold 1st area → the execution area and the hold 2nd. The data in each area is shifted in the order of area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area.

After step S814, in step S815, the first fluctuation flag of the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area is set to be turned on. In the following step S816, the subtraction display process of the first hold display device 46a (first hold lamp) corresponding to the decrease of the number of hold of the first variable display by one is performed. That is, when the pair of left and right first hold lamps are both blinking, the first hold lamp on the right side is turned on while the first hold lamp on the left side is blinking, and the first hold lamp on the left side is blinking. When the first hold lamp on the right side is lit, both the left and right first hold lamps are turned on, and when both the left and right first hold lamps are on, the first hold lamp on the left side is turned on. Turn off the first hold lamp on the right side while keeping the light on, and turn off both the left and right first hold lamps when the first hold lamp on the left side is on and the first hold lamp on the right side is off. Perform the process to make it.

After step S816, the variable display setting process is performed in step S810, and then this process ends. In the present embodiment, the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area is one, and the data stored in the first special fluctuation holding area and the second special fluctuation holding area are used when performing the fluctuation display based on the data. In addition, it will be shifted to a common execution area.

Here, the details of the variable display setting process in step S810 will be described with reference to FIG.

First, in step S901, it is determined whether or not it is in the high probability state (probability variation mode) by referring to the mode storage area described later in detail. In the mode storage area, discrimination information for discriminating the game mode is stored. In the present embodiment, any value of "11", "12", and "21" is stored in the mode storage area, "11" corresponds to the normal mode, and "12" is the time. Corresponding to the shortened mode, "21" corresponds to the probabilistic mode. That is, in the step S901, it is determined whether or not it is in a high probability state by determining whether or not "21" is stored in the mode storage area.

In the case of affirmative determination in step S901, that is, in the high probability state (probability variation mode), in step S902, the first or second random number storage area of the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area is taken into consideration. It is determined whether or not one of the pass / fail flags (see the pass / fail determination process in FIG. 14) is set to ON. If an affirmative determination is made in step S902, that is, if it is determined that a big hit has been won in the winning / losing lottery in a high probability state, the process proceeds to step S904.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step S901, that is, in a low probability state (normal mode, time reduction mode), in step S903, the hit / miss random number storage area is taken into consideration, and whether the first hit / miss flag is on. Determine if not. If an affirmative determination is made in step S903, that is, if it is determined that a big hit has been won in the winning / losing lottery in a low probability state, the process proceeds to step S904.

In step S904, the jackpot confirmation flag indicating that the occurrence of the jackpot state has been confirmed is turned on. In the present embodiment, storing a value corresponding to the determination of the occurrence of the jackpot state in the winning / failing random number storage area is referred to as turning on the jackpot confirmation flag.

In the following step S905, one of the 13RS-1 flag, the 13RS-2 flag, and the 13RS-3 flag (see the type determination processing of FIGS. 15 and 16) is turned on in consideration of the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area. Determine if it is set.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S905, that is, if it is "13RS", the 13RS pattern setting process is performed in step S906. The 13RS pattern setting process is a process for executing a variation display for teaching the occurrence of "13RS", and is special based on the values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 503. Fluctuation patterns of display devices 43a and 43b and decorative symbol display device 42 (variation display time, variation display stop mode of special display devices 43a and 43b and decorative symbol display device 42, effect pattern of variation display of decorative symbol display device 42, etc. ) Is determined, and the fluctuation pattern command is set based on the determination and various flags.

The relationship between the numerical values of the first fluctuation type counter CS1 and the second fluctuation type counter CS2, the fluctuation pattern, and the fluctuation time is defined in advance by a table or the like. That is, in the 13RS pattern setting process, the reach pattern is determined from the normal reach, the super reach, and the premium reach, and the determined reach pattern and the time reduction state (probability variation mode, time reduction mode, or first variation display) are displayed. The fluctuation time in the special display devices 43a and 43b and the decorative symbol display device 42 is determined based on the determination result of whether or not there are four holds). Then, the information including the 13RS, the determined reach pattern, and the fluctuation time is set in the fluctuation pattern command, and the information capable of grasping the fluctuation time is stored in the corresponding storage area. Further, which of the stop modes of the special display devices 43a and 43b corresponding to 13RS is to be stopped is determined and stored in the corresponding storage area.

For convenience of explanation, the setting of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the jackpot of "13RS-1", "13RS-2", and "13RS-3" is described collectively, but the premium reach is "13RS-1". , Or the ratio of reach types selected for "13RS-1", "13RS-2", and "13RS-3" is different, etc. Settings corresponding to the type are made (the same applies to the pattern setting processing of 8RS and 8RN described later). After step S906, the process proceeds to step S915, which will be described later.

If a negative determination is made in step S905, the 8RS-1 flag or the 8RS-2 flag is set to ON in step S907, taking into consideration the winning type random number storage area of the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area. Determine if it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S907, that is, if it is "8RS", the process proceeds to step S915 after performing the 8RS pattern setting process in step S908.

On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S907, that is, when any of the 8RN-1 flag, 8RN-2 flag, 8RN-3 flag, 8RN-4 flag, and 8RN-5 flag is set to ON. In step S909, after performing the 8RN pattern setting process, the process proceeds to step S915.

Further, when a negative determination is made in step S902, that is, when the jackpot is not won in the high probability state, or when a negative determination is made in step S903, that is, when the jackpot is not won in the low probability state. Refers to the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area in step S910, and determines whether or not the front / rear flag (see the reach determination process of FIG. 17) is on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S910, that is, if the reach is "out of front / rear reach", the front / rear reach pattern setting process is performed in step S911, and then the process proceeds to step S915.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step S910, in step S912, the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area is taken into consideration, and it is determined whether or not the flags other than the front and back are on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S912, that is, if the result is "reach other than front / rear deviation", the reach pattern setting process other than front / rear is performed in step S913, and then the process proceeds to step S915.

In addition, if a negative determination is made in step S912, that is, if the result is "complete deviation", the deviation fluctuation pattern setting process is performed in step S914, and then the process proceeds to step S915.

In step S915, the special figure display flag indicating whether or not the variable display is being displayed on the special display devices 43a and 43b is turned on. As a result, it is shown that the conditions for performing the switching display (variable display) on the special display devices 43a and 43b are satisfied. In the following step S916, the setting process of the special figure display timer for measuring the fluctuation time (remaining time of the fluctuation display) in the special display devices 43a and 43b is performed. The special figure display timer is taken into consideration when determining whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable display.

The fluctuation time of the special display devices 43a and 43b in the present embodiment is set to a value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2. When a control signal to start switching display (variable display) is output to the special display devices 43a and 43b in the next external output processing of the normal processing based on the setting of the special figure display timer. , The switching display (variable display) is started on the special display devices 43a and 43b. Further, the sub-control device 262 that has received the variation pattern command starts the variation display on the decorative symbol display device 42 based on the variation pattern command (almost) at the same time as the variation start of the special display devices 43a and 43b, and the special display device. At the same time (almost) as the stop display of 43a and 43b, the variable display of the decorative symbol on the decorative symbol display device 42 is stopped and displayed. After the end of step S916, the variation display setting process ends.

In the present embodiment, in the start winning process, the process of acquiring the value of the pass / fail random number counter C1 in steps S505 and S515 and storing it in the special fluctuation holding area, the pass / fail determination process of steps S506 and 516, and the variation display setting. In the processing, the winning / failing lottery is configured by the processing of steps S901 to S903 for determining the winning / failing based on the winning / failing flag and the situation at that time. Further, the second pass / fail determination process is configured by the processes of steps S901 to S903, and the variable display setting process is configured by the processes of step S906, step S908, step S909, step S911, step S913, and step S914.

Returning to the description of FIG. 19, when the affirmative determination is made in step S804, that is, when the fluctuation display is in progress, the process proceeds to step S817 to perform the subtraction process of the special figure display timer. Each time this process is performed, the value of the special figure display timer is subtracted by 4 msec. For example, when the fluctuation time is 12 seconds (12000 msec), "3000" is set for the special figure display timer, and 1 is subtracted every 4 msec.

Subsequently, the process proceeds to step S818, and it is determined whether or not the predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed by taking into consideration the value of the special figure display timer after the subtraction. At this time, step S818 is positively determined when the predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed, that is, when the value of the special figure display timer becomes “0”.

If a negative determination is made in step S818, in step S823, a switching display setting for continuously performing switching display (variation display) of the special display devices 43a and 43b is performed. In addition, based on the setting contents of the switching display setting, a control signal for switching display is output to the special display devices 43a and 43b in the external output processing in the next normal processing. As a result, the timing of the special display control process, that is, the switching display (variable display) of the special display devices 43a and 43b is realized every 4 ms. After step S823, this process ends.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S818, the special figure display flag is turned off in step S819, and the stop display setting for performing the stop display on the special display devices 43a and 43b is performed in step S820. Based on the setting contents of this stop display setting, a control signal for performing stop display is output to the special display devices 43a and 43b in the external output processing in the next normal processing. That is, in the special display devices 43a and 43b, the mode corresponding to each jackpot type, deviation, etc. set in the variable display setting process is stopped and displayed.

Further, after step S820, in step S821, a stop command for causing the sub control device 262 to display the stop display of the decorative symbol display device 42 is set. As a result, the stop timings of the special display devices 43a and 43b and the decorative symbol display device 42 can be reliably synchronized. However, since the stop mode of the decorative symbol display device 42 has already been determined by the sub-control device 262 by the fluctuation pattern command output at the start of the variation display, the information regarding the stop mode of the decorative symbol display device 42 is added again. No need. Further, again, the stop display by the special display devices 43a and 43b is the main display, and the display of the decorative symbol by the decorative symbol display device 42 is only an auxiliary one (for directing).

Subsequently, in step S822, the discrimination information setting process for performing the initial setting of the hit state and the switching setting of the game mode is performed, and then this process is terminated.

Here, the discrimination information setting process in step S822 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S1001, the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the jackpot confirmation flag is set to ON. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1001, the jackpot confirmation flag is turned off in step S1002, and the jackpot middle flag indicating that the jackpot state is in progress is turned on in step S1003. Further, in step S1004, the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area is taken into consideration, and it is determined whether or not the 13RS flag is set to ON.

When affirmative determination is made in step S1004, that is, when the jackpot is "13RS", the number of rounds executed during the jackpot state (number of times the variable winning device 32 is opened) is determined in step S1005. Set "13" to the round number counter.

In the following step S1006, "1" is set for the hit situation storage area. Further, in step S1007, a value "2000" corresponding to an opening period of, for example, 8 seconds is set for the special variable timer used for control during the hit state (open / close control of the variable winning device 32). Subsequently, in step S1008, in order to count the number of game balls that have entered the first variable winning device 32a or the second variable winning device 32b during each round in the jackpot state (whether the winning upper limit of the round has been reached). (To know whether or not) is set to "8" indicating the maximum number of balls entered per round of eight for the winning counter. The value of the winning counter is determined by the detection information of the winning ball count switches 226a and 226b whether or not the ball has entered the variable winning devices 32a and 32b during the switch reading process (see FIG. 11) of the timer interrupt processing. If it is determined that the ball has entered the variable winning devices 32a and 32b, 1 is subtracted.

Then, in step S1009, an opening command for notifying the sub-control device 262 of the start of the jackpot state is set. The opening command includes information on the hit type, and the sub-control device 262 can also grasp the total number of rounds in the hit state and the opening / closing patterns of the variable winning devices 32a and 32b. After step S1009, this process ends.

It should be noted that, in the jackpot state, the appearance of promotion of the jackpot type, etc. (for example, when an even number of doublets is stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42, "8RS" or "13RS" is displayed in the jackpot state immediately after. Or teach that you have won "13RS" in the jackpot state immediately after when an odd number of doublets other than "7 symbols" is stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42. You may do).

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1004, “8” is set in the round number counter in step S1010. After step S1010, the process proceeds to step S1006 described above. If a negative determination is made in step S1001, a value corresponding to the fluctuation interval (for example, 1 second) is set for the fluctuation interval timer in step S1011.

In the decorative symbol display device 42, basically, the variable display of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing of the stop display of the variable display of the special display devices 43a and 43b, and the symbols displayed as stopped by the special display devices 43a and 43b. Is displayed as it is Until the end of the fluctuation interval (until the next fluctuation display of the special display devices 43a and 43b is started), the stopped-displayed decorative symbol continues to be displayed. Then, when the fluctuation interval ends and the fluctuation display is reserved and stored, the fluctuation display on the special display devices 43a and 43b and the fluctuation display on the decorative symbol display device 42 are started (almost) at the same time. On the other hand, if the fluctuation display is not stored on hold even after the fluctuation interval ends, the stop symbol in the decorative symbol display device 42 continues to be derived for a while, and then the display switches to the display waiting for the game (demo screen display). .. Further, when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed with an even number of doublets in the variable display of the decorative symbol display device 42, the combination of the decorative symbols may be converted into an odd number of doublets during the variable interval period (derivation). In some cases, a re-lottery effect such as (a configuration in which conversion is always possible) may be performed.

After step S1011, in step S1012, it is determined whether or not "12" is stored in the mode storage area, that is, whether or not the time reduction mode is used. If a negative determination is made in step S1012, this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1012, the value of the fluctuation count counter is subtracted by 1 in step S1013 in order to measure the duration of the time reduction mode given after the end of the jackpot state of the normal jackpot. As will be described in detail later, in the present embodiment, at the end of the jackpot state, the number of fluctuation displays (for example, 100 times) corresponding to the period of the time reduction mode is set in the fluctuation count counter, and the special display devices 43a and 43b Every time the variation display of the (decorative symbol display device 42) is performed once, 1 is subtracted in the step S1013.

In the following step S1014, it is determined whether or not the value of the fluctuation count counter is "0". When a negative determination is made in step S1014, that is, after the jackpot state of "8RN" ends, the variable display of the special display devices 43a and 43b (decorative symbol display device 42) for the specified number of times set as the period of the time reduction mode is displayed. If it has not been performed yet, this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when the affirmative determination is made in step S1014, "11" indicating that the mode is in the normal mode is set in the mode storage area in step S1015. That is, the time reduction mode ends when the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times on the special display devices 43a and 43b, and the mode shifts to the normal mode. After the step S1015, in step S1016, the support end command for notifying the sub-control device 262 to end the time reduction mode is set, and then this process ends.

Next, the variable winning device control process for opening and closing the first and second variable winning devices 32a and 32b in step S206 (see FIG. 10) will be described with reference to FIGS. 22 and 23.

First, in step S1201, it is determined whether or not the value set in the hit situation storage area is "0", thereby determining whether or not the state is other than the hit state. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1201, that is, if it is not in a hit state, this process is terminated as it is. Incidentally, at the start of the hit state, "1" is set in the hit status storage area in the above-mentioned discrimination information setting process.

On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S1201, that is, when a hit state is in progress (when any of "1" to "4" is set in the hit status storage area), the process proceeds to step S1202. , The value of the special variable timer is subtracted by 1. By the way, at the start of the jackpot state, "2000", which is a value corresponding to the opening effect time, is set for the special variable timer in the discrimination information setting process.

In the following step S1203, it is determined whether or not the value of the special variable timer is "0". If an affirmative determination is made in step S1203, it is determined in step S1204 whether or not "1" indicating the opening period is set in the hit situation storage area.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1204, in step S1205, “2” indicating the round period is set for the hit status storage area. As will be described in detail later, in the present embodiment, the first variable winning device 32a may be opened a plurality of times in one round. That is, there may be a period during which the first variable winning device 32a is closed even during the round.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the open / close control of the variable winning devices 32a and 32b, the E1 table shown in FIG. 43, the E2 table shown in FIG. 44, the E3 table shown in FIG. 45, and the E4 table shown in FIG. 46 are used. There is. In the present embodiment, the open / close control management table corresponds to the first storage means, the E3 table corresponds to the second storage means, and the E2 table corresponds to the third storage means.

As shown in FIG. 46, in the E4 table, 11 addresses (hereinafter referred to as E4 addresses) of "PTN4-1" to "PTN4-11" and variable winning devices 32a corresponding to each E4 address are displayed. , Specific control data regarding the opening / closing operation of 32b is stored. More specifically, corresponding to "PTN4-1", the first open control data for opening the first variable winning device 32a for 28 seconds, the first regulation control data for closing the first sorting device 149a, and the first 1 The first monitoring control data for setting the remaining ball monitoring flag on is stored.

For the first open control data that opens the first variable winning device 32a for 28 seconds, the first regulation control data that closes the first distribution device 149a, and the sub control device 262 corresponding to "PTN4-2". The intermediate open command setting data for setting the open command during the round to inform that the first variable winning device 32a has been opened during the round is stored.

Corresponding to "PTN4-3", the first open control data that opens the first variable winning device 32a for 1.8 seconds, the first regulation control data that closes the first sorting device 149a, and the first remaining ball monitoring. The first monitoring control data for setting the flag on is stored.

Corresponding to "PTN4-4", the first open control data for opening the first variable winning device 32a for 1.8 seconds and the first distribution for the same period as the period when the first variable winning device 32a is open. The first permissible control data for opening the device 149a and the first monitoring control data for setting the first remaining ball monitoring flag on are stored.

Corresponding to "PTN4-5", the second open control data for opening the second variable winning device 32b for 28 seconds and the second sorting device 149b for the same period as the period when the second variable winning device 32b is opened. The second permissible control data for releasing the data and the second monitoring control data for setting the second remaining ball monitoring flag on are stored.

The second open control data that opens the second variable winning device 32b for 1.8 seconds, the second regulation control data that closes the second sorting device 149b, and the second remaining ball monitoring corresponding to "PTN4-6". The second monitoring control data for setting the flag on is stored.

Corresponding to "PTN4-7", the first closing control data that closes the first variable winning device 32a for 4 seconds, and the final setting data that sets the value "3" indicating the interval period for the hit situation storage area. , The first monitoring time setting data for setting the value "1500" corresponding to 3 seconds is stored in the first monitoring timer.

Corresponding to "PTN4-8", the first closing control data for closing the first variable winning device 32a for 1 second and the first variable winning device 32a for the sub control device 262 were closed during the round. The intermediate closing command setting data for setting the closing command during the round is stored.

Corresponding to "PTN4-9", the first closing control data that closes the first variable winning device 32a for 1 second, and the final setting data that sets the value "3" indicating the interval period for the hit situation storage area. , The first monitoring time setting data that sets the value "1500" corresponding to 3 seconds to the first monitoring timer, and the alternating flag setting data that turns on the alternating flag that specifies the control method using the E2 table, which will be described in detail later. Is remembered.

The second closing control data that closes the second variable winning device 32b for 4 seconds corresponding to "PTN4-10", and the final setting data that sets a value "3" indicating an interval period for the hit situation storage area. , The second monitoring time setting data for setting the value "1500" corresponding to 3 seconds is stored in the second monitoring timer.

The second closing control data that closes the second variable winning device 32b for 1 second corresponding to "PTN4-11", and the final setting data that sets a value "3" indicating an interval period for the hit situation storage area. , The second monitoring time setting data for setting the value "1500" corresponding to 3 seconds is stored in the second monitoring timer.

As shown in FIG. 45, in the E3 table, six addresses (hereinafter referred to as E3 addresses) such as "PTN3-1" to "PTN3-6" and each E3 address correspond to the E4 table. Open selection control data for selecting "PTN4-1" to "PTN4-6" among E4 addresses, closed selection control data for selecting "PTN4-7" to "PTN4-11", and processing for selecting an E4 address. The execution count setting data indicating the number of executions is stored. The open selection control data, the closed selection control data, and the execution count setting data are stored in a set of three in the order of execution count setting data → open selection control data → closed selection control data, and 1 for each E3 address. One set or two sets are stored. In the present embodiment, one (one time) round is completed by completing the process based on the control data group stored for each E3 address. That is, the E3 table stores what kind of open / close control is combined (overlapping) to form one round corresponding to each E3 address.

As shown in FIG. 44, in the E2 table, 10 addresses (hereinafter referred to as E2 addresses) such as "PTN2-1" to "PTN2-10" and E3 addresses are selected corresponding to each E2 address. The round selection control data for causing the E3 address and the round number setting data indicating the number of times to execute the process of selecting the E3 address are stored. The round selection control data and the round number setting data are basically stored in two sets in the order of round number setting data → round selection control data, and 1 to 5 sets are stored corresponding to each E2 address. Has been done. In the present embodiment, the jackpot state (15 rounds or 8 rounds in total) is completed by completing the process based on the control data group stored corresponding to each E2 address. That is, the E2 table stores what kind of open / close control rounds are combined (overlapping) to form a jackpot state corresponding to each E2 address. As for the place where two patterns are alternately repeated in consecutive rounds, they are collectively stored as a set of three such as round number setting data → round selection control data ⇔ round selection control data.

As shown in FIG. 43, the correspondence relationship between various jackpot types and the E2 address is stored in the E1 table.

Now, in step S1206, the E2 pointer setting process is performed. In this process, first, the jackpot flags (13RS-1 flag, 13RS-2 flag, 13RS-3 flag, 8RS-1 flag, 8RS-2 flag) set in the winning / failing random number storage area of the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area , 8RN-1 flag, 8RN-2 flag, 8RN-3 flag, 8RN-4 flag, and 8RN-5 flag are all set to ON) to grasp the jackpot type. Then, the E1 table is taken into consideration, and the E2 address corresponding to the jackpot type this time is acquired.

Then, in order to execute the process based on the first control data among the control data stored corresponding to the acquired E2 address, a pointer (hereinafter, E2) pointing to the first control data (the area in which the first control data is stored) is pointed to. Pointer) is set. In the following description, for convenience, each area in which a plurality of control data are continuously stored is referred to as a "row" in accordance with the description in FIG.

For example, when "13RS-1" is won, the E1 table is taken into consideration and the E2 address "PTN2-1" is acquired. Then, the E2 pointer is set so as to point to the first control data (“1” is described in FIG. 44) stored in the control data corresponding to “PTN2-1” in the E2 table.

Subsequently, in step S1207, processing (E2 processing) based on the control data (of the row) indicated by the E2 pointer is performed. In the present embodiment, the round count setting data is stored at the head of the control data group stored corresponding to each E2 address. Further, in the present embodiment, an E2 counter for counting down the number of executions of the process of selecting the E3 address based on the round selection control data is provided. Then, in step S1207, the numerical value stored in the round number setting data is stored in the E2 counter.

After step S1207, in step S1208, the E2 pointer is moved to the next line (the control data pointed to by the E2 pointer is set to be the next control data). By the process of step S1207, the E2 pointer points to the round selection control data for selecting the E3 address.

After that, in step S1209, the E3 pointer setting process is performed. In this process, in order to execute the process based on the first control data among the control data stored corresponding to the E3 address pointed by the E2 pointer, the first control data (the area where the stored area) is stored. Set the pointer to point to (hereinafter, E3 pointer). In the following description, for convenience, each area in which a plurality of control data are continuously stored is referred to as a "row" in accordance with the description in FIG. 45.

Subsequently, in step S1210, processing (E3 processing) based on the control data (of the row) indicated by the E3 pointer is performed. In the present embodiment, the execution number setting data is stored at the head of the control data group stored corresponding to each E3 address. Further, in the present embodiment, an E3 counter for counting down the number of executions of the process of selecting the E4 address based on the execution number setting data is provided. Then, in step S1210, the numerical value stored in the execution count setting data is stored in the E3 counter.

After step S1210, in step S1211, the E3 pointer is moved to the next line (the control data pointed to by the E3 pointer is set to be the next control data). By the process of step S1211, the E3 pointer points to the open selection control data among the E4 addresses, particularly the E4 addresses. After that, in step S1212, a round command for notifying the sub-control device 262 of the start of the round is set, and then the process proceeds to step S1213.

The sub-control device 262 stores in advance information on what pattern the variable winning devices 32a and 32b are opened and closed according to each jackpot type, and an opening command including information on the jackpot type. The configuration is such that the opening / closing patterns of the variable winning devices 32a and 32b can be grasped when (see FIG. 21) is received. Further, the round command is output to the sub control device 262 at the start of the round period, and the interval command described later is output at the start of the interval period, so that the timing of the effect corresponding to each round can be surely matched. it can.

In step S1213, processing (E3 processing) based on the control data indicated by the E3 pointer is performed. At the stage of executing the step S1213, the E3 pointer points to the open selection control data or the closed selection control data for selecting the E4 address, not the round number setting data. Therefore, in step S1213, processing based on the control data corresponding to the E4 address specified by the E3 pointer is executed. More specifically, based on each control data, the variable winning devices 32a and 32b are opened or closed, and the time for maintaining the open state (opening time) or the time for maintaining the closed state (closing time) is special. Set to variable timer. Further, the control data indicated by the E3 pointer includes control data (“PTN4-7”, “PTN4-9” to “PTN4-” including final setting data (control data for setting “3” in the hit status storage area). If it is the control data corresponding to "11", "3" is set in the jackpot situation storage area. Further, the first remaining ball monitoring flag and the second remaining ball monitoring flag are set to be turned on, the first sorting device 149a and the second sorting device 149b are opened and closed, the alternating flag is set to be turned on, and the like. Performs processing to execute the current operation (control) as appropriate.

In the present embodiment, by outputting the open command during the round and the close command during the round to the sub control device 262, the sub control device 262 closes the first variable winning device 32a during the round period and closes the first variable winning device 32a. Although it is possible to grasp the reopening of the first variable winning device 32a during the round period, it is also possible to omit the open command during the round and the close command during the round.

In the following step S1214, it is determined whether or not the value of the hit situation storage area is "3". If a negative determination is made in step S1214, that is, if the end time of the round has not yet arrived, the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1214, that is, at the end of the round (at the start of the interval), in step S1215, in order to convey information to the sub-control device 262 that the interval is started. Performs the process of setting the interval command of. After that, this process ends.

As described above, the sub-control device 262 grasps the opening / closing patterns of the variable winning devices 32a and 32b in the jackpot state at the time of receiving the opening command, but the variable winning is made during one round. When eight or more game balls enter the devices 32a and 32b, the round ends at that point even if the opening period has not elapsed. Further, as will be described in detail later, even when the round ends with eight winnings to the variable winning devices 32a and 32b, the configuration is such that the step S1214 is performed. Therefore, by notifying the sub-control device 262 of the end of the round at this timing, the timing of closing the variable winning devices 32a and 32b (the timing of switching between the round and the interval) and the decorative symbol display device 42 and the like It is possible to match the timing of switching the production and the like.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step S1204, that is, if the value stored in the jackpot situation storage area is any of "2", "3", and "4", the E3 counter is used in step S1216. The value of is subtracted by 1. In the following step S1217, it is determined whether or not the value of the E3 counter is "0".

If a negative determination is made in step S1217, the E3 pointer is moved to the next line in step S1218, and then the process proceeds to step S1213. In this case, the E3 pointer points to the closing selection control data, and in step S1213, a process of closing the variable winning devices 32a and 32b is performed.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step S1203, that is, if there is time (opening time or closing time) for maintaining the open state or closed state of the variable winning devices 32a and 32b, the process proceeds to step S1219. , It is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter that measures the number of balls entered into the variable winning devices 32a and 32b is "0". At the start of the jackpot state and at the start of the round, the winning counter is set to "8", which is the upper limit (specified number) of the number of winnings per round. Then, every time one game ball enters the variable winning devices 32a and 32b, one is subtracted.

If a negative determination is made in step S1219, this process ends as it is. On the other hand, when an affirmative judgment is made in step S1219, that is, when the winning upper limit of the variable winning devices 32a and 32b of the game ball, which is one of the triggers for the end of the round, is reached, the winning counter is checked in step S1220. After setting a predetermined value (for example, “8” or the like), the process proceeds to step S1216.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S1221 and the process proceeds to step S1216, the value of the E3 counter is changed from "2" to "1" in step S1216, a negative determination is made in step S1217, and the E3 pointer is terminated in step S1218. The process is moved to the next line in which the control data including the setting data is stored, and the round end process such that "3" is stored in the jackpot status storage area in step 1213 is executed. That is, the round ends promptly after eight balls have been entered into the variable winning devices 32a and 32b.

Further, if the value of the ball entry counter is left as "0" when the affirmative decision is made in step S1219, the interval control after the round is completed as described above (next variable winning device control process). ), The affirmative determination is suddenly made in step S1219, and the interval period cannot be completed. Therefore, by inputting a temporary value other than "0" to the ball entry counter in step S1220, the interval period is completed.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1217 (when one round is completed), the process proceeds to step S1221 to determine whether or not the value of the hit situation storage area is "4". As will be described in detail later, the value of the hit situation storage area will be set to "4" when the final round is completed and the subsequent interval period is completed.

If a negative determination is made in step S1221, that is, if the stage of terminating the jackpot state has not yet been reached, the process proceeds to step S1222, and it is determined whether or not the value of the hit status storage area is "3". As described above, the last control data corresponding to each E3 address in the E3 table shown in FIG. 45 is the E4 address "PTN4-7", "PTN4-9" to "PTN4-11". The control data includes the final setting data indicating one of them, and the E3 process in step S1213 (the process of starting the interval after the end of the round) with the E3 pointer pointing to the control data including the final setting data of any of these. If is performed, "3" is set in the jackpot situation storage area.

If a negative determination is made in step S1222, that is, if the stage of ending the round has not yet been reached, the process proceeds to step S1223, and the E3 pointer is moved to the next line. It should be noted that what may be denied in step S1223 is that among the E3 addresses, a plurality of sets of execution count setting data, open selection control data, and closed selection control data are stored as corresponding control data. This is the case when the E3 address is selected. That is, when a negative determination is made in step S1222, it means that unexecuted control data remains in the control data group corresponding to the selected E3 address, and the remaining control data is executed in step S1223. In order to make this happen, the E3 pointer is moved so as to point to the execution count setting data of the next set.

In the following step S1224, as the E3 process, the numerical value stored in the execution count setting data (of the row) indicated by the E3 pointer is set in the E3 counter. Then, in step S1225, the E3 pointer is moved to the next line, and then the process is moved to step S1213. In step S1213 in this case, a process of opening the first variable winning device 32a is performed.

Further, when the affirmative determination is made in step S1222, that is, when the round ends and the subsequent interval period also ends, the process proceeds to step S1226 and the round number counter is decremented by 1. In the following step S1227, the E2 counter is decremented by 1.

Then, in step S1228, it is determined whether or not the value of the E2 counter is "0". If a negative determination is made in step S1228, that is, if the process based on one set of control data of the E2 table is not completed, the process proceeds to step S1229.

In step S1229, it is determined whether or not the alternating flag (see PTN4-9 in the E4 table of FIG. 46) is set to ON. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1229, it is determined in step S1230 whether or not the E2 pointer points to PTN3-2 (see PTN2-2 and PTN2-3 in the E2 table of FIG. 44). If an affirmative determination is made in step S1230, the E2 pointer is moved to the next line in step S1231. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1330, the E2 pointer is moved to the previous line in step S1332.

After step S1231 and step S1232, or when a negative determination is made in step S1229, in step S1233, the first control data in the control data group stored corresponding to the E3 address indicated by the E2 pointer is pointed to. Set the E3 pointer so that. Further, in step S1234, the numerical value stored in the execution count setting data indicated by the E3 pointer is set in the E3 counter, the E3 pointer is moved to the next line in step S1235, and the E4 address indicated by the E3 pointer is indicated in step S1236. (Here, the E3 pointer indicates the open selection control data, and in the E3 process, the process of opening the first variable winning device 32a is executed).

After step S1236, in step S1237, "2" indicating that the round is in progress with respect to the hit situation storage area is set. In the following step S1238, "8", which is the upper limit value (maximum number of winnings per round) of winning the game balls into the variable winning devices 32a and 32b during one round, is set for the winning counter. Further, in step S1239, a round command for notifying the sub-control device 262 of the start of the round period is set, and this process ends.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1228, the alternate flag is set to off (if on) in step S1240. In the following step S1241, it is determined whether or not the value of the round number counter is "0".

If a negative determination is made in step S1241, that is, the entire round has not been digested, and the stage of ending the jackpot state has not yet been reached (control that has not yet been executed in the control data group corresponding to the selected E2 address). If there is data), the process proceeds to step S1242, and the E2 pointer is moved to the next line. Subsequently, in step S1243, the numerical value stored in the round count setting data indicated by the E2 pointer is set in the E2 counter, and in step S1244, the E2 pointer is moved to the next line, and the E2 pointer indicates the round selection control data. Make it a state. After step S1244, the process proceeds to step S1233.

Further, when an affirmative determination is made in step S1241, that is, when all rounds are completed and the subsequent interval period is completed, the process proceeds to step S1245, and the decorative symbol display device 42 is used for the special variable timer. Set the ending time for performing the ending effect in the above.

After step S1245, in step S1246, "4" indicating that the hit state ends with respect to the hit situation storage area is set. In the following step S1247, the sub-control device 262 is set with an ending command indicating the end of the jackpot state, and then this process is terminated.

As will be described in detail later, the ending effect of the decorative symbol display device 42 is not performed from the time when the ending time is set, but when the final round is completed (variable winning devices 32a and 32b are closed). It starts from the point of time). That is, the sub-control device 262 starts the ending effect when the interval command (see step S1215) output at the time when the final round ends (the time when the interval period after the final round starts) is received.

Further, when the affirmative determination is made in step S1221, that is, when "4" is set in the hit status storage area, the process proceeds to step S1248 and the end setting process is performed. In the end setting process, the mode storage area is set and the fluctuation count counter is set.

Here, the end setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 24. First, in step S1401, it is determined whether or not the second special ball entry flag (see the second remaining ball monitoring process in FIG. 30) is set to ON.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1401, the second special entry flag is turned off in step S1402. Further, in step S1403, the value "21" corresponding to the probability variation mode is set for the mode storage area. As a result, the probability change mode is given after the jackpot state ends.

In the following step S1404, a probability change start command for notifying the sub-control device 262 to start the probability change mode (shift to the probability change stage) is set. After that, in step S1405, the jackpot middle flag is turned off, and then this process ends.

If a negative determination is made in step S1401, it is determined in step S1406 whether or not the value of the first special ball entry counter (see the first remaining ball monitoring process in FIG. 29) is "3" or more. .. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1406, the first special entry counter is reset in step S1407. After that, the process proceeds to step S1403, and processing such as setting "21" for the mode storage area is performed.

If a negative determination is made in step S1406, a value "12" corresponding to the time reduction mode is set for the mode storage area in step S1408. As a result, the time reduction mode is given after the jackpot state ends. After step S1408, in step S1409, "100" is set for the fluctuation count counter. The fluctuation number counter is for grasping that the upper limit of the fluctuation number has been reached in the time reduction mode in which the upper limit of the fluctuation number is set.

Subsequently, in step S1410, a time saving start command for notifying the sub control device 262 to start the time saving mode (shift to the pullback stage) is set. After that, in step S1405, the jackpot middle flag is turned off, and then this process ends.

Returning to the description of FIGS. 22 and 23, after the end setting process of step S1248, in step S1249, “0” indicating that the hit status storage area is not in the big hit state is set. After that, in step S1250, a hit end command for transmitting information to the effect that the jackpot state is terminated is set to the sub control device 262, and then this process is terminated. The hit end command includes information on the number of times of the fluctuation number counter set in the end setting process.

Next, the normal display control process in step S208 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S2101, whether or not the value of the normal figure interval timer for measuring the remaining time of the interval (normal figure interval) set after the fluctuation display of the normal symbol display device 41 is "0". To determine. If a negative determination is made in step S2101, that is, if it is a normal figure interval, the value of the normal figure interval timer is subtracted in step S2116, and then this process ends. That is, for example, when the normal map interval is set to 1 second (1000 msec) and "249 (" 250 "in the configuration in which step S2116 is performed before step S2101)" is set in the normal map interval timer. In the process, the value of the normal figure interval timer is subtracted by "1" every 4 msec, and becomes "0" after 1 second.

On the other hand, when the affirmative determination is made in step S2101, that is, when it is not the normal figure interval period, the support period flag indicating that the opening / closing control of the second start winning device 33b is in progress is turned on in step S2102. Determine if it is set. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2102, the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2102, in step S2103, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol display flag indicating whether or not the normal symbol display device 41 is performing variable display is on. When the normal symbol display flag is on, it is considered that the normal symbol display device 41 is in the variable display.

If a negative determination is made in step S2103, the process proceeds to step S2104, and it is determined whether or not the value of the normal hold counter Nc is larger than 0. If a negative determination is made in step S2104, that is, if no variation display of the normal symbol display device 41 is held, the present process is terminated as it is. In addition, for example, when a negative determination is made in step S2104, the normal symbol display device 41 sets the standby display for deriving the display mode corresponding to the fluctuation standby state in which the fluctuation display is not performed. May be. That is, after the fluctuation is stopped, the normal symbol display device 41 is maintained in the stopped mode during the normal map interval period (in a mode showing the result of the ball entry support lottery), but the normal symbol interval period ends. Then, it may be configured so that it can be switched to the display mode indicating that it is in the variable standby state.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2104, 1 is subtracted from the normal hold counter Nc in step S2105. In the following step S2106, a process of shifting the data stored in the normal fluctuation holding area is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the hold 1st to 4th areas of the normal variable hold area to the execution area side, and is a process of shifting the hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area →. The data in each area is shifted such as the hold 1st area, the hold 3rd area → the hold 2nd area, the hold 4th area → the hold 3rd area.

After that, in step S2107, the fluctuation display of the normal symbol display device 41 is set and the normal symbol fluctuation setting process for starting is executed.

Here, the normal map fluctuation setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 26. First, in step S2301, the flag displaying the normal symbol indicating that the normal symbol is being displayed in a variable manner in the normal symbol display device 41 is turned on. In the following step S2302, the hit situation storage area is referred to, and it is determined whether or not "0" is stored, that is, whether or not the state is other than the jackpot state at present. If the affirmative judgment is made in step S2302, that is, if the jackpot state is not obtained, whether or not the value of "12" or "21" is stored in the mode storage area in step S2303, that is, high. It is determined whether or not the ball is in the ball entry state (time reduction mode or probability variation mode).

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2303, in step S2304, the fluctuation display time of the normal symbol is set with respect to the normal symbol display timer that measures the fluctuation time (residual time) of the fluctuation display performed by the normal symbol display device 41. Set "100" to set it to 0.4 seconds.

After that, in step S2305, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol random number counter C4 in the execution area of the normal fluctuation holding area is “0”. In the high-entry state, the player wins when the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4, which takes a value in the range of "0 to 232", is "1 to 232".

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2305, the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2305, that is, if the ball entry support lottery for whether or not to open the second start winning device 33b is won, the ball entry support lottery is won in step S2306. Turn on the ball entry support flag to indicate that. After step S2306, this process ends.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step S2302 or step S2303, that is, in a jackpot state or a low ball entry state, in step S2307, the fluctuation display time of the normal symbol is displayed with respect to the normal symbol display timer. Set to "2000" to set the timer to 8 seconds. Further, in step S2308, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol random number counter C4 in the execution area of the normal fluctuation holding area is "1 to 31". In the low ball entry state, the player wins when the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4, which takes a value in the range of "0 to 232", is "1 to 31". In addition, the variable display time of the normal symbol may be determined by lottery.

If a negative determination is made in step S2308, this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative judgment is made in step S2308, that is, if the ball entry support lottery is won, the ball entry support flag indicating that the ball entry support lottery has been won is turned on in step S2306, and then the present End the process. The variable display time of the normal symbol, the winning probability in the ball entry support lottery, etc. can be set appropriately for each pachinko machine model. For example, the winning probability of the ball entry support lottery in the high ball entry state can be set. , It may be configured to be higher than the winning probability of the ball entry support lottery in the low ball entry state.

Returning to the description of FIG. 25, after step S2107, in step S2108, the subtraction display process of the normal hold display device 44 (normal hold lamp) corresponding to the reduction of the number of hold of the variable display of the normal symbol display device 41 by one. I do. That is, when the pair of left and right normal hold lamps are both blinking, the right normal hold lamp is turned on while the left normal hold lamp is blinking, and the left normal hold lamp is blinking and the right side is blinking. When the normal hold lamp is lit, both the left and right normal hold lamps are lit, and when both the left and right normal hold lamps are lit, the left normal hold lamp is lit and the right normal hold lamp is lit. When the hold lamp is turned off and the left normal hold lamp is on and the right normal hold lamp is off, processing is performed to turn off both the left and right normal hold lamps. After step S2108, this process ends.

Further, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2103, that is, if the normal symbol display device 41 is performing variable display, the process proceeds to step S2109 to subtract the normal symbol display timer. Each time this process is performed, the count value of the normal map display timer is decremented by 1.

Subsequently, the process proceeds to step S2110, and it is determined whether or not the count value of the normal map display timer is "0", that is, whether or not the fluctuation time has elapsed. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2110, the normal map display flag is turned off in step S2111, and the normal figure stop display setting for displaying the stop on the normal symbol display device 41 is performed in step S2112. That is, when the ball entry support lottery is won (when the ball entry support flag is set to ON), both the left and right pair of normal symbol lamps of the normal symbol display device 41 are turned on, and when it is off, both are turned on. Turn on only the left side lamp.

Subsequently, the process proceeds to step S2113, and the normal map discrimination information setting process is performed. Here, the general map discrimination information setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 27.

First, in step S2401, it is determined whether or not the ball entry support flag is set to ON. If a negative determination is made in step S2401, the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2401, in step S2402, a normal variable flag for determining whether or not the second start winning device 33b is in the open state is set on.

In the following step S2403, it is determined whether or not either "12, 21" is stored in the mode storage area, that is, whether or not the ball is in a high ball entry state. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2403, in step S2404, the opening time of the second starting winning device 33b is set to 1 with respect to the normal variable timer for measuring the opening time (remaining time) of the second starting winning device 33b. Set "450" to 8 seconds.

Further, in step S2405, "3" is set to open the second start winning device 33b three times with respect to the opening number counter that counts the number of times (remaining number of times) the second start winning device 33b is opened. After step S2405, in step S2408, the ball entry support flag is turned off, and in step S2409, the flag is turned on during the support period. Further, in step S2410, the second start winning device 33b is set to be in the open state, and then this process is terminated.

Further, when a negative determination is made in step S2403, that is, when the ball is in a low ball entry state, in step S2406, the opening time of the second start winning device 33b is set to 0.4 seconds with respect to the normal variable timer. Set "100". Subsequently, in step S2407, "1" is set in order to open the second start winning device 33b once with respect to the opening number counter. After step S2407, in step S2408, the ball entry support flag is turned off, in step S2409, the flag is turned on during the support period, and in step S2410, the second start winning device 33b is set to be in the open state. This process ends.

Returning to the description of FIG. 25, after step S2113, in step S2114, a value corresponding to the normal figure interval period (for example, 1 second) is set for the normal figure interval timer, and then this process ends.

Further, when a negative determination is made in step S2110, in step S2115, a switching display setting for continuously performing the variable display of the normal symbol display device 41 (switching display in which a pair of left and right normal symbol lamps are alternately turned on). I do. In addition, based on the setting contents of the switching display setting, a control signal indicating that the switching display is performed is output to the normal symbol display device 41 in the external output processing in the next normal processing. As a result, the timing of the normal display control process, that is, the switching display (variable display) of the normal symbol display device 41 is realized every 4 ms. After step S2115, this process ends.

Next, the start winning device control process in step S208 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 28.

First, in step S2201, it is determined whether or not the flag is on during the support period. If a negative determination is made in step S2201, the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2201, the value of the normal variable timer is decremented by 1 in step S2202.

In the following step S2203, it is determined whether or not the value of the normally variable timer is "0". If a negative determination is made in step S2203, that is, if it is a period for maintaining the open / closed state of the second start winning device 33b, this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2203, it is determined in step S2204 whether or not the normally variable flag is on. When an affirmative determination is made in step S2204, that is, when the second start winning device 33b is currently in the open state and the timing for closing the second start winning device 33b has arrived, the normally variable flag is turned off in step S2205. In the following step S2206, the value of the open count counter is subtracted by 1, and in step S2207, the second start winning device 33b is set to be closed.

After that, in step S2208, it is determined whether or not the value of the opening count counter is "0". If an affirmative determination is made in step S2208, the flag is turned off during the support period in step S2209, and then this process ends.

On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S2208, that is, the winning ball support lottery is performed in the probability variation mode or the time reduction mode, and the second start winning device 33b is opened three times based on the winning ball support lottery. If there is a remaining number of times, a value corresponding to the interval time (for example, “250”) is set for the normally variable timer in step S2210, and then this process ends.

Further, when a negative determination is made in step S2204, that is, in the interval period between the second start winning device 33b being opened three times (the second starting winning device 33b is in the closed state), the timing at which the interval period is ended. Is arrived, the normal variable flag is turned on in step S2211, and the value corresponding to the opening time (in this example, in the high ball entry state; “450”) is set for the normal variable timer in step S2212. , Step S2213 sets the second start winning device 33b to be in the open state. After that, this process ends.

When the second start winning device 33b is in the open state and a specified number (for example, one) of game balls is entered into the second start winning device 33b, the second start winning device 33b May be configured to be immediately closed (for example, when a negative determination is made in step S2203, it is determined whether or not the second start winning switch 224b has been detected, and a positive determination is made. In some cases, it may be configured to move to step S2205).

Next, the payout control executed by the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311 will be described. For convenience of explanation, the reception interrupt process will be described first with reference to FIG. 31, and then the main process will be described with reference to FIG. 32.

FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing a reception interrupt process executed by the payout control device 311. The reception interrupt process is a process that is executed by interrupting when the payout control device 311 receives a command transmitted from the main control device 261. When the payout control device 311 confirms that the command transmitted from the main control device 261 has been received, the payout control device 311 temporarily waits for another process executed by the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311, and the receive interrupt process is executed.

When the receive interrupt process is executed, first, the command transmitted from the main control unit 261 in step S3001 is stored in the command buffer of the RAM 513, and in order to store the command transmitted from the main control unit 261 in step S3002. Turn on the command reception flag to end this reception interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is stored in the command buffer, the storage pointer is referenced and stored in a predetermined storage area, and the storage pointer is stored in order to store the next received command in the next storage area. Is updated.

In the present embodiment, the reception process of the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is performed by the interrupt process executed when the command is received. For example, it is shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, before the command determination process (step S3201) is performed, it is confirmed whether or not a command has been received, and if a command has been received, the command is stored in the command buffer of RAM 513. The command reception flag may be turned on, and if no command has been received, the process may be shifted to the command determination process. In such a case, it is confirmed whether or not the command has been received by checking the port corresponding to the command input of the input / output port at predetermined intervals.

Next, the main process of the payout control device 311 will be described with reference to FIG. 32. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the main process of the payout control device 311, and this main process is started by resetting when the power is turned on.

First of all, in step S3101, the initial setting process accompanying the power-on is executed. Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance is set in the stack pointer, and the interrupt mode is set. Then, in step S3103, RAM access is permitted, and in step S3104, the external interrupt vector is set.

After that, in step S3106, it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is set in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513. Then, if the power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 513a, the RAM determination value is calculated in step S3107, and in the subsequent step S3108, does the RAM determination value match the RAM determination value saved at the time of power-off? Whether or not, that is, the effectiveness of the backup is determined. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 513. It is also possible to judge the effectiveness of the backup based on whether or not the keywords written in the predetermined area of the RAM 513 are correctly saved.

If the power failure occurrence information is not set in step S3106, or if a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) in step S3108, the initialization process of RAM 513 after step S3115 is performed. Transition.

In step S3115, the entire area of RAM 513 is cleared to 0, and in step S3116, the initial value of RAM 513 is set. After that, in step S3117, the initial setting of the CPU peripheral device is performed, and the process proceeds to step S3114 to allow interrupts.

On the other hand, on the condition that the power failure occurrence information is set in step S3106 and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal in step S3108, the processing at the time of power restoration (at the time of power failure recovery). Process) is executed. That is, in step S3109, the stack pointer before the power is turned off is restored, in step S3110, the power cut occurrence information is cleared, and in step S3111, the payout permission flag that permits the payout of the prize ball is cleared. Further, in step S3112, the initial setting of the CPU peripheral device is performed, and in step S3113, the used register is restored from the backup area 513a of the RAM 513. Further, in step S3114, interrupts are permitted.

After the interrupt is enabled in step S3114, it is determined in the process of step S3122 whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is set in the backup area 513a. Here, if the power cutoff occurrence information is set, the power supply is cut off, so that the processes after step S3123 are performed as the power failure process when the power is turned off. In the power failure processing, first, the occurrence of each interrupt processing is prohibited in step S3123, and the command determination processing described later is executed in the next step S3124. After that, the contents of each register used by the CPU 511 are saved in the stack area in step S3125, the stack pointer value is stored in the backup area 513a in step S3126, the RAM determination value is calculated in step S3127, and the backup area 513a is calculated. The RAM access is prohibited in step S3128, and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 513.

In the process of step S3122, since the information on the occurrence of the power failure is confirmed after the process performed at the time of turning on the power is completed, the amount of data stored in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513 is larger than that in the case where each process is in the middle. It is less and can be easily memorized. Further, when returning to the state before the power is cut off, since the amount of data stored in the backup area 513a is small, it can be easily returned and the processing load of the payout control device 311 can be reduced. ..

Next, the timer interrupt processing of the payout control device 311 will be described with reference to FIG. 33. This timer interrupt process is started periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 2 msec).

In the timer interrupt processing, first, a command from the main control device 261 is acquired, and the determination processing of the command is performed (step S3201). This command determination process will be described below with reference to FIG. 34.

FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing a command determination process performed by the payout control device 311. In the command determination process (steps S3124 and S3201), first, it is determined whether or not the command reception flag is turned on in step S3301. The command reception flag is turned on when a command transmitted from the main control unit 261 is received in the above-mentioned reception interrupt processing (see FIG. 28).

If the command reception flag is determined to be off in step S3301, a new command has not been received from the main control device 261, and this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the command reception flag is determined to be on in step S3301, the received command is read from the RAM 513 in step S3302, and the command reception flag is turned off in step S3303. By turning off the command reception flag in step S3303, the processing of steps S3302 to S3311 can be skipped until a new command is received, so that the control of the payout control device 311 can be reduced.

The type of the command read from the RAM 513 in the processes of steps S3304 to S3306 is determined. In step S3304, it is determined whether or not the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is a payout initialization command, in step S3305 it is determined whether or not it is a payout return command, and in step S3306 it is a prize ball command. Whether or not it is determined.

If the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is a payout initialization command, it is determined in step S3307 whether or not the payout permission flag is already turned on, and if the payout permission flag is turned off, the main is turned on when the power is turned on. Since the control device 261 has instructed to initialize the RAM 513, the work area (area) other than the stack area of the RAM 513 is cleared to 0 in step S3308, and the initial value of the RAM 513 is set in step S3309. After that, the payout permission flag is turned on in step S3311, and the payout permission of the prize ball is set.

As described above, the main control device 261 performs the initialization process of the RAM 503 after transmitting the payout initialization command, and the payout control device 311 performs the initialization process of the RAM 513 after receiving the payout initialization command. Therefore, the timing at which the RAM 503 is initialized and the timing at which the RAM 513 is initialized are substantially the same. Therefore, even if the payout control device 311 receives the command transmitted from the main control device 261 due to the initialization timing being shifted, the RAM 513 is initialized and the control corresponding to the received command cannot be performed. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of harmful effects. Further, since the payout permission flag is turned on after the RAM 513 is initialized, the payout permission of the prize ball can be surely set.

On the other hand, if the payout permission flag is already turned on in step S3307, the command determination process ends without clearing the work area of the RAM 513 and initializing the RAM 513. That is, the process of step S3307 prohibits the RAM 513 from being initialized with the payout permission flag set. Since the payout initialization command is a command that is transmitted only when the RAM erase switch 323 is turned on when the power is turned on, it is not received with the payout permission flag turned on. It is conceivable that the payout control device 311 has recognized it as a payout initialization command due to the influence of noise or the like. Therefore, if the work area of the RAM 513 is cleared (step S3308) and the initial value of the RAM 513 is set (step S3309) while the payout permission flag is turned on, the prize balls will not be paid out if they remain. Although an adverse effect occurs and causes a loss to the player, since the RAM 513 is prevented from being initialized while the payout permission flag is turned on, it is possible to prevent the player from being inflicted with a loss.

If the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is a payout return command (step S3304: NO, step S3305: YES), the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 return to the state before the power was cut off. In step S3311, the payout permission flag is turned on to allow the payout of the prize ball. That is, when there is information on the occurrence of a power failure and the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 return to the state before the power cutoff, the payout of the prize ball is permitted. When the payout permission flag is turned on in the process of step S3311, the process based on the command stored in the predetermined storage area of the command buffer is completed, so that the read pointer is changed to the read pointer corresponding to the next storage area. Will be updated.

Further, if the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is a prize ball command (step S3305: NO, step S3306: YES), the number of prize balls received in step S3310 is added to the total number of prize balls and stored. , The payout permission flag is turned on in step S3311 to allow the payout of the prize ball. At this time, the payout control device 311 sequentially reads the prize ball commands stored in the command buffer (ring buffer), and adds the number of prize balls corresponding to the command to the total number of prize balls stored in the predetermined buffer area. And remember. Since the prize balls corresponding to the number of prize balls are paid out based on the prize ball command transmitted from the main control device 261, the prize ball command is a payout instruction command instructing the payout of the prize balls. .. Further, when the prize ball command is received, the payout permission is set immediately, so that the prize ball can be paid out at an early stage for winning. When the payout permission flag is turned on in the process of step S3311, the process based on the command stored in the predetermined storage area of the command buffer is completed, so that the read pointer is changed to the read pointer corresponding to the next storage area. Will be updated.

Note that the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is neither a payout initialization command (step S3304: NO), a payout return command (step S3305: NO), nor a prize ball command (step S3306: NO). The command judgment process ends without turning on the payout permission flag.

Here, the flow chart of FIG. 33 will be returned to the description. When the command determination process is completed, in step S3202, it is determined whether or not a CR unit connection signal indicating that the CR unit is electrically connected is received from the CR unit connection board 314. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3202, in step S3203, a CR unit connection signal indicating that the CR unit is electrically connected is transmitted to the launch control circuit 312 of the power supply / launch control device 310.

After step S3203 or when a negative determination is made in step S3202, it is determined in step S3204 whether or not the payout permission flag is turned on in the command determination process. Here, if the payout permission flag is not turned on, this process ends as it is. That is, it is possible to prevent the prize ball from being paid out before the command is transmitted from the main control device 261.

On the other hand, if affirmative determination is made in step S3204, the state return switch 321 is checked in step S3205, and when it is determined that the state return operation has started, the state return operation is executed. By this process, when the state return switch 321 is pressed when a payout error occurs, for example, the payout motor is clogged with balls, the payout motor is rotated in the forward and reverse directions, and the ball jam is cleared (return to the normal state). ..

After that, in step S3206, the lower plate full tank state or the lower plate full tank release state is set according to the change in the state of the lower plate 15. That is, the full state of the lower plate 15 is determined by the detection signal of the full detection switch, the lower plate is full, the lower plate is full, and the lower plate is not full. Execute the setting of the dish full tank release state. Further, in step S3207, the setting of the tank ball-less state (ball out state) or the tank ball-less release state (ball presence state) is executed according to the change in the state of the tank ball. That is, the state without a tank ball is determined by the detection signal of the switch without a tank ball, and the setting of the state without a tank ball and the state without a tank ball is executed. Perform the settings.

After that, in step S3208, it is determined whether or not there is a state to be notified, such as an error state, and if there is a state to be notified, the notification is made.

Subsequently, the payout control process of the prize ball and the rental ball is executed. Specifically, the payout number setting process is performed in step S3209, the motor control state acquisition process is performed in step S3210, and the motor drive process is performed in step S3211.

In step S3212, the payout motor is driven to execute the ball removal process on the condition that the state return switch 321 is checked and the ball removal operation is not started and the ball removal operation is not started. In the following step S3213, the control of the vibrator 360 (vibe motor control) is executed on condition that the ball is in a jammed state. After that, the process returns to the beginning of this timer interrupt process.

Next, the normal processing of the sub-control device 262 will be described with reference to FIG. 35. First, in step S3901, the port corresponding to the command input of the input / output port 554 is confirmed, and it is determined whether or not the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is received.

If a command has been received, the command is stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553 in step S3902. The command buffer of the RAM 553 is composed of a ring buffer that temporarily stores commands transmitted from the main control device 261. The ring buffer has a predetermined storage area, commands are stored with regularity from the start to the end of the storage area, and when commands are stored in all the storage areas, the start of the storage area is used. The return command is configured to be updated. Therefore, when the command is stored and when the command is read, the storage pointer and the read pointer in the command buffer are updated, and the command is stored and read based on the respective pointers.

In the following step S3903, the hold information storage process for storing the information of the starting command output from the main control device 261 in the hold information storage area provided in the RAM 553 of the sub control device 262 is performed. In addition, as described above, the starting command includes information indicating which of the first start winning device 33a and the second starting winning device 33b is the variable display triggered by the entry of the ball, and the variation information corresponding to the jackpot. Information indicating the presence, information indicating the jackpot type, information indicating the type of reach, etc. are included.

The hold information storage area of the sub control device 262 is a first hold information storage area having four hold areas (hold first to hold fourth areas) and a first hold information storage area, respectively, like the special variable hold area of the main control device 261. It has a second reserved information storage area and one execution area. In the first hold information storage area, information on whether or not a jackpot is made, a jackpot type, a reach pattern, according to the reception history of the starting command based on the first fluctuation display (information stored in the first special fluctuation hold area). In addition, information (variation information) related to fluctuation display such as fluctuation time is stored in chronological order. Further, in the second hold information storage area, change information is stored in time series according to the reception history of the starting command based on the second change display (information stored in the second special change hold area). By adopting this configuration, the fluctuation information regarding the first variation display triggered by the entry into the first start winning device 33a and the second variation display triggered by the entry into the second start winning device 33b. It is possible to hold and store four variable information about each. As a result, the sub control device 262 can grasp the fluctuation information (holding information) of the special fluctuation holding area of the main control device 261. The four hold areas provided in the first and second hold information storage areas are assigned hold area numbers such as the first hold area to the fourth hold area, and are newly stored. The fluctuation information (holding information) is stored in the holding area having the smaller holding area number among the holding areas in which the fluctuation information is not stored.

Here, the hold information storage process will be described with reference to FIG. 38. First, in step S4101, it is determined whether or not the starting command has been received (whether or not the starting command has been stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553). If a negative determination is made in step S4101, this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4101, is the starting command corresponding to the entry into the second start winning device 33b (variation information stored in the second special fluctuation holding area) in step S4102? Determine if not. If a negative determination is made here, that is, if the starting command corresponds to the entry of the first start winning device 33a (variation information stored in the first special fluctuation holding area), in step S4103. , The first variable hold counter Nd, which counts the number of hold of variable information held and stored in the first hold information storage area, is incremented by one.

In the following step S4104, the information on whether or not the starting command is a jackpot, the information on the jackpot type, the information on the reach pattern, the fluctuation time information, and the like are first among the vacant hold areas in the first hold information storage area. Store in the area (holding area with a small holding area number).

Further, in the following step S4105, the advance notice information storage process is performed. That is, in the present embodiment, there is a case where the effect displays related to each other are intentionally derived (so-called "continuous notice" is performed) in a plurality of continuous variable displays. Here, the value of the continuous notice counter for determining whether or not to perform continuous notice and the value of the notice type counter for determining the type of continuous notice are acquired, and the counter value is stored in the first hold information storage. Of the areas, the fluctuation information is stored in the newly stored holding area in step S4104.

The continuous advance notice counter is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 49, reaches the upper limit value (that is, 49), and then returns to 0, which is the lower limit value. The continuous advance notice counter is updated periodically, and the value of the continuous advance notice counter is stored in the corresponding counter buffer (continuous advance notice counter buffer) each time.

The notice type counter is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 9, reaches the upper limit value (that is, 9), and then returns to the lower limit value of 0. The notice type counter is updated periodically, and the value of the notice type counter is stored in the corresponding counter buffer (notice type counter buffer) each time.

Then, in the advance notice information storage process, when the fluctuation information is stored in the hold information storage area, the value of the continuous advance notice counter and the value of the advance notice type counter stored in the continuous advance notice counter buffer and the advance notice type counter buffer are acquired. The Rukoto. Further, each of the hold area and the execution area of the hold information storage area is provided with a continuous notice flag that is turned on when it is determined that the continuous notice is to be derived.

Further, in the present embodiment, the ROM 552 is provided with a notice adequacy determination table that is taken into consideration when deciding whether or not to give a continuous notice, and a notice table that is taken into consideration when deciding the mode of the continuous notice. A plurality of advance notice pass / fail judgment tables and notice tables are provided, and the advance notice pass / fail judgment table and the notice table to be taken into consideration are selected according to the fluctuation information.

After step S4105, in step S4106, a continuous notice lottery process for determining whether or not to execute the continuous notice is performed. In the continuous notice lottery process of step S4106, it is confirmed whether or not there is a hold area for which the continuous notice flag is already set to ON. Therefore, when the existence of the hold area for which the continuous notice flag is set is not confirmed, and further, when only the fluctuation information corresponding to the complete deviation (the deviation where the reach state does not occur) is stored in the first reservation area. , The lottery for continuous notice is to be held. On the other hand, when the existence of the holding area for which the continuous notice flag is set is confirmed, the lottery for continuous notice is not performed.

In the continuous advance notice lottery process in step S4106, when the value of the first variable hold counter Nd is "2" or more, based on the value of the continuous notice counter newly stored in the first hold information storage area, Refer to the notice winning / failing judgment table corresponding to each jackpot type, reach pattern, and game mode (the one corresponding to the jackpot is easier to win than the one corresponding to the loss), and decide whether or not to execute the continuous notice. .. Further, when it is decided to execute the continuous notice, the notice table corresponding to the jackpot type, the reach pattern, and the game mode is based on the value of the notice type counter newly stored in the first reserved information storage area. Refer to and decide whether or not to execute the continuous notice. In addition, the continuous notice flag of all the holding areas in which the fluctuation information is stored among the holding areas of the first holding information storage area is turned on. However, the continuous notice flag of the execution area is not turned on.

After step S4106, in step S4107, a hold icon setting process for additionally displaying one hold icon 461 indicating that the variable display is held and stored in the decorative symbol display device 42 is performed.

As shown in FIG. 41, a hold icon 461 imitating a "buoy" is displayed in the hold display area 462 provided at the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 42. The hold display area 462 of the present embodiment is an execution support area 462a corresponding to the execution area of the hold information storage area and a hold support area corresponding to the hold areas of the hold information storage areas (first and second hold information storage areas). It is equipped with 462b. However, in the present embodiment, the first variation display and the second variation display can be stored in a total of eight, four each, whereas the hold display area 462 of the hold display area 462 can be held first. Maximum variation display in order of digestion (the hold icon 461 on the left corresponds to the variable display that is digested first, and the hold icon 462 on the far left corresponds to the running variable display) Up to 4 can be displayed.

Further, the hold icon 461 may be derived in a mode suggesting a jackpot expectation of the corresponding variable display (for example, a mode in which the character uses a "buoy"). Further, the pattern of the hold icon 461 may change (the hold change effect is derived) until the variation display corresponding to the hold icon 461 is digested. After step S4107, this process ends.

Further, when an affirmative determination is made in step S4102, that is, when the starting command corresponds to a ball entering the second start winning device 33b (variation information stored in the second special fluctuation holding area). , Step S4108, the second fluctuation hold counter Ne, which counts the number of holdings of the fluctuation information held and stored in the second holding information storage area, is incremented by 1.

After that, in step S4109, the information on whether or not the jackpot is included in the starting command, the information on the jackpot type, the information on the reach pattern, the information on the fluctuation time, etc. Store in the area. In the following step S4110, the value of the continuous notice counter and the value of the notice type counter are acquired, and the counter value is stored in the hold area in which the fluctuation information is newly stored in the step S4109 of the second hold information storage area.

After step S4110, in step S4111, a continuous notice lottery process for determining whether or not to execute the continuous notice is performed. In the continuous notice lottery process in step S4111, it is confirmed whether or not there is a hold area for which the continuous notice flag is already set to ON. When the existence is confirmed there, the lottery for continuous notice is not performed, and it is determined whether or not the hold area for which the continuous notice flag is turned on is the first hold area. When it is determined that the area is the first hold area, the continuous notice flag of the first hold area is turned off, and the display mode of the final continuous notice is derived to the second hold area where the new fluctuation information is held and stored. Set the flag to make it. That is, if the second variable display is suspended while the continuous notice is being given for the first variable display, the continuous notice effect of the first variable display will be interrupted by the second variable display. , In the second variable display, a display mode for ending the continuous advance notice effect is derived.

On the other hand, when the existence of the hold area for which the continuous notice flag is set is not confirmed, and further, only the fluctuation information corresponding to the complete deviation (the deviation where the reach state does not occur) is stored in the second reservation area. If there is, a lottery for continuous notice will be held. The continuous advance notice lottery process in step S4111 only corresponds to the continuous advance notice lottery process in step S4106 corresponding to the entry of the ball into the second start winning device 33b, and the description thereof will be omitted.

After step S4111, in step S4112, the hold icon setting process is performed, and then this process ends.

Returning to the description of FIG. 35, after step S3903 or when a negative determination is made in step S3901, the process proceeds to step S3904, and whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process has been reached, that is, whether or not the previous normal process has been executed. It is determined whether or not a predetermined time (2 msec in this example) has elapsed from the start of. Then, if the predetermined time has already passed, the process proceeds to step S3905, while if the predetermined time has not yet passed since the start of the previous normal processing, the process proceeds to step S3913.

In step S3905, various counter update processes are executed. The CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 uses various counter information when displaying the decorative symbol. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 36, the upper, middle, and lower symbols used for setting the decorative symbol counter CO at the time of jackpot and the outlier symbols of the upper symbol display area, the middle symbol display area, and the lower symbol display area. Each symbol counter CL, CM, CR is used. The symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are configured such that register values are added using the R register (refresh register) in the CPU 551, and as a result, the numerical values change randomly.

The jackpot decorative symbol counter CO determines the symbol (big hit symbol) when the decorative symbol display device 42 stops fluctuating when the jackpot state occurs, and in the present embodiment, it is used as the jackpot decorative symbol counter CO. Is prepared with 9 (0 to 8) counter values. That is, the decorative symbol counter CO at the time of jackpot is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 8, and returns to 0 after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 8).

Then, when a variation pattern command corresponding to the probability variation jackpot is received from the main control device 261, for example, if the counter value is 0, it is "1" based on a table (a table that associates the counter value with the decorative symbol) that is not shown. The combination of jackpot symbols is determined, such as (doublet) and 1 if it is "2" (doublet). The jackpot decorative symbol counter CO is periodically updated in the counter update process of step S3906, and is read from the counter buffer of the RAM 553 at the timing when the sub control device 262 receives the fluctuation pattern command, as will be described later. In the present embodiment, the jackpot decorative symbol counter CO is stored in the jackpot decorative symbol counter buffer of the RAM 553, but it is not stored in the buffer and the counter value is referred to at the timing when the variation pattern command is received. You may do so.

Further, when a fluctuation pattern command corresponding to a normal jackpot is received, for example, if the counter value is 0 or 1, it is "2" (doublet), and if it is 2-4, it is "4" (doublet). The combination of jackpot symbols is determined, such as "6" (doublet) for 5 and 6, and "8" (doublet) for 7 and 8.

The upper, middle, and lower symbol counters CL, CM, and CR determine the combination of each stop symbol in the upper, middle, and lower symbol display areas when the winning / failing lottery is missed, and each column. Since any of the nine decorative symbols is displayed in, nine (0 to 8) counter values are prepared for each. The upper symbol counter CL determines the stop symbol in the upper symbol display area, the middle symbol counter CM determines the stop symbol in the middle symbol display area, and the lower symbol counter CR determines the stop symbol in the lower symbol display area.

In this embodiment, the values of the counters CL, CM, and CR are randomly updated by using the numerical value of the R register built in the CPU 551. That is, when each symbol counter CL, CM, and CR is updated, the value of the lower 3 bits of the R register is added to the previous value, and when the addition result exceeds the upper limit value, 8 is subtracted to determine the current value. .. The symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are updated so that the update times do not overlap, and the combination of the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is the front-rear reach symbol buffer of the RAM 553, the reach symbol buffer other than the front-rear, and the complete detachment. It is stored in one of the symbol buffers.

Here, the update processing of each symbol counter CL, CM, and CR will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 37, in step S4001, it is determined whether or not it is the update time of the upper symbol counter CL, and in step S4002, it is determined whether or not it is the update time of the middle symbol counter CM. The upper, middle, and lower symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are configured to be updated one by one in one update process. Therefore, if the lower symbol counter CR has been updated in the previous update process, a positive judgment is made in step S4001. Further, when the upper symbol counter CL is updated in the previous update process, an affirmative judgment is made in step S4002. Then, if the update time of the upper symbol counter CL (YES in step S4001), the process proceeds to step S4003 to update the upper symbol counter CL. If the update time of the middle symbol counter CM (YES in step S4002), the process proceeds to step S4004 to update the middle symbol counter CM. Further, if it is time to update the lower symbol counter CR (both steps S4001 and S4002 are NO), the process proceeds to step S4005 to update the lower symbol counter CR. In the update of the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR in steps S4003 to S4005, the value of the lower 3 bits of the R register is added to the previous counter value, and 8 is subtracted when the addition result exceeds the upper limit value. The calculation result is used as the current value of the outlier symbol counters CL, CM, and CR.

According to the above CL, CM, CR update process, the upper, middle, and lower symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are updated one by one in one update process, and the update times of the counter values overlap. There is no. As a result, one set of symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is updated every time the update process is executed three times.

After that, in step S4006, it is determined whether or not the combination of the updated symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is a combination of reach symbols (the symbol in the upper symbol display area and the symbol in the lower symbol display area are the same). , In the case of a combination of reach symbols (YES in S4006), in step S4007, it is determined whether or not the combination of jackpot symbols (the symbols in the left and right symbol display areas and the symbols in the middle symbol display area are the same). .. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4007, the present process is terminated as it is without storing the combination of the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR in the RAM 553.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S4007, it is determined in step S4008 whether or not the combination of the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is a combination of front-back and out-of-bounds symbols. When the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are a combination of front-rear and front-rear symbols (front-rear and front-reach) (YES in S4008), the process proceeds to step S4009, and the combination of the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR at that time is the front-rear and front-reach reach of the RAM 553. Store in the symbol buffer and end this process. If the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are a combination of symbols other than the front and rear disengagement (reach other than the front and rear disengagement) (NO in S4008), the process proceeds to step S4010, and the combination of the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR at that time is used as the RAM 553. Stores in the reach symbol buffer except for the front and back deviations of, and ends this process.

Further, when the combination is other than the reach symbol (S4006 is NO), the combination of the off symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is the combination of the off symbols (completely off symbols). The combination of the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is stored in the completely off symbol buffer of the RAM 553, and this process is terminated.

Returning to the description of FIG. 35, the hold process is performed in step S3906. Hereinafter, the hold process will be described with reference to FIG. 39.

First, in step S4201, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern command has been received (whether or not the variation pattern command is stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553). If an affirmative determination is made in step S4201, it is determined in step S4202 whether or not the value of the second fluctuation hold counter Ne is larger than "0". If a negative determination is made in step S4202, that is, if the fluctuation information of the second fluctuation display is not stored on hold, the process proceeds to step S4203, and the value of the first fluctuation hold counter Nd is subtracted by 1.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the second variation display is preferentially digested over the first variation display, and when the second variation display is reserved and stored, the first variation display is digested. There is nothing. That is, when the variation information of the second variation display is reserved and stored in the second reserved information storage area, the variation pattern command corresponding to the first variation display is not sent. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in step S4202, by determining whether or not the value of the second fluctuation hold counter Ne is larger than "0", the fluctuation pattern command displays the first fluctuation and the second fluctuation. Which of the fluctuation information is possessed is determined. Of course, the fluctuation pattern command is provided with information on which of the fluctuation information of the first fluctuation display and the second fluctuation display is supported, and the fluctuation pattern command is based on the fluctuation pattern command and the first fluctuation display and the second fluctuation display. It may be determined which fluctuation information of the second fluctuation display is possessed.

After step S4203, in step S4204, a process of shifting the data stored in the first reserved information storage area is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data (including the continuous notice flag) stored in the hold 1st to 4th areas of the 1st hold information storage area to the execution area side, and is the hold 1st area. → Execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on, the data in each area is shifted. After step S4204, the process proceeds to step S4207.

Further, when the affirmative determination is made in step S4202, that is, when even one fluctuation information of the second fluctuation display is reserved and stored, the value of the second fluctuation holding counter Ne is subtracted by 1 in step S4205.

In the following step S4206, a process of shifting the data stored in the second reserved information storage area is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the hold 1st to 4th areas of the 2nd hold information storage area to the execution area side, and is a process of shifting the hold 1st area → the execution area and the hold 2nd. The data in each area is shifted in the order of area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area. After step S4206, the process proceeds to step S4207. In the present embodiment, the reserved information storage area has only one execution area, and the data stored in the first reserved information storage area and the second reserved information storage area are displayed in a variable manner corresponding to the data. When it is done, it will be shifted to a common execution area.

In step S4207, a notice setting process for determining the type of display effect used for continuous notice is performed. In the notice setting process of step S4207, it is determined whether or not the continuous notice flag (see the continuous notice lottery process of step S4106) of the execution area of the hold information storage area is on, and if negative, the continuous notice is determined. Is not performed, so this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if affirmative judgment is made, based on the fluctuation information of the fluctuation pattern command, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit, what kind is it if it is a big hit, and what is the reach pattern if it is not a big hit. , Refer to the corresponding table to determine the type of continuous notice. The continuous notice of the type determined here will be derived at the desired timing at the time of the corresponding fluctuation display.

After step S4207, in step S4208, a hold icon shift process for shifting the hold icon 461 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 is performed. A hold icon storage area for storing the type of the hold icon 461 is provided in each hold area and the execution area of the hold information storage area, and the above-mentioned hold information storage is also provided for the information related to the hold icon 461. It is designed to be shifted by the area data shift processing.

The hold icon shift process is a process for redrawing the hold icon 461 in response to such a data shift, and in the decorative symbol display device 42, the most variable display is digested (executed) each time. The hold icon 461 located on the left is deleted, and the hold icon 461 placed on the right side is shifted to the left (display location moves). After step S4208, this process ends.

Returning to the description of FIG. 35, the display setting process is performed in step S3908. Here, based on the information stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553, various arithmetic processes such as generating a display command to be output to the display control device 45 and command output setting are performed. That is, here, the display mode to be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 is determined. For example, when a fluctuation pattern command is received, the sub-control device 262 determines the game state (game mode), the fluctuation type (the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot, the reach pattern in the case of a miss), the fluctuation time, and the like. Based on this, the corresponding table is referred to, and the symbol configuration of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the effect pattern of the effect display performed together with the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the like are determined. Then, control such as outputting the determined item to the display control device 45 as a display command is performed.

The display control device 45 performs drawing processing in response to a command from the sub control device 262, and starts variable display of the decorative symbol on the decorative symbol display device 42. Further, once the fluctuation pattern command is received from the main control device 261, the symbol is designed in cooperation with the sub control device 262 and the display control device 45 until the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern elapses. The variable display of is continued.

Further, when starting the fluctuation display, when the continuous notice flag of the execution area of the hold information storage area (see the continuous notice lottery process in step S4106) is on, each situation is based on the fluctuation information of the fluctuation pattern command. With reference to the table corresponding to, the type of continuous advance notice to be derived to the variable display is determined, the derivation of the advance notice effect different from the continuous advance notice is determined, and the display corresponding to the operation of the effect button 125 or the like is performed. Or something. Further, in the display setting process of step S3908, a process of performing effect control during a big hit (hit display process) is also performed.

Here, the hit display process performed in the display setting process of step S3907 will be described with reference to FIG. 40.

First, in step S4701, it is determined whether or not an opening command indicating the start of the jackpot state has been received from the main control device 261. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4701, in step S4702, the sub-side jackpot middle flag for confirming that the sub-control device 262 is in the jackpot state is set on. After step S4702, in step S4703, for the round grasping counter for grasping the number of remaining rounds, "13" is set if it is "13RS" based on the information included in the opening command, and "8RS" is set. , If it is "8RN", set "8".

After that, in step S4704, based on the information included in the opening command, a scenario of the effect by the decorative symbol display device 42 or the voice output device (speaker SP or the like) in the jackpot state is set. That is, it is a setting of which effect is to be executed corresponding to which round, and the display control device 45 sequentially generates the effect display based on such a scenario. For example, in response to the second round of "13RS-1", the thirteenth round of "13RS-2,3", and the eighth round of "8RS-1,2", the second variable winning device 32b is used. If the game ball can be aimed and fired and the game ball can be entered into the second special entry unit 145b, an effect (probability variation effect) for telling that the probability variation mode is given is derived. Regarding the first round of "8RN-1" to "8RN-4", "8RS", and "13RS-1,2", the first variable winning device 32a opened a short for 1.8 seconds. At that time, if the game ball is inserted into the first variable winning device 32a and the game ball is inserted into the first special entry unit 145a three times or more, the probability variation mode is given. (V winning challenge production) will be derived. In "13RS-1,2", the short opening is one round, while in "8RS" and "8RN", the short opening is not only one round, but the interval following it and the long opening for 28 seconds. Although it is one round including the above, the same aspect will be derived as the production.

After step S4704, in step S4705, the opening effect for 8 seconds is set (the image of the decorative symbol display device 42, the sound of the speaker SP, and the setting of the lighting mode of various lamps). After that, this process ends.

If a negative determination is made in step S4701, it is determined in step S4706 whether or not the sub-side jackpot state flag is set to ON. If a negative determination is made in step S4806, this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4706, it is determined in step S4707 whether or not a round command has been received. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4707, the round effect of the round corresponding to the value of the round grasp counter is set in step S4708. In the display control device 45, the effect display corresponding to the scenario is derived with the setting (command output by) as an opportunity. It also displays the current number of rounds. After step S4708, this process ends.

If a negative determination is made in step S4707, it is determined in step S4709 whether or not an interval command has been received. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4709, the value of the round grasp counter is subtracted by "1" in step S4710. Subsequently, in step S4711, it is determined whether or not the final round is completed (whether or not the value of the round grasp counter is "0").

If a negative determination is made in step S4711, in step S4712, the interval effect of the interval corresponding to the value of the round grasp counter is set, and this process ends. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4711, the ending effect is set in step S4713, and this process ends. In addition, in the setting of the interval effect regarding the interval immediately before the first variable winning device 32a is short-opened, a display effect indicating that the game ball is launched aiming at the first variable winning device 32a is derived. In this example, the function of deriving such a display effect constitutes the notification means.

If a negative determination is made in step S4709, it is determined in step S4714 whether or not a hit end command has been received. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4714, the sub-side jackpot middle flag is set to off in step S4715. After that, in step S4716, the sub-side first special entry counter, the sub-side second special entry flag, and the payout display counter, which will be described in detail later, are reset to end this process.

In the present embodiment, an interval period following the final round is provided, and the interval period to the ending effect is started. Therefore, although not shown, the sub-control device 262 is configured to confirm the synchronization of the timing of the ending effect when the ending command is received, and to synchronize the timing when the ending command is deviated. , It is also possible to omit the ending command. Alternatively, the interval period after the final round may be omitted, and the ending effect may be started when the ending command is received.

If a negative determination is made in step S4714, it is determined in step S4717 whether or not the first special ball entry command (see the first remaining ball monitoring process in FIG. 29) has been received. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4717, in step S4718, the sub control device 262 counts the number of game balls entering the first special entry unit 145a on the sub side as a sub-side arrival counting means. Add "1" to the value of the first special ball entry counter.

Further, in step S4719, the first special ball entry display 463 (see FIG. 42) corresponding to the game ball entering the first special ball entry unit 145a is derived. Here, the mode of the first special ball entry display 463 changes according to the value of the sub-side first special ball entry counter (the value "2" is more flashy than "1", and "2". "3" is more flashy than "3", and especially in the case of "3", the assignment of the probability variation mode is taught). However, when the value of the sub-side first special entry counter is "4" or more, the first special entry display 463 is not performed (the game ball that continues to be displayed from the third first special entry display 463 is the first. The mode indicating that the ball has entered the special ball entry unit 145a three times is continuously displayed).

In addition, in the present embodiment, in a jackpot state other than "13RS-1" and "8RN-5", until the game ball enters the first special ball entry portion 145a three times by the decorative symbol display device 42. A residual information display 464 (see FIG. 42) indicating the remaining number of times is derived. For example, in the decorative symbol display device 42 of the first round, if three keys are found, the probability variation mode is acquired, and in order to find the keys, a game is played when the first variable winning device 32a is short-opened. A guidance display is derived to inform that the ball is to be entered into the first variable winning device 32a, and a residual information display 464 imitating the three key marks is displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 42 (unacquired is outlined). , Colored after acquisition). Then, when the game ball enters the first special ball entry unit 145a, the decorative symbol display device 42 derives the display in which the character has found the key as the first special ball entry display 463, and serves as the residual information display 464. Takes the mode in which the found key is increased by one, and continuously displays it. The remaining information display 464 only needs to be able to grasp how many times the game ball enters the first special ball entry unit 145a to give the probability variation mode, and the game ball is the first special ball. The number of balls entered into the ball entry unit 145a may be displayed as the remaining information display 464 (it is more desirable that the probability variation mode is given three times).

In addition, in "13RS-1" and "8RN-5", a unique jackpot effect is derived. In particular, in "8RN-5", the remaining information display 464 is not derived, but like the other "8RN" jackpots, the first special is due to the game ball entering when the first variable winning device 32a is short-opened. It is possible to enter the ball entry unit 145a, and the probability variation mode is given by entering the ball three times. However, the teaching that the game ball has entered the first special ball entry section 145a three times is performed by the judge effect derived in the seventh round, and when the short opening in the seventh round reaches three times. Is derived as a reversal effect in the 8th round.

Further, in the short opening of "13RS" and "8RS" of the present embodiment, the first sorting device 149a is not opened, and therefore, even if the game ball is inserted into the first variable winning device 32a, the first special The ball does not enter the ball entry portion 145a (instead, the second variable winning device 32b is opened for a long time in the final round). Here, in the present embodiment, the first non-special ball entry detection switch 222a is detected at the time of short-opening of "13RS" and "8RS", and the sub-side first special ball entry counter ( If the value of (a separate counter may be provided) is "0,1", and the fake effect lottery is performed and the player wins, the fake first special entry display is derived and the sub-side first. The special ball entry counter may be added by 1. However, even if the first non-special entry detection switch 222a is detected when the "13RS" and "8RS" are short-opened, the sub-side first special entry counter (a separate counter is provided). If the value of (may be good) is "2", the fake production lottery will not be performed.

After step S4719 or when a negative determination is made in step S4717, it is determined in step S4720 whether or not a second special ball entry command (see the second remaining ball monitoring process in FIG. 30) has been received. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4720, in step S4721, the sub control device 262 turns on the sub-side second special ball entry flag for storing the ball entry of the game ball into the second special ball entry unit 145b. Set. In the following step S4722, the second special ball entry display is derived, which teaches that the game ball has entered the second special ball entry unit 145b, that is, the probability variation mode is given. When the second special entry display is derived, the remaining information display is deleted.

After step S4722, or when a negative determination is made in step S4720, it is determined in step S4723 whether or not the first ball entry count command (see the first remaining ball monitoring process in FIG. 29) has been received. If a negative determination is made in step S4723, it is determined in step S4724 whether or not a second ball entry count command (see the second remaining ball monitoring process in FIG. 30) has been received. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4723 or step S4724, in step S4725, the value of the payout display counter for counting the number of game balls given to the player in a predetermined period is added by "15".

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 42, the number of game balls given to the player in the jackpot state, the subsequent probability variation mode, and the normal game state in the time reduction mode is the value of the payout display counter. Is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 (the number of acquired balls display 465 is derived). Further, in the number of acquired balls display 465, not only the game value (game ball) given based on the entry into the variable winning devices 32a and 32b, but also the entry into the starting winning devices 33a and 33b and the general winning opening 31. The number of game values granted based on is also included. Further, although the description is omitted in this example, in the decorative symbol display device 42, the number of balls entered into the first variable winning device 32a and the second variable winning device 32b in each round of the jackpot state is displayed. When the first specific ball entry count switch 226a and the second specific ball entry count switch 226b are entered into the detected number of times, a command corresponding to the sub control device 262 is issued from the main control device 261. When it is output and such a command is input, the display of the number of balls entered is increased (or the upper limit of winning one round is displayed at the start of the round and subtracted by the count of the specific entry count switches 226a and 226b. It may be configured as such.

Returning to the description of FIG. 35, in step S3908, the fluctuation stop processing related to the stop of the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol display device 42 is executed. Here, when a stop command (see step S821 of the special display control process) is received, a process of stopping and displaying the variation display in the decorative symbol display device 42 is performed. Further, when the support end command (see step S1016 of the discrimination information setting process) is received, the effect stage displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 is changed from the "pull-back stage" to the "normal stage". I do.

In the lamp setting process of step S3909, the lighting pattern of the lamp / illumination is set in order to synchronize with the display effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 42.

In the voice setting process of step S3910, the output pattern of the speaker SP is set in order to synchronize with the display effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 42. Further, when commands related to voice such as notification of error occurrence are transmitted from the main control device 261, settings for performing these controls are also made in step S3911.

In step S3911, other processing such as control setting of the customer waiting effect is performed. That is, it is configured to shift to the customer gathering mode or the energy saving mode when the player is not playing for a specified time, and the decorative symbol display device 42 does not display the decorative symbol as a customer waiting effect (instead). A series of moving images are displayed, or a still image is displayed), and a demo screen display such as a dark screen is derived.

In step S3912, an external output process for transmitting a control signal based on the settings of steps S3906 to S3913 to each device is executed. For example, a display command is transmitted to the display control device 45 when the decorative symbol display device 42 displays the variation of the decorative symbol.

After the processing of steps S3905 to S3912 performed every 2 msec is executed, or when a negative determination is made in step S3904, the process proceeds to step S3913, and whether or not the power off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 553. To determine. The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 261.

If the power failure occurrence information is not stored, the process proceeds to step S3914, and it is determined whether or not the RAM 553 is destroyed. If the RAM 553 is not destroyed here, the process returns to the process of step S3901 and the normal process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 553 is destroyed, the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of the subsequent processing.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3913 that the power-off occurrence information is stored, the power-off process is executed in step S3915. In the power off processing, the occurrence of interrupt processing is prohibited and each output port is turned off. In addition, the memory of the information on the occurrence of the power failure is also deleted. After executing the power off processing, the processing loops infinitely.

As described in detail above, according to the first embodiment, the game ball is placed in a special area (first special entry ball) in a specific period (from the start of the first round of the jackpot state, particularly from the start of the first round to the end of the final round). By reaching the part 145a) multiple times (three times of ball entry), the privilege (probability change mode) can be obtained, and the player operates to approach the privilege grant (and gradually approach the privilege grant). It is possible to give the playability of (Iku). Therefore, it is possible to enjoy the game with more emotional feeling, such as a higher feeling of exhilaration when the privilege is given closer to the stage. In addition, if the number of game balls that have reached the special area in a specific period is less than the specified number of times, the privilege will not be given, so the time zone when the player can get an uplifting feeling and the opportunity to perform the production. It is possible to improve the playability as well as increase the number of players. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest.

Further, in the present embodiment, the arrival detection means (first special entry) is performed in a state other than the state in which the first remaining ball monitoring flag in the jackpot state or the second remaining ball monitoring flag is turned on (basically, the round period). When the ball detection switch 223a and the second special ball entry detection switch 223b) are detected, error processing is executed (see step S1317 in FIG. 29 and step S1518 in FIG. 30). ). Therefore, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts such as obtaining a privilege (probability change mode) by causing the arrival detection means to erroneously detect a game ball other than the state in which the game ball can exist in the specific areas 141a and 141b, such as during the round period. In the present embodiment, the function of the main control device 261 that performs error processing constitutes the error processing means.

Further, on the sub control device 262 side as well, a sub side first special ball entry counter (arrival counting means) for grasping the number of times the game ball has entered the first special ball entry unit 145a is provided from the main control device 261. When the first special ball entry command indicating the ball entry of the game ball into the first special ball entry section 145a is received, the value of the sub-side first special ball entry counter is added by "1" (Fig.). See step S4717 in step 40). In addition, when the sub control device 262 receives the first special ball entry command, the sub control device 262 decorates the first special ball entry display 463 (see FIG. 42) indicating that the game ball has entered the first special ball entry unit 145a. The symbol display device 42 performs a process for deriving. Here, regarding the first special entry counter 463, the mode corresponds to the value of the sub-side first special entry counter, and the value of the sub-side first special entry counter is “1” → “2” → “3”. ", And when it is" 3, "the addition of the probability variation mode is taught (there is no first special entry display 463 after" 4 ").

In addition to setting the first special ball entry display 463, the decorative symbol display device 42 displays the remaining information display 464 (see FIG. 42) indicating the number of remaining times until the game ball enters the first special ball entry section 145a three times. The setting for deriving is made in.

In this way, it is possible to grasp the current situation regarding the addition of the probability variation mode based on the remaining information display 464, and it is possible to further increase the interest in the game in the jackpot state, such as proceeding with the game while holding the ideal from the current situation. .. In addition, every time a game ball enters the first special ball entry unit 145a (detection of the first special ball entry detection switch 223a), a decorative symbol display suitable for the value of the sub-side first special ball entry counter is displayed. By making it possible to derive it with the device 42, the action and effect of increasing the production opportunity and improving the interest can be more reliably achieved.

The function of deriving the first special entry display 463 constitutes the effect means. Further, the residual information display 464 corresponds to the residual information, and the function of deriving the residual information display 464 constitutes the residual information teaching means.

Further, in the above embodiment, regarding the jackpot state of "8RN" in which the game ball is entered into the first special ball entry portion 145a three times, the remaining information is obtained for "8RN-1" to "8RN-4". While the display 464 is derived, the residual information display 464 is not derived for "8RN-5". For this reason, there are cases where the jackpot state is advanced while confirming that the remaining number of times until the game ball is entered into the first special entry portion 145a three times (remaining information) is gradually reduced (remaining information), and cases where the first special entry portion 145a is used. It is possible to provide a case where the jackpot state is advanced without knowing how many times the game ball is left until the game ball is inserted three times, and the game playability can be diversified. That is, when the remaining information is taught (remaining information display 464), the success of the predetermined mission approaches as the game ball enters the first special ball entry unit 145a three times. When the derivation is performed and the remaining information display 464 is not performed, it is possible to diversify the effect, such as performing an effect that teaches the final result instead of the progress.

In the present embodiment, the first variable winning device 32a having the first special ball-entry portion 145a to which the probability variation mode is given by entering the game ball three times (specified multiple times) and the game ball once (specified). A second variable winning device 32b having a second special ball-entry portion 145b as a special special area in which a probability variation mode is given by entering a ball (a special specified number of times less than a plurality of times) is provided.

As a result, it is possible to diversify the playability and enter the first special entry section 145a by the start of the 13th round of "13RS-2" and "13RS-3", which is considered to be disadvantageous. There is no first special entry display 463 that is said to have been balled, or the first that is said to have entered the first special entry section 145a by the start of the 8th round of "8RS-1" and "8RS-2". It is also possible to derive a development that completely changes (when there is no special entry display 463) (the second variable winning device 32b is opened for a long time), and it is possible to improve the motivation for playing. The "special specified number of times" may be "once" or "plurality".

Further, the first special entry section 145a and the second special entry section 145b are provided in separate variable winning devices 32a and 32b, respectively, and a first specific period during which the ball can enter the first special entry section 145a. And the second specific period in which the ball can enter the second special ball entry unit 145b do not overlap.

Therefore, it is possible for the player to easily understand which of the first special ball entry section 145a and the second special entry section 145b is currently in a situation where the game ball can be reached. Therefore, it is possible to get the excitement firmly at the timing of the excitement. Further, it is possible to reliably distinguish that the game ball reaches either one of the first special ball entry section 145a and the second special entry section 145b and the game ball does not reach the other, and the game playability is achieved. It is possible to suppress the diversification of the above and the situation where a large difference occurs between the design probabilistic mode grant rate in "8RS" and the actual probabilistic mode grant rate in "8RS".

In addition, in the present embodiment, it is suggested (teaching) that the second variable winning device 32b (second specific region 141b) is long-opened by short-opening the second variable winning device 32b in the previous stage. It has become. That is, by opening the second variable winning device 32b for a long time, it is almost certain that the game ball is entered into the second special ball entry portion 145b once, and the probability variation mode can be obtained. Therefore, it is preferable for the player that the second variable winning device 32b is opened for a long time, and it is also interesting (want to know) for the player. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, it is suggested in the previous stage that the second variable winning device 32b is long-opened, so that the second variable winning device 32b is not only long-opened but also the second variable winning device 32b is long-opened. 2 It is possible to look forward to the teaching or suggestion that the specific area is open, and as a result, it is possible to improve the playability and the directing property. In the present embodiment, the function of short-opening the second variable winning device 32b before the long-opening constitutes the second opening teaching means.

Further, in the above embodiment, not all the game balls that have entered the first variable winning device 32a (first specific area 141a) enter the first special winning portion 145a, but the first variable winning device 32a. The game ball that has entered the ball may enter the first special entry section 145a or may not enter the first special entry section 145a. For example, it takes approximately 0.5 seconds from the time when the game ball enters the first variable winning device 32a to the time when the game ball enters the first special winning unit 145a, whereas the first distribution is performed. Since the period during which the device 149a is opened coincides with the period during which the first variable winning device 32a is opened, 0.5 seconds before the first variable winning device 32a is closed is closed. Even if the game ball enters by the time, there is a possibility that the game ball does not enter the first special entry portion 145a (of course, the first variable winning is made depending on the speed of the game ball moving in the first specific area 141a. A game ball entered before 0.5 seconds before the device 32a is closed may not enter the first special entry section 145a, or the first variable winning device 32a is closed 0.5. A game ball that has entered after a second may enter the first special entry portion 145a). Therefore, it is possible to produce whether or not the game ball that has entered the first specific area 141a has entered the first special ball entry portion 145a, thereby increasing the production opportunities and diversifying the game playability. be able to.

Further, in the above embodiment, in the jackpot state of "8RN-1" to "8RN-5", if the game ball is inserted into the first special ball entry portion 145a of the first variable winning device 32a three times, the probability variation mode is performed. However, the number and timing of short-opening are different for each type of jackpot of "8RN-1" to "8RN-5".

That is, in the jackpot state of "8RN-1" to "8RN-5", it is necessary to enter the game ball into the first special ball entry unit 145a three times in order to obtain the probability variation mode, and further, the first variable. The timing (round) when the winning device 32a is short-opened is also not uniform. For this reason, every time a game ball enters the first special ball entry section 145a, an effect (first special entry display 463) is performed to increase the production opportunity, and the jackpot state is achieved while suppressing the rut. The playability can be dramatically improved, and as a result, the interest can be improved.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the opening period (first period) in which the first specific region 141a of the first variable winning device 32a is opened and the first special ball entry portion 145a (first sorting device 149a) are set. By overlapping with the permissible period (second period) in which the game ball is in the open state, the game ball can be put into the first special ball entry unit 145a (first state). Therefore, basically, in the jackpot state, the game ball is inserted into the first variable winning device 32a which is in the open state, and when the short is opened (the period in which the first state is reached), the first variable winning is obtained. It is relatively easy to understand as a player's operation of expecting the ball to enter the device 32a, and eventually to the first special ball entry portion 145a of the game ball, but it is possible to add a playability that is not simple. it can. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored quickly while avoiding the playability that is difficult to attach.

Further, by providing a permissible period (second period) of the first special ball-entry portion 145a in addition to the opening period (first period) of the first variable winning device 32a, a suitable length (big hit) as the first period is provided. A game ball is inserted into the variable winning devices 32a and 32b during the state to secure a time for the player to acquire a relatively large number of game balls), and a suitable length (longer) as the second period. If it is too long, it is possible to easily achieve the condition that three game balls are inserted into the first special entry portion 145a during the jackpot state, so that the length is not desired.) For example, It is possible to avoid a situation in which it is too long if the entire first period is set as the second period. Further, by providing a plurality of patterns of the relative derivation timing and length of the second period with respect to the first period, it is possible to diversify the playability and the like, and it is possible to suppress the rut.

Further, even when the configuration of the first specific region 141a is made relatively simple by providing the first sorting device 149a (switching means), the length suitable for the opening period and the length suitable for the allowable period can be obtained. Can be set respectively. In addition, the period during which the game ball is not supposed to enter the first special ball entry section 145a is regulated to regulate the entry of the game ball into the first special entry section 145a, thereby providing crime prevention. Improvements can be made.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the first variable winning device 32a is short-opened in the decorative symbol display device 42 in the first round of "8RN", a game ball is inserted into the first special ball entry portion 145a. A guidance display indicating that the game ball is to be entered three times is displayed, and when the first special entry portion 145a is opened, the first variable winning device 32a is short-opened. That is, the mode of opening the first variable winning device 32a when the first special ball-entry portion 145a is opened is different from the long opening in which the first special ball-entry portion 145a is not opened, and the guidance By displaying the ball in advance, it is possible to reliably recognize that the ball can enter the first special ball entry unit 145a. In the present embodiment, the guidance display of the decorative symbol display device 42 and the mode in which the first variable winning device 32a is short-opened constitute the notification means.

In this way, by providing the notification means, even in a configuration in which the first distribution device 149a is provided in the first specific area 141a, it is possible to determine at what timing the game ball has a chance to reach the first special entry portion 145a. Can be grasped by a person. That is, since it is necessary for the player to first put the game ball into the first variable winning device 32a (first specific area 141a), pay attention to the entrance (first opening / closing member 143a) of the first specific area 141a. Therefore, it is conceivable that attention cannot be paid so much to the first sorting device 149a. Compared to the fact that the first specific region 141a was opened before that, it is relatively difficult to know whether or not the game ball has reached the first special ball entry portion 145a in the first specific region 141a (). Hard to see). In this respect, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner of the permissible period in which the first special ball entry unit 145a is open by the notification means, and a jackpot state aiming at the ball entry into the first specific area 141a. While smoothly advancing the game, it is possible to grasp or assume the permissible period and enjoy the gameability related to the granting of the privilege (probability change mode) more reliably.

In addition, in the present embodiment, during the short opening period (first opening period) of "8RN", when the game ball is entered into the first specific region 141a, the game ball enters the first special entry portion 145a. In the long opening period (second opening period), even if the game ball enters the first specific area 141a, the game ball enters the first special entry portion 145a. There is no possibility. In the present embodiment, the closing period in which the first variable winning device 32a is closed is interposed between the short opening period and the long opening period. By distinguishing between the first opening period and the second opening period in this way, it is possible to add sharpness to the game in the jackpot state. Furthermore, by interposing a closing period between the first opening period and the second opening period, it becomes easier to distinguish the first opening period, and it is possible to grasp the points that the player should concentrate on or the points that are exciting. Therefore, you can enjoy the game more positively.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the jackpot state of "13RS" and "8RS", the first special ball entry portion 145a is not opened, but the first variable winning device 32a (first specific area) is similar to the short opening. A fake short opening is performed in which 141a) is opened for 1.8 seconds. In the present embodiment, even if the game ball is entered into the first variable winning device 32a by opening the fake short, the game ball does not enter the first special entry portion 145a, but in the jackpot state, the final ball is finally entered. The first variable winning device 32a is opened for a long time, and the probability variation mode can be obtained by inserting a game ball into the second special ball entry portion 145b. By producing such a fake, it is possible to diversify the jackpot state and, by extension, diversify the playability of the jackpot state. In the present embodiment, the function of opening the fake short constitutes the fake derivation means. Further, the fake short opening may be configured to be derivable in the jackpot state of "8RN".

In addition, regarding the jackpot state of "8RN", regarding the round period (opportunity round period) in which the first special entry portion 145a is opened during the period, the allowable period is immediately after the start of the round period. (The first short opening is derived first in the round period). As a result, for example, when the first variable winning device 32a between the round periods is closed during the closed period (interval period), the first short is opened. There is a possibility of reducing the chance of the game ball entering the first variable winning device 32a. For this reason, it is possible to suppress the difference between a player who makes full use of the game technology such as suppressing the reduction of the game ball by refraining from launching the game ball during the interval period and a player who does not, and which Even a player can enjoy the game under the same conditions as possible.

Further, since the sub control device 262 is also provided with a sub-side first special ball entry counter that can grasp the number of times the game ball has entered the first special ball entry unit 145a, the sub-side first special ball entry counter is provided. Based on the stored information of the ball entry counter, it is possible to reliably derive the remaining information display according to the remaining number of times until the number of arrivals of the first special ball entry unit 145a of the game ball reaches the specified multiple times. On the control device 261 side, it is not necessary to perform the process of confirming the stored information of the first special ball entry counter at the stage of detecting the first special ball entry detection switch 223a (once when deciding to assign the probability variation mode). Just check). Therefore, while simplifying the processing of the main control device 261, the above-mentioned effects such as increasing the production opportunities and enlivening the game can be surely achieved.

Further, in the present embodiment, there is no upper limit of the count of the first special ball entry counter in one round period, and the counter of the first special ball entry counter may increase a plurality of times in one round period. Therefore, for example, the value of the first special entry counter is "1" when the first short opening in which the first special entry section 145a is opened is the remaining one stage. However, the game can be advanced with hope until the end, aiming at the short opening of the first variable winning device 32a.

In the first embodiment, the right to grant the probability change mode after the jackpot state ends, provided that three game balls enter the first special ball entry portion 145a of the first variable winning device 32a in the jackpot state. Is configured to be obtained. That is, in the jackpot state (or the open state of the first variable winning device 32a or the open state of the first special ball entry portion 145a corresponds to the first condition state), the game ball hits the first special ball entry section 145a. By achieving the specific condition of entering the ball, the first and second times, in the jackpot state, the right of the probabilistic mode by letting one more game ball enter the first special entry section 145a. It is possible to update the state until the state is given (the first condition can be achieved), and the specific condition that the game ball is entered into the first special entry portion 145a in the jackpot state is twice. In the achieved state (second condition state), the specific condition is achieved once more, that is, the achievement of the specific condition is the third time (the second condition is achieved), and the right of the probabilistic mode. Is given.

Here, a transition is made between a first condition state in which the first condition can be achieved by achieving the specific condition and a state in which the first condition is achieved, and the second condition can be achieved by achieving the specific condition. The configuration capable of changing the state to the second condition state is not particularly limited, and can be appropriately applied. For example, a specific area in which a game ball can enter is provided in the game area, a special ball entry section is provided as a special area in the specific area, and a special game is entered by entering a specified number of game balls in the special entry section. The configuration may be such that a jackpot state as a state occurs. That is, even if the same specific condition is achieved, the achievement provides a first condition state in which the first condition can be achieved and a second condition state in which the second condition can be achieved. It is possible to obtain a wider variety of effects and playability while suppressing the complexity of the configuration as much as possible. The first condition state is a state in which the first condition can be achieved by achieving the specific condition, but the second condition cannot be achieved.

In addition, the first condition and the second condition may be achieved at any time (there is no collective hit state such as a big hit state), or the first condition and the second condition may be achieved at any time other than the big hit state. By limiting the specific period during which the first condition and the second condition can be achieved as much as possible, it is possible to enhance the crime prevention and to play a game with more intonation. In a configuration in which the first condition is achieved by achieving the specific condition a plurality of specified times, a plurality of patterns of "the specified multiple times" may be provided. In this case, it is possible to further diversify the playability and the directing property. For example, when a means for switching between a state in which a game ball entering a specific area is guided to a first point and a state in which the game ball is guided to a second point is provided and the game ball is guided to the first point, The first condition is achieved by reaching the first point twice, and when the game ball is guided to the second point, the first condition is achieved by reaching the second point once. You may. Further, for example, a game ball that has reached a special area that can be reached by a game ball moving in a specific area is guided to a special passage, and the special passage has a branch, and the branch has a distribution means (electricity) for distributing the game ball. (Perform a certain operation at a certain timing or mechanically a certain operation) is provided, and a plurality of detection means are provided in the special passage, and the game ball is detected by the route of the game ball moving in the special passage. The number of detection means to be detected is different, and the first condition may be satisfied when the number of detections is a specified plurality of times or more.

In addition, in order for the player to recognize that the second condition state has been set, the teaching means for teaching the second condition state (decorative symbol display device 42 capable of displaying the residual information display 464 (see FIG. 42)). It is desirable to provide the above, and it is also desirable to teach the current stage until the transition from the first condition state to the second condition state. In this case, it is possible to raise the understanding of the game and to make the game more exciting. Further, as for such teaching, the decorative symbol display device 42 may be used to perform step-up display, countdown, or fill-in-the-blank display of a predetermined display object. Further, the trigger for such a change in the display mode is due to the entry of a game ball into the first variable winning device 32a (first special entry section 145a) (detection of the first special entry detection switch 223a). (A light emitting means provided so as to follow the decorative symbol display device 42 from the first variable winning device 32a and its surroundings based on the detection of the first special ball entry detection switch 223a is provided. 1 Light is emitted sequentially from the variable winning device 32a side to the decorative symbol display device 42 side, and the light emission is taken over by the decorative symbol display device 42 to display "V zone entry success / evolve display object" etc.) Is desirable. In addition, in the first round of the jackpot state, regarding the derivation timing and display contents of the "guidance display" that teaches the specific conditions, the first condition, the second condition, and the contents of the privilege when the second condition is achieved. It can be changed as appropriate.

Of the states in which the game ball can be entered into the first special entry section 145a, at least two game balls are inserted into the first special entry section 145a to the first special entry section 145a. It is also possible to provide an assist teaching means for teaching that the game ball is in a state where it is possible to enter the ball. That is, in the above embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 42 teaches it, but the first variable winning device 32a and the light emitting means and the sound provided around the first variable winning device 32a are changed to or in addition to the above configuration. The first variable winning device 32 may be configured to teach that the first variable winning device 32 has been short-opened.

With such a configuration, the player is made aware of and plays a game (movement) corresponding to a state in which a specific condition can be achieved (a state in which a game ball can enter the first special ball entry unit 145a). It is possible to guide the progress of the game and to liven up the game. In addition, it is possible to teach that the conditions for achieving the second condition are finally established, and it is possible to further excite the game. It should be noted that the teaching by the assist teaching means is not started after the specific condition can be achieved, but is started in advance and is performed until the specific condition can be achieved. It is desirable to.

Further, in the first embodiment, in order to improve the playability and the like, a plurality of patterns of periods (short opening timing) in which the first special ball entry portion 145a is opened in the jackpot state (specific period) are provided. .. Here, a privilege (probability variation mode) that is advantageous for the player is given by achieving a specific condition corresponding to a specific period (by inserting three game balls into the first special ball entry unit 145a). In a specific period, a first state (a state in which the first variable winning device 32a and the first special ball entry portion 145a are opened) in which the specific conditions can be achieved, and a second state in which the specific conditions cannot be achieved. The configuration in which the state is provided and the timing of the first state in a specific period is provided in a plurality of patterns is not particularly limited, and can be appropriately applied. For example, a jackpot type may be provided in which the first special ball-entry portion 145a is opened when the first variable winning device 32a is long-opened. Further, the first special winning device 145a may be opened at the same timing after the first variable winning device 32a is opened, or after the first variable winning device 32a is opened. The first special entry portion 145a is opened at the first timing (for example, from the start to the lapse of 2 seconds), and the second timing (for example) after the first variable winning device 32a is opened. , From the lapse of 4 seconds to the lapse of 6 seconds after the start), the first special ball entry portion 145a may be opened, and even if a plurality of jackpot types having different timings of opening are provided. Alternatively, the first special ball entry portion 145a is repeatedly closed at a predetermined interval (for example, from the time the power is turned on, or from the start of the jackpot state, closed for 3 seconds and opened for 0.5 seconds, or (for the jackpot round). (Longer than the longest time) It is opened and closed by repeating closing for 40 seconds and opening for 1 second, or closing for 3 seconds, opening for 0.5 seconds, closing for 2 seconds and opening for 0.8 seconds, etc.), and the length of the jackpot round Is not constant (the round ends according to the regulation of the upper limit of the ball entry), so that the first special entry section 145a is opened during the period when the first variable winning device 32a is open. The period may be random, or the first special entry may be made when the first special entry portion 145a is opened, when the jackpot state is started, or when the type of the jackpot state is determined. The timing at which the ball portion 145a is opened may be determined by lottery.

Even when such a configuration is adopted, the timing of the first state in which the specific condition can be achieved is not uniform. For this reason, it is possible to increase the production opportunities by performing the production every time the specific conditions are achieved, and to dramatically improve the playability in the specific period while suppressing the rut, and as a result, the interest is improved. Etc. can be planned.

Further, for example, there is a button effect for operating the effect button 125 in the effect variable display of the decorative symbol display device 42 performed in response to the variable display of the special display devices 43a and 43b, and the timing of deriving the button effect (decorative symbol). It may be configured so that it is suggested whether or not the button effect is a successful mode depending on which timing of the effect variation display is derived, how many times it is derived, and the like).

Further, in the above embodiment, the teaching of the first state in which the specific condition can be achieved, that is, the state in which the first variable winning device 32a and the first special ball-entry portion 145a are in the open state (effective teaching means). Although it is configured so that teaching) is performed, it may be configured not to teach. For example, at the start of the jackpot state, when the first variable winning device 32a is short-opened, by letting the game ball enter the first variable winning device 32a, it is taught that the probability variation mode may be given. When the short opening (including the fake short opening) is started, the same effect may be derived, or the effect corresponding to the short opening may not be derived. In this case, the game can be played while maintaining a sense of tension in the jackpot state. Further, even if the player can select whether or not the first variable winning device 32a is instructed that the game ball has entered the first variable winning device 32a in the short opening (including the fake short opening) of the first variable winning device 32a. Even if the instruction that the game ball has entered the first special entry section 145a (instruction of the achievement teaching means) is given (always done, or if the corresponding lottery is won, the instruction is given, or the first 1 Teach the prescribed ball entry until three game balls are inserted into the special entry section 145a; the first and second are performed, the third is not performed, only the first in the lottery, 2 Only the first, only the third, only the first and second, only the first and third, only the second and third, the first, the second, the third, all the patterns The player may be able to select one of the jackpot rounds without performing the predetermined round (1st round) to the predetermined round (5th round) and not in the subsequent rounds). Even if it is taught that the second condition has been achieved (three game balls have entered the first special entry section 145a) (must be done, or if the corresponding lottery is won, it is done, or , When the effect button 125 is operated in the corresponding button effect) The player may be able to select without performing the effect button 125. The first state and specific conditions to be taught by the above-mentioned effective teaching means and achievement teaching means are not determined by one pattern (for example, teaching by all), but are configured to be a plurality of patterns. As a result, it is possible to diversify the playability and suppress the mannerism.

In the jackpot state where the number of rounds is the same, it is possible to configure the structure so that the period (timing of short opening) when the first special ball entry portion 145a is opened is only one pattern. Alternatively, regardless of the total number of rounds, a specific round (for example, 2 rounds, 4 rounds, 6 rounds, 8 rounds, 10 rounds) may be configured to have a short opening (target round). If there is no, omit it accordingly).

Further, in the above embodiment, the right to grant the probability change mode after the end of the jackpot state is granted on condition that three game balls enter the first special entry portion 145a of the first variable winning device 32a in the jackpot state. Although it is configured to be obtained, for example, in a predetermined jackpot round, a specified number (multiple) of game balls are entered into the first variable winning device 32a (detection of the first entry count switch 226a is specified). When (multiple) times are performed), the first sorting device 149a is opened (and the ball enters the first special ball entry unit 145a, and the detection of the first special ball entry detection switch 223a is effective. It may be configured so that the right of the probabilistic mode is granted when even one game ball enters the first special entry unit 145a (it is also possible to set a plurality of specified balls). (In the case of adopting this configuration, when the first distribution device 149a is in the open state, the game ball that has entered the first variable winning device 32a is substantially entered into the first special entry portion 145a. It is desirable to have a proper configuration).

When such a configuration is adopted, a game ball enters the first variable winning device 32a at the start of a round in which the first sorting device 149a is set as a jackpot round that can be opened (first ball entry count). Set a value corresponding to the specified number for the V prize preparation counter that is counted when the switch 226a is detected (for example, set "3", which is a value corresponding to 3 times), and round. After the start, if the V winning flag indicating that the right of the probability change mode is granted is not set to ON, the value of the V winning preparation counter is subtracted by 1 every time the first ball counting switch 226a is detected. Then, when the value of the V prize preparation counter becomes "0", the V prize flag is set on (the command corresponding to the sub control device 262 is output to derive the corresponding effect). In a round not set as a jackpot round in which the first sorting device 149a can be opened, the first sorting device 149a is not opened no matter how many game balls enter the first variable winning device 32a. Further, as a modification of such a configuration, when the winning upper limit (for example, 8 pieces) of the game ball of the jackpot round is counted, the first sorting device 149a is opened, and corresponds to the winning upper limit (for example, the 8th piece). ) A game ball or a game ball that has exceeded the winning upper limit and has won the first variable winning device 32a (for example, the ninth over-winning ball) can enter the first special winning section 145a (when no ball is entered). Alternatively, it may be configured such that the over-winning game ball is easier to enter the first special entry portion 145a than the game ball corresponding to the winning upper limit). It should be noted that the first sorting device 149a is omitted, and the entry into the first special entry section 145a and the detection of the first special entry detection switch 223a are valid and invalid as a condition for assigning the probability variation mode. It may be configured to switch to the state.

Further, for example, in a predetermined round in the jackpot state, when a predetermined number of game balls are entered into the second variable winning device 32b, the first variable winning device 32a is opened and the first sorting device 149a is opened. It may be configured to be in a state (when a predetermined number of game balls enter the first specific entry portion 145a, the right to grant the probability variation mode is obtained).

Further, for example, as a jackpot type, "three times required jackpot" in which the right of the probability variation mode is obtained by three game balls entering the first special entry portion 145a in the jackpot state, and the first special in the jackpot state. "Two essential jackpots", in which the right to the probability variation mode can be obtained by entering two game balls into the ball entry section 145a, and one game ball entering the first special entry section 145a in the jackpot state. There may be a configuration in which a "one-time mandatory jackpot" is provided so that the right of the probabilistic mode can be obtained (there may be a jackpot that requires a predetermined number of times of four or more times). When this configuration is adopted, the stop modes (stop symbols) of the special display devices 43a and 43b are configured so as to be associated with various jackpot types. On the other hand, the decorative symbol display device 42 may be configured so that the jackpot type may or may not be taught as it is (if the stop mode of the special display devices 43a and 43b is confirmed, the jackpot type may be taught. However, by using a plurality of stop mode patterns corresponding to each jackpot type, it becomes relatively difficult to grasp, and the first special entry ball during the jackpot state by the decorative symbol display device 42 or the like. You can purely enjoy the production that accompanies the progress of entering the ball into part 145a). Further, when such a configuration is adopted, the display mode of the decorative symbol display device 42 such as "1 time required jackpot" (default) is actually used, and the right of the probability variation mode is granted. Regarding the teaching of what can be obtained, not only the timing when the right of the probability variation mode is obtained, but also the timing after that (the second entry into the first special entry section 145a, the third entry, or the first ball). Or, it can be taught even at the timing when it seems that the probability variation mode is given after the opportunity to enter the first special entry section 145a is completed without entering 3 balls even though 2 balls have entered. It may be configured as such. In this configuration, as a jackpot type, seven game balls are entered into the first variable winning device 32a in a specific jackpot round determined in advance (the first entry count switch 226a is detected seven times). In this case, the first sorting device 149a is opened in the "7th required jackpot", and when six game balls enter the first variable winning device 32a in a specific jackpot round, the first sorting device 149a Is open "6 times required jackpot" and "3 times" that the first sorting device 149a is opened when three game balls enter the first variable winning device 32a in a specific jackpot round. It is also possible to apply it in a configuration with "essential jackpot".

Further, as a jackpot type, a plurality of jackpots having different periods during which the first special ball entry portion 145a (first sorting device 149a) is opened in the jackpot state may be provided. For example, although the number of jackpot rounds in which the first special ball entry portion 145a (first sorting device 149a) is opened is the same, the jackpot that is opened in the first round and the jackpot that is open in the eighth round are open. A jackpot that is said to be and a jackpot that is opened in the 14th round may be provided. Further, for example, the first special ball entry portion 145a (first sorting device 149a) has a jackpot that is open only in the third round and a jackpot that can be opened in the third and fifth rounds (first). After the number of balls entering the special entry section 145a reaches the specified number, the first special entry section 145a may not be opened or may be opened), the third round. , 5th and 7th rounds can be open, and 3rd, 5th, 7th, 11th, and 12th rounds can be open. It may be configured so that it can be used. When this configuration is adopted, the stop modes (stop symbols) of the special display devices 43a and 43b are configured so as to be associated with various jackpot types. On the other hand, the decorative symbol display device 42 may be configured so that the jackpot type may or may not be taught as it is (if the stop mode of the special display devices 43a and 43b is confirmed, the jackpot type may be taught. However, by using a plurality of stop mode patterns corresponding to each jackpot type, it becomes relatively difficult to grasp, and the first special entry ball during the jackpot state by the decorative symbol display device 42 or the like. You can purely enjoy the production that accompanies the progress of entering the ball into part 145a). Further, when adopting such a configuration, it is actually a "big hit in which the first special entry portion 145a is opened in five different rounds", but "the first special unless the round is started". The display mode of the decorative symbol display device 42 may be such that "I do not know whether the ball entry portion 145a is in the open state" (default mode) (a pattern with suggestions and teachings may be provided).

In the error processing of the first remaining ball monitoring process and the second remaining ball monitoring process, the progress of the game is temporarily stopped (the fluctuation display is not started at the end of the big hit or after the end of the big hit, if it is during the big hit round. , The next round may not be started after the end of the round, and the next round may not be started during the jackpot interval) (based on the operation of canceling the error state on the back side of the pachinko machine 10). Although it can be restarted), the game is advanced, but error notification on the pachinko machine 10 and output of error information to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 (lighting of the error display lamp 104, error response display on the decorative symbol display device 42, error Corresponding audio output, output for deriving an error mode in the equipment where the pachinko machine 10 is installed, output to a computer managed by a game hall where the pachinko machine 10 is installed, etc.) may be performed. (Of course, the game may be stopped and error information may be output). Further, for example, in step S1305 of the first remaining ball monitoring process of FIG. 29, when it is confirmed that the game ball has entered the first special ball entry unit 145a, the first special ball entry counter is directly displayed in step S1306. When it is confirmed that there is no abnormality by referring to the value of the first ball entry counter instead of performing the addition process (when it is "1" or more), the process proceeds to step S1306 (when the above is confirmed). (The same applies to step S1505). As an operation for canceling the error state, in this example, the power supply is restarted while operating the RAM erase switch 323, but an operation means corresponding to the error state is provided separately from the RAM erase switch 323. , The error state may be resolved by performing a specific operation on the operation means.

(Second Embodiment)
Hereinafter, the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 50 and the like, focusing on the characteristic portion. In the second embodiment, the central unit 471 is provided in a range including the central portion of the game area. The central unit 471 is provided with a substantially elliptical frame-shaped housing 472 that is long in the vertical direction, and a specific area 473 in which a game ball moving in the game area can enter is provided inside the housing 472. The ball entry opening 474, which serves as an entrance for the game ball to enter the specific area 473, is provided on the left side near the upper side of the housing 472.

Further, the central unit 471 extends diagonally upward from the lower edge portion of the ball entry opening 474 toward the outside of the central unit 471 and a closed position extending substantially in the vertical direction to close the ball entry opening 474. It is provided with an opening / closing member 475 that is present and displaces between the opening position that opens the ball entry opening 474. On the other hand, in the left side area of the game area located on the left side of the central unit 471, the first start winning device 491 is provided. It is possible to constantly insert a game ball into the first start winning device 491. Then, when a small hit is won in a winning / losing lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting winning device 491, the opening / closing member 475 is displaced to the open position (the central unit 471 is in the open state). It is configured as follows.

At the lower part of the specific area 473, a V winning device 476 as an opportunity ball entry means is provided. As a basic game property of the present embodiment, it is an object of the game ball that has flowed into the specific area 473 to be entered into the V winning device 476. When a game ball enters the V winning device 476, a jackpot state as a special privilege in which the variable winning device 482 is opened occurs (continues to the jackpot state in which the variable winning device 482 is opened). It has become. The variable winning device 482 may or may not be provided with the first special ball-entry portion 145a as in the first embodiment. In addition, a function of generating a jackpot state constitutes a granting means.

By the way, not all the game balls that have entered the specific area 473 enter the V winning device 476, but the first distribution in which all the game balls that have entered the specific area 473 are guided to the specific area 473. The device 477, the second sorting device 478 in which the game ball passing through the first sorting device 477 is guided, the third sorting device 479 in which the game ball passing through the second sorting device 478 is guided, and the third sorting device. A fourth sorting device 480 is provided to guide the game ball that has passed through 479.

Further, the first sorting device 477, the second sorting device 478, the third sorting device 479, and the fourth sorting device 480 of the present embodiment have a substantially round dish shape, and the game balls pass through one by one ( The first sorting device 477, the second sorting device 478, and the third sorting device 479 are provided with six, and the fourth sorting device 480 is provided at three uniform positions near the center where the circular holes that can be dropped) are provided. It is configured to be. Then, the game ball guided by the distribution devices 477 to 480 is adapted to fall into one of the holes after turning the region on the outer side of the hole several times.

In the present embodiment, of the six holes provided in the first sorting device 477, two are safe holes 481 leading to the second sorting device 478, and the other four discharge the game balls to the outside of the game area. Out hole 482. Of the six holes provided in the second sorting device 478, two are safe holes 481 leading to the third sorting device 479, and the other four are out holes 482 for discharging the game ball to the outside of the game area. .. Of the six holes provided in the third sorting device 479, two are safe holes 481 leading to the fourth sorting device 480, and the other four are out holes 482 for discharging the game ball to the outside of the game area. .. Of the three holes provided in the fourth sorting device 480, one is a safe hole 481 leading to the V winning device 476, and the other two are out holes 482 for discharging the game ball to the outside of the game area.

The safe holes 481 provided in each of the first sorting device 477, the second sorting device 478, and the third sorting device 479 include a normal safe hole 481a on the front side and a special safe hole 481b on the back side. ing. In this embodiment, each special safe hole 481b corresponds to a special region.

Further, although not shown, the entry as a pre-detection means for entering the specific area 473 corresponding to the entry opening 474 and detecting all the game balls before being guided by the first distribution device 477. A ball detection switch is provided. Further, corresponding to the first sorting device 477, the first normal passing detection switch for detecting the game ball entering the normal safe hole 481a of the first sorting device 477 and the special safe hole 481b of the first sorting device 477 A first special passage detection switch for detecting the game ball that has entered the ball and a first discharge detection switch for detecting the game ball that has entered the out hole 482 of the first sorting device 477 are provided. In addition, a second normal passage detection switch that detects a game ball that has entered the normal safe hole 481a of the second sorting device 478 and a special safe hole 481b of the second sorting device 478 corresponding to the second sorting device 478. A second special passage detection switch that detects the game ball that has entered the ball and a second discharge detection switch that detects the game ball that has entered the out hole 482 of the second distribution device 478 are provided. Further, corresponding to the third sorting device 479, the third normal passing detection switch for detecting the game ball entering the normal safe hole 481a of the third sorting device 479 and the special safe hole 481b of the third sorting device 479. A third special passage detection switch that detects the game ball that has entered the ball and a third discharge detection switch that detects the game ball that has entered the out hole 482 of the third sorting device 479 are provided. Further, corresponding to the 4th sorting device 480, the ball entered the 4th passage detection switch that detects the game ball that entered the safe hole 481 of the 4th sorting device 480 and the out hole 482 of the 4th sorting device 480. A fourth discharge detection switch that detects a game ball is provided. Each special passage detection switch constitutes a arrival detection means.

In addition, the first sorting device 477, the second sorting device 478, and the third sorting device 479 are provided with a guide light emitting unit 483 provided so as to surround each safe hole 481. In the present embodiment, the guide light emitting unit 483 corresponding to the normal safe hole 481a emits white light, and the guide light emitting unit 483 corresponding to the special safe hole 481b emits red light. Further, a lighting member (not shown) for illuminating a game ball rolling on the upper surface side corresponding to each of the first sorting device 477, the second sorting device 478, the third sorting device 479, and the fourth sorting device 480. Is provided. Only the first sorting device 477, the second sorting device 478, the third sorting device 479, the lighting member corresponding to the fourth sorting device 480, and the guide light emitting unit 483, in which the game ball is present, emit light. There is. The upper surface side of the guide light emitting unit 483 is flush with the other upper surfaces of the first sorting device 477, the second sorting device 478, and the third sorting device 479.

Further, on the front side of the housing 472, at positions corresponding to both sides of the first sorting device 477, the second sorting device 478, and the third sorting device 479, the first sorting device 477 corresponding to the game ball. A passage notification lamp 484 is provided as a means for instructing arrival that the second sorting device 478 and the special safe hole 481b of the third sorting device 479 have been passed. The passage notification lamp 484 is turned off when the value of the ball entry counter as the remaining ball grasping means for grasping the number of game balls in the specific area 473 becomes "0". The ball entry counter is incremented by 1 when the ball entry detection switch is detected, and V as an opportunity detection means (not shown) for detecting a game ball that has entered the first to fourth discharge detection switches and the V winning device 476. 1 is subtracted when the winning detection switch is detected.

As the game of the second embodiment, first, when a game ball is inserted into the first starting winning device 491, for example, the variable winning device 482 is won or not in the jackpot state with a probability of 1/300. A lottery is held, and if the player loses the lottery, a winning / losing lottery is held in which the central unit 471 is opened and the small hit state is won at 298/300. By winning the small hit state, the central unit 471 is opened, and if the game ball can be entered into the central unit 471 there, the game ball is guided to the first sorting device 477. .. In the first sorting device 477, the game ball reaches the second sorting device 478 regardless of whether it enters the safe hole 481a or the special safe hole 481b, but when it passes through the special safe hole 481b, it reaches the second sorting device 478. The first special flag provided in the RAM 503 of the main control device 261 is set to ON, and the corresponding passage notification lamp 484 emits light.

The second sorting device 478 is basically the same as the first sorting device 477, and the game ball reaches the third sorting device 479 regardless of whether the ball enters the normal safe hole 481a or the special safe hole 481b. However, when passing through the special safe hole 481b, the second special flag is set to ON, and the corresponding passage notification lamp 484 emits light.

The third sorting device 479 is basically the same as the first sorting device 477 and the second sorting device 478, and the game ball can be inserted into either the normal safe hole 481a or the special safe hole 481b. 4 When the distribution device 480 is reached but the special safe hole 481b is passed, the third special flag is set to ON and the corresponding passage notification lamp 484 emits light. Each special flag constitutes the arrival information storage means.

Further, in the present embodiment, based on the detection of the first to third special passage detection switches, the arrival effect according to the setting status of the first special flag, the second special flag, and the third special flag is performed. It has become. That is, when the game ball passes through the special safe hole 481b (detection of the first to third special passage detection switches is performed), it corresponds to the first special flag, the second special flag, and the third special flag. After turning on what is to be turned on, a sound effect is generated, the corresponding lighting member is brightened and darkened, and how many of the three special flags are set to on is determined. Here, in one case, the corresponding passage notification lamp emits blue light, in two cases, the corresponding passage notification lamp and the already lit passage notification lamp emit green light, and in three cases, all passage notifications are emitted. Make the lamp emit red light.

In addition, based on the detection of the ball entry detection switch, the ball entry effect is performed according to the value of the ball entry counter and the setting status of the first special flag, the second special flag, and the third special flag. It has become. That is, when the game ball is detected by the ball entry detection switch, it is determined how many of the three special flags are set to ON. Here, in one case, all the lighting members are once made to emit blue light and then returned to the original state, in two cases, all the lighting members are once made to emit green light and then returned to the original state, and in three cases, all the lighting members are returned to the original state. Make it emit red light and then restore it. Furthermore, when the value of the ball entry counter is "2" (as a value including self-confidence), the first sound effect is generated, and when the value of the ball entry counter is "3" or more, the first sound effect is generated. Also produces a flashy second sound effect.

Now, in the fourth sorting device 480, when the game ball enters the safe hole 481, the game ball is guided by the V winning device 476 and enters the ball. Here, the jackpot state is given, but if the first special flag, the second special flag, and the third special flag are confirmed and all the special flags are set to ON, the probability variation jackpot is given. Is selected (probability change mode is given after the jackpot state), and if any one of the first special flag, the second special flag, and the third special flag is set to off, the normal jackpot is selected. (Transition to normal mode after jackpot state).

In the probabilistic mode, when the game ball passes through the through gate 493 provided in the right side area of the game area to win the ball entry support lottery with a relatively high probability and win the ball entry support lottery. The second start winning device 494 provided below the through gate 493 is opened. If a winning or losing lottery (winning at 1/30) based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting winning device 494 is won, a big hit state occurs. In addition, when the jackpot state is set to one set by two times, the configuration may be such that the mode shifts to the normal mode after the jackpot state ends, but the first variable winning device 32a of the first embodiment is used. It may be configured so that a probability variation mode may be given, such as a jackpot state of "8RN".

Further, the first special flag, the second special flag, and the third special flag are set to off when the game ball no longer exists in the specific area 473 and when a jackpot state occurs.

In addition, as a countermeasure against fraud, a remaining ball counter that counts the game balls existing in the specific area 473 of the central unit 471, a first counter that counts the number of game balls of the first distribution device 477, and a game of the second distribution device 478. Passes through a second counter that counts the number of balls, a third counter that counts the number of game balls of the third distribution device 479, a fourth counter that counts the number of game balls of the fourth distribution device 440, and a fourth distribution device 440. Then, a final counter for counting the game balls entering the V winning device 476 is provided, and the remaining ball counter and the first counter are incremented by 1 when the ball entry detection switch provided at the entrance of the specific area 473 is detected. , The remaining ball counter and the first counter are decremented by 1 when the ball enters the out hole 482 of the first sorting device 477 (detection of the corresponding switch), and the ball enters the safe hole 481 of the first sorting device 477. (Detection of the corresponding switch), the first counter is decremented by 1, and the second counter is incremented by 1, and when the ball enters the out hole 482 of the second sorting device 478 (detection of the corresponding switch), the remaining ball The counter and the second counter are decremented by 1, and when the ball enters the safe hole 481 of the second sorting device 478 (detection of the corresponding switch), the second counter is decremented by 1 and the third counter is decremented by 1. , The remaining ball counter and the third counter are decremented by 1 when the ball enters the out hole 482 of the third sorting device 479 (detection of the corresponding switch), and the ball enters the safe hole 481 of the third sorting device 479. (Detection of the corresponding switch), the third counter is decremented by 1, and the fourth counter is incremented by 1, and the ball enters the out hole 482 of the fourth sorting device 480 (detection of the corresponding switch), and the remaining ball. The counter and the 4th counter are decremented by 1, and when the ball enters the safe hole 481 of the 4th sorting device 480 (detection of the corresponding switch), the 4th counter is decremented by 1 and the final counter is decremented by 1. Upon entering the V winning device 476 (detection of the corresponding switch), the remaining ball counter and the final counter are decremented by 1. Here, when it is confirmed that the ball has been entered into the V winning device 476 (detection of the corresponding switch) and that the ball has been entered into the V winning device 476 (detection of the corresponding switch), it is dealt with. Before the subtraction processing of the remaining sphere counter and the final counter is performed, the processing of confirming the values of the remaining sphere counter and the final counter is performed, and when both are "1" or more, the V prize is won. The process shifts to the process of giving a jackpot state based on the entry into the device 476, and the error process of setting an error state when either one is "0" is performed.

As described in detail above, in the second embodiment, the game ball that has entered the central unit 471 is the all special safe holes 481b of the first sorting device 477, the second sorting device 478, and the third sorting device 479. By passing through the ball and entering the V winning device 476, the probability variation mode can be obtained together with the jackpot state. In this way, by passing the game ball through the plurality of special safe holes 481b, it is possible to give the game property that the privilege (probability change mode) is gradually approached, and the game can be more emotionally transferred. You can enjoy it. Therefore, it is possible to increase the time zone in which the player can get an uplifting feeling and the opportunity to perform the production, and to improve the playability, and as a result, the interest can be improved. In particular, as long as even one game ball enters the central unit 471, the game ball passes through all the special safe holes 481b of the first sorting device 477, the second sorting device 478, and the third sorting device 479. Since there is a possibility, it is possible to always have an expectation for a game ball that has entered the specific area 473 (the game ball enters the specific area 473).

Further, the privilege (probability variation mode) can be substantially obtained only by passing the game ball through all the special safe holes 481b of the first sorting device 477, the second sorting device 478, and the third sorting device 479. Since it is necessary to put the game ball into the V winning device 476, the game ball passes through all the special safe holes 481b of the first sorting device 477, the second sorting device 478, and the third sorting device 479. It is possible to make a very strong interest in the behavior of the game ball after it is made to play. Therefore, it is possible to add a large inflection to the game, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest.

If a game ball exists in the specific area 473, the winning / failing lottery (open lottery) is not performed, and the specific area is even after the first specified time has passed since the ball entry detection switch was detected. It is configured to perform error processing when it is determined that a game ball exists in 473, and is between the time when the V prize detection switch is detected and the time when the second specified time elapses until the jackpot state occurs. , The first specified time may be set to elapse. In this case, it is possible to more reliably prevent the jackpot state from being given in a situation where the V prize detection switch may be detected illegally.

Further, the first special flag, the second special flag, and the third special flag are set to off when the game ball no longer exists in the specific area 473 and when a jackpot state occurs. Therefore, for example, when a plurality of game balls enter the specific area 473 in quick succession, even if any of the game balls is discharged from the specific area 473, another game ball exists in the specific area 473. As long as it is done, the first special flag, the second special flag, and the third special flag that are set on remain on. That is, for example, of the two game balls that have entered the specific area 473 at almost the same time, the preceding game ball has the special safe hole 481b of the first sorting device 477 and the special safe hole 481b of the third sorting device 479. Even if the ball has passed but has entered the out hole 482 of the fourth sorting device 480, the subsequent game ball passes through the special safe hole 481b of the second sorting device 478 and is a V winning device. If you enter 476, you will be given a probabilistic jackpot.

Therefore, by setting a plurality of game balls into the specific area 473, the expectation of granting the probabilistic jackpot can be greatly increased (providing a high probability state of granting the probabilistic jackpot). The behavior of the game ball in that state can be more interesting. Therefore, it is possible to improve the playability by adding more intonation to the game. Furthermore, the player can prolong the high-probability state of granting the probabilistic jackpot on his own (it is sufficient to keep the game balls entering the specific area 473 before all the game balls are discharged from the specific area 473). , Diversification of game playability, increase of intonation during game, etc. can be achieved. When a ball is entered into the V winning device 476, the remaining ball counter and the game ball whose final counter values are "1" or more are entered into the V winning device 476. Of course, if it is not confirmed that the situation is natural, the jackpot will not be given (it will be regarded as an error state).

In addition, since the first special flag, the second special flag, and the third special flag are set to off when the game ball does not exist in the specific area 473, the probability variation mode should not be given at that time. Can be confirmed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the crime prevention property, the playability, and the like.

Further, a passage notification lamp 484 indicating that the game ball has passed through the corresponding first sorting device 477, the second sorting device 478, and the special safe hole 481b of the third sorting device 479 is provided. Therefore, it is possible to more clearly grasp which special safe hole 481b the game ball has already passed through and which of the remaining special safe holes 481b the game ball should be passed through. ..

In addition, the ball entry effect is performed based on the detection of the ball entry detection switch, the arrival effect is performed based on the detection of the first to third special passage detection switches, and the pattern of the ball entry effect is that of the ball entry counter. It is determined according to the value and the setting status of the first to third special flags, and the pattern of the arrival effect is determined according to the setting status of the first to third special flags. For this reason, it is possible to easily recognize how close the state is to the grant of the privilege (probability change mode), and the more the expectation for the grant of the privilege and the grant of the special privilege (big hit state) increases, the more flashy the production is. By doing so, the game can be greatly excited.

In the second embodiment, the game ball that has entered the central unit 471 passes through all the special safe holes 481b of the first sorting device 477, the second sorting device 478, and the third sorting device 479, and V By entering the winning device 476, the probability variation mode can be obtained together with the jackpot state. Here, a plurality of condition achievement means capable of achieving a specific condition (first sorting device 477, second sorting device 478, special safe hole 481b of the third sorting device 479, and V winning device 476) are provided in advance. The configuration in which a privilege advantageous to the player is given by achieving a plurality of predetermined specific conditions (compared to the case where the specified conditions are not achieved) is not particularly limited, and can be appropriately applied.

For example, instead of omitting the opening / closing member 475 of the central unit 471 of the second embodiment, a detection means for detecting the passage of the game ball through the entry ball opening 474 is provided, and a lottery is performed based on the detection of the detection means. By the lottery, the probability variation mode is set by passing through all the special safe holes 481b of the first sorting device 477, the second sorting device 478, and the third sorting device 479 and entering the V winning device 476. When it becomes a big hit to be given, it passes through the special safe hole 481b of the first sorting device 477 and the second sorting device 478 (it may be another combination of two, and it is permissible if any two pass. By entering the V winning device 476, it becomes a big hit to which the probability variation mode is given, and it passes through the special safe hole 481b of the third sorting device 479 (another special safe hole). It may be 481b, or any one may be allowed if it passes through it), and whether it is a jackpot to which a probability variation mode is given by entering the V winning device 476. May be configured to be determined.

Further, for example, an opening / closing type (in the closed state, the game ball may not be able to enter, or the game ball may be more difficult to enter than in the open state) of the start winning device. A first operating port, a second operating port, and a distribution device for distributing the game ball entered in the starting winning device to either the first operating port or the second operating port are provided inside, and the game to the through gate is provided. In the ball entry support lottery that is performed with the passage of the ball as an opportunity, the blade member is released, and the first winning state in which the game ball is guided to the first operating port side by the sorting device and the blade member are released. In addition, there is a second winning state in which the game ball is guided to the second operating port side by the sorting device, and the sorting device guides the game ball to the second operating port side only when the second winning is won. The first special start winning device that wins the jackpot state with the first probability when the game area moving in the game area enters, and the first probability when the game ball moving in the game area enters the ball. A second special start winning device that wins a jackpot state with a high second probability is provided, and when a game ball enters the first operating port, the first special starting winning device is opened and the first in the open state. 1 When a game ball enters the special start winning device, the first special start winning device is closed so that the game ball cannot enter, and when the game ball enters the second operating port, the first 2 The special start winning device is opened, and when a game ball enters the open second special start winning device, the second special start winning device is closed so that the game ball cannot be entered. , If the jackpot state is won based on the ball entering the first special starting winning device (the ball entering the first special starting winning device provided inside the first special starting winning device), the probability change mode is set. It may or may not be granted, and it is a big hit based on the entry into the second special start winning device (the entry into the second special entry section provided inside the second special start winning device). If the state is won, the probability variation mode may be given.

Even when adopting such a configuration, it is possible to impart the playability of going up the stairs until the privilege is granted step by step (gradually approaching the grant of the privilege), and enjoy the game with more emotion. You can get it. Therefore, it is possible to increase the time zone in which the player can get an uplifting feeling and the opportunity to perform the production, and to improve the playability, and as a result, the interest can be improved.

In addition, in the case where a plurality of patterns of combinations of specific conditions to be achieved in order to obtain the privilege (probability variation mode) are provided, in consideration of making it easy to understand which condition achievement means should achieve the specific condition, the privilege It is desirable to provide target teaching means for teaching the target condition achievement means for achieving the specific condition for granting, and to teach the target condition achievement means for achieving the specific condition for granting the privilege. It should be noted that the target teaching means may be configured to teach or not to teach the target condition achievement means for achieving the specific condition for granting the privilege, or the target teaching means may be omitted. Is also possible.

In the second embodiment, if the state in which the game ball exists in the specific area 473 can be kept, the first special flag, the second special flag, and the third special flag that are set on remain on. For example, after the previous game ball has turned on the first special flag and the third special flag, the succeeding game ball has turned on the second special flag while the fourth special flag is rolling in the fourth sorting device 480. Then, when the previous game ball or the subsequent game ball enters the V winning device 476, the probability variation mode is given. On the other hand, the game ball is passed through all the special safe holes 481b of the plurality of predetermined specific conditions (the first sorting device 477, the second sorting device 478, and the third sorting device 479), and the game ball is V. The privilege (probability variation mode) may be given by achieving the winning device 476) in the designated order. For example, even if the game ball passes through the special safe hole 481b of the second distribution device 478, the second special flag is not set on unless the first special flag is set to ON, and the special safe hole of the third distribution device 479 is not set. Even if the game ball passes through 481b, if the second special flag is not set on, the third special flag may not be set on. In this case, it is possible to increase the chances that the player can concentrate and get excited.

Further, in the second embodiment, it is assumed that the game ball that has entered the central unit 471 passes through all the special safe holes 481b of the first sorting device 477, the second sorting device 478, and the third sorting device 479. By achieving the specific condition that the game ball is entered into the V winning device 476 in the state where the condition is achieved, the probability variation mode can be obtained together with the jackpot state. Here, there are a precondition and a specific condition, and when the specific condition is achieved while the precondition is achieved, the player is compared with the case where the specific condition is achieved without achieving the precondition. The configuration to which the advantageous privilege is given is not particularly limited, and can be applied as appropriate.

Further, for example, at the time of winning or losing lottery based on the winning ball of the first starting winning device 491, the ball is passed through any of the special safe holes 481b of the first sorting device 477, the second sorting device 478, and the third sorting device 479. It is also possible to draw a lottery as to whether or not a game ball should be inserted into the V winning device 476. The combination pattern includes a pattern that requires the passage of all the special safe holes 481b of the first sorting device 477, the second sorting device 478, and the third sorting device 479, the first sorting device 477, and the second sorting device. A pattern that requires the passage of two or any two special safe holes 481b of the 478 and the third sorting device 479, the first sorting device 477, the second sorting device 478, and the third. For any of the patterns requiring the passage of one of the designated sorting devices 479 or one of the special safe holes 481b, the first sorting device 477, the second sorting device 478, and the third sorting device 479. There are patterns that do not have to be passed through, and these can be set appropriately for each model.

In this way, even when the specific conditions are achieved, the benefits given differ depending on whether or not the preconditions are achieved. As a result, more diverse playability can be added, and the interest can be improved. Further, of course, various configurations such as the number, arrangement, and structure of the condition achievement means such as the sorting devices 477 to 479 and the V winning device 476 are not particularly limited and can be changed as appropriate. For example, twelve winning openings may be provided side by side, and when a game ball enters five of these, the winning balls may be played according to the combination of the winning openings. In addition, even if the specific conditions are achieved after achieving the preconditions, the same benefits as those given when the specific conditions are achieved without achieving the preconditions may be granted, but the premise. If the conditions are met, it may be possible that a privilege that is more advantageous to the player than the same privilege is given, or that the advantageous privilege is more likely to be given. In this case as well, the value of aiming at the preconditions can be sufficiently added.

Further, it is desirable to provide a precondition teaching means for teaching the preconditions for granting the privilege, and in that case, it is possible to easily recognize what kind of preconditions should be achieved. In particular, when a plurality of patterns of preconditions are provided, such an action effect is more prominently exhibited. For example, in a situation where a probability variation mode is given when a game ball is passed through the special safe hole 481b of the first distribution device 477 and the third distribution device 379 and then the game ball is inserted into the V winning device 476. The guide light emitting unit 483 of the first sorting device 477 and the third sorting device 379 is blinked, the guidance light emitting unit 483 of the second sorting device 478 is turned on, and the passage notification lamp 484 of the second sorting device 478 is turned on. It may be configured as. Further, a liquid crystal display device or a dot display device may be provided to teach the special safe hole 481b that the game ball should pass through.

In addition, it is desirable to have a privilege teaching means for teaching the contents of the privilege given by the achievement of the specific condition after achieving the precondition. That is, it is possible to give an uplifting feeling or the like to the game when the player is in a state where an advantageous privilege can be given, and it is possible to improve the game playability. In addition, when the opportunity to achieve a specific condition is given, the opportunity to achieve the precondition may be always given, or it may be configured so that it may or may not be given. Good. Further, the teaching by the premise teaching means and the privilege teaching means may or may not be performed. That is, in reality, the preconditions are set, and the player achieves the preconditions without knowing it, and when the specific conditions are achieved, the privilege is given as a surprise. It may be configured. Also, because there is a pattern in which the preconditions are actually set but not taught, even if the preconditions are not set, the preconditions are actually set secretly. You can also have them play the game with the expectation that it might be.

In addition, the derivation timing of the trigger for generating the opportunity to achieve the precondition may be one pattern, or a plurality of patterns may be provided. That is, for example, the precondition is achieved only by passing through the special safe hole 481b of the first sorting device 477, and the precondition is achieved only by passing through the special safe hole 481b of the third sorting device 479. It may be configured so that there is a pattern. Further, for example, a distribution means for distributing the moving direction of the game ball that rotates or periodically displaces the distribution devices 477 to 479 to move in the specific area 473 is provided, and the preconditions can be achieved and achieved. The state may change to an impossible state, and the precondition may or may not be achieved depending on the behavior of the game ball and the timing of arrival.

It is also conceivable to set preconditions that are relatively difficult to achieve when more favorable benefits are given to the player. However, even if there is a possibility that a privilege that is advantageous to the player will be granted, if it becomes difficult to achieve the precondition and the precondition cannot be achieved, the normal privilege for the player will be granted. If the configuration is more disadvantageous than that, it becomes an undesired situation for the player to shift to a situation in which a privilege that is more advantageous to the player is given. For this reason, regardless of the type of privilege, it is better to select the preconditions that are easy to achieve, or to give the player an advantageous privilege. The configuration may be such that easy preconditions can be easily selected.

Further, it is desirable that the premise achievement teaching means (passage notification lamp 484) for teaching that the precondition is achieved is provided. In this case, it is possible to easily recognize that the value of achieving the specific condition is increasing, and the feeling of exhilaration in such a state can be enjoyed.

Furthermore, it is configured so that it may be a little difficult to recognize whether or not the preconditions have been achieved (does not notify the passage of the special safe hole 481b, illuminates the sorting device in which the game ball exists, etc.). , The achievement teaching state in which the precondition is taught to be achieved by the premise achievement teaching means and the achievement non-teaching state in which the precondition is not taught may be configured. In this case, it is possible to add a wider variety of playability by generating a state in which it is difficult to know whether or not the preconditions have been achieved.

In addition, it may be configured to give an opportunity to shift to the achievement teaching state based on the designated operation of the player during the designated period. As the designated operation, the operation of the effect operation means (effect button 125, etc.) for deriving the behavior of the effect means corresponding to the predetermined period by performing the operation during the predetermined period, or the pachinko machine 10 is provided in the game area. Examples thereof include entry into a specific ball entry section. For example, there is a mini-game displayed by a part of the decorative symbol display device 42, and the mini-game can be succeeded by operating the effect button 125 at the right time, and the achievement teaching state can be achieved by succeeding the mini-game. It may be configured to be. Further, for example, the game ball can be entered into both the first start winning device and the second starting winning device by launching the game ball aiming at a predetermined part of the game area. A through gate is provided on the upstream side of the starting winning device, and the second starting winning device can enter a game ball only when the winning ball support lottery is won, and the game ball to the first starting winning device. When the central unit 471 is opened based on the entry of the ball, the achievement teaching state or the achievement non-teaching state is set, and the central unit 471 is opened based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting winning device. In some cases, it may be configured to be in the achievement teaching state. By making it possible to shift to the achievement teaching state according to the result of the player's intention or action as in these configurations, it is possible to improve the motivation to play.

If the teaching of the premise teaching means and the teaching of the premise achievement teaching means are not performed, the preconditions are always or almost always achieved if the game is played normally (according to the instructions of the game). In addition, it may be configured so that a specific condition is achieved with a relatively high probability or almost is achieved if the game is normally played. However, since the preconditions, etc. are not achieved unless the game is played normally, it is understood that the normal game is not played (for example, the player is in a state where he should hit the right but does not hit the right, etc.). ) In that case, it is desirable to derive a display or a warning sound indicating that a normal game should be performed.

In addition, a precondition valid period in which the achievement of the precondition is effective and a specific effective period in which the achievement of the specific condition is effective are provided, and the precondition and the precondition valid period in the state where the specific condition is not achieved are provided. , And it is desirable that it is configured so that the specific validity period may end. In the second embodiment, as long as the game ball exists in the specific area 473, the premise valid period and the specific valid period continue (during such a period, in addition to the game ball not existing in the game area 473, V It ends when a big hit state occurs based on the ball entering the winning device 476). As a result, for example, the preconditions are not cleared until the specific conditions are achieved, or a plurality of steps must be achieved in order to achieve the preconditions. Compared to the case where the achievement information of the step is not cleared, it is possible to add sharpness and intonation to the game, and it is possible to avoid a situation in which the gambling is unnecessarily inflamed. The premise validity period and the specific validity period may be determined by time, or detection of a predetermined behavior other than the absence of the game ball in the specific area 473 (detection and specification of a predetermined number of times of the predetermined operation means). It may be determined by the detection of the specified number of times of the game ball that has passed through the area of.

Further, as in the second embodiment, when the premise validity period and the end timing of the specific validity period are easy to understand, it is not used so much, but the premise validity period and the end timing of the specific validity period are set to the specified time. The end of a period with a break such as the progress, the entry of a game ball into a predetermined winning opening, the prescribed multiple entry of a game ball into a predetermined winning opening, the number of shots of the game ball, the jackpot round, the variable display, etc. It is desirable to configure the premise validity period and the remaining period of the specific validity period so that they can be taught. In this case, the game can be properly executed by having the player understand the game playability. In addition, there may be a case where the remaining period is taught and a case where the remaining period is not taught.

In addition, when the specific condition is achieved while the precondition is achieved, the state in which the precondition is achieved may or may not be resolved. For example, in the case of one-to-one, for example, the value of one time when a plurality of information on which the preconditions are achieved can be stored and stored, and the value of adding a privilege when the specific condition is achieved is made to correspond to the value of the specified number of the preconditions. When "2" is stored in the achievement stock storage means that stores the number of achievements of the specific condition in, the value of the achievement stock storage means is set to "1" when the specific condition is achieved, and the privilege is given. It may be configured. In this case, it is possible to provide a state in which the privilege is easily given continuously, and it is possible to add sharpness and intonation to the game.

In the second embodiment, when the game ball enters the V winning device 476, the precondition (passage of the game ball through all the special safe holes 481b) is achieved and the case where the game ball is not achieved. The only difference is whether or not the probabilistic mode is granted, but the first and second benefits are given when the preconditions are met and the specific conditions are met. The second privilege may be configured to be more advantageous to the player than the first privilege. For example, there are a first ball entry section, a second ball entry section, and a sorting device inside the V winning device 476, and the sorting device guides the game ball to the first ball entry section and the second ball with a constant rhythm. Switching to the ball entry section, or determining the guide destination by the sorting device at the time of winning or failing lottery based on the ball entry to the first start winning device 491, or a plurality of patterns of preconditions are provided, for example, the first to third. The first precondition is achieved by passing through any two special safe holes 481b of the sorting devices 477 to 479, and the second precondition is achieved by passing through all the special safe holes 481b of the first to third sorting devices 477 to 479. When the condition is achieved and the second precondition is achieved, the distribution device may be configured to guide the game ball to the second entry portion. Further, as a privilege when a specific condition is achieved by the game ball entering the first or second ball entry section of the V winning device 476, the game ball enters the second ball entry section. In that case, the first jackpot type is given to the jackpot state of the number of rounds determined by the winning / failing lottery, and the probability variation mode up to the subsequent 100 fluctuation displays, and the first ball entry section is given the first jackpot type. When a game ball enters, a second jackpot type is given, in which the jackpot state of the number of rounds determined by the winning / failing lottery and the probability variation mode up to the subsequent 50 fluctuation displays are given. It may be configured as follows. The benefits are not particularly limited and can be changed as appropriate for each model. For example, in a configuration in which there is no probability variation mode and there is a normal mode and a time reduction mode, the provision of the time reduction mode may be applied as a privilege. In addition, there are a normal mode, a time reduction mode, and a probability variation mode. In the time reduction mode and the probability variation mode, an upper limit is set so that the fluctuation display can be continued up to the specified number of times, and after the jackpot state ends, the time reduction mode is set. , And, in the configuration of shifting to either the probability variation mode, when the jackpot state is won in the time reduction mode, the probability variation mode may be always given after the jackpot state ends.

In the second embodiment, the passage notification lamp 484 (approach grasping means) teaches that the precondition is about to be achieved, but another method is used to teach that the precondition is about to be achieved, and the precondition is At least one of the approaches to the achievement of the specific condition after the achievement may be grasped, and the corresponding effect may be derived based on the grasped information. For example, an approach grasping detection sensor capable of detecting a game ball passing near the special safe hole 481b and the vicinity of the safe hole 481 of the fourth sorting device 480 is provided, and a sound effect is generated based on the detection of the detection sensor. (The closer it is, the louder the sound is), and the light emitting mode of the illumination or the like (guide light emitting unit 483 or the like) may be changed. In this case, it is possible to excite the situation with an accurate effect, and it is possible to relatively improve the effect.

(Third Embodiment)
Hereinafter, the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 51 and the like, focusing on the characteristic portion. In the third embodiment, on the back side of the display unit of the decorative symbol display device 42 (see FIG. 4), which is a transmissive liquid crystal display device, the probability variation mode (privilege) as shown in FIG. A lottery unit 801 is provided as a lottery means for performing a lottery. By making the display portion of the decorative symbol display device 42 transparent, the lottery unit 801 can be visually recognized from the front.

The lottery unit 801 includes a dice member 802 as a substantially cubic displacement means, a lottery table 803 on which the dice member 802 is installed, an operation device 804 for operating (shaking) the dice member 802, and a dice member 802. A left-right adjustment device 805 capable of adjusting the left-right position, a front-rear adjustment device 806 capable of adjusting the front-rear position of the dice member 802, and an orientation grasping sensor 807 as a reading means for grasping the orientation of the dice member 802 are provided. There is.

The operating device 804 includes a first pressing portion 808 and a second pressing portion 809 provided so as to appear and disappear upward from the lottery table 803. The first pressing portion 808 has a substantially square shape in a plan view, and the second pressing portion 809 has a square frame shape surrounding the first pressing portion 808 in a plan view. In the reference posture of the first pressing portion 808 and the second pressing portion 809, the upper surface thereof is substantially flush with the upper surface of the lottery table 803. Further, by arranging the dice member 802 at the reference position, the first pressing portion 808 and the second pressing portion 809 are positioned below the dice member 802.

Further, also in the third embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment, the second variable winning device 32b is provided in the right portion of the variable display device unit 35 (see FIG. 4), but the second special ball entry portion 145b is provided. The probability change mode is not given only when the game ball enters. Instead, an interlocking mechanism 810 for interlocking the game ball that has entered the second special entry portion 145b and the first pressing portion 808 is provided, and when the game ball enters the second special entry portion 145b, The first pressing portion 808 is displaced upward via the interlocking mechanism 810.

Further, a first motion detection sensor 811 for detecting the displacement of the first pressing portion 808 is provided, and based on the detection of the first motion detection sensor 811, an electric drive means (motor, solenoid, etc.) (not shown) is provided. The second pressing portion 809 is designed to be displaced upward. That is, the dice member 802 is shaped so as to be pushed upward by the first pressing portion 808 and the second pressing portion 809 and float in the air. The operation of the first pressing portion 808 depends on the momentum of the game ball that has entered the second special entry portion 145b, and is not uniform. The operation of the second pressing portion 809 is constant, and a force for floating the dice member 802 in the air is stably applied. However, since the operation of the first pressing portion 808 precedes, the dice member 802 is moved to the dice member 802. The degree of action of the force of is not uniform. Therefore, the randomness of the operation of the dice member 802 occurs. The first pressing portion 808 is displaced upward and then returns to its original position by its own weight. Further, in this example, the second pressing unit 809 is operated once upward based on the detection of the first motion detection sensor 811, but the second pressing unit 809 may be operated up and down a plurality of times.

The left-right adjusting device 805 is provided in pairs on both the left and right sides of the dice member 802, and is configured to be slidable in the left-right direction by driving and controlling a motor (not shown). When operating the dice member 802, the distance between the pair of left / right adjusting devices 805 is more than twice the width of the dice member 802, and the dice member 802 is allowed to roll. On the other hand, when adjusting the position and orientation of the dice member 802 after operation, the pair of left / right adjusting devices 805 are brought close to each other so that the distance between the pair of left / right adjusting devices 805 is the distance of the dice member 802. Displace relatively slowly until slightly wider than the width. After that, the left / right adjustment device 805 opens left and right and returns to the original position.

The front-rear adjusting device 806 is provided behind the dice member 802, and is configured to be slidable in the front-rear direction by driving and controlling a motor (not shown). In front of the dice member 802 (the frontmost part of the lottery table 803), an upset portion (not shown) provided so as to appear and disappear above the lottery table 803 is provided. When operating the dice member 802, the abutment portion is in a state of protruding upward, and the front-rear adjusting device 806 takes a distance of at least twice the width of the dice member 802 from the abutment portion. On the other hand, when adjusting the position and orientation of the dice member 802 after the operation, the front-rear adjustment device 806 protrudes forward from the time when the movements of the left-right adjustment device 805 approaching each other are almost completed, and the dice are projected forward. It looks like pushing the member 802 forward. After that, the front-rear adjusting device 806 retracts and returns to the original position, and the countersunk portion is immersed in the lottery table 803.

Further, in the dice member 802, an RFID tag (for example, a passive tag) having information indicating a number on each outer surface is embedded corresponding to the central portion of each outer surface. On the other hand, the orientation grasping sensor 807 is provided corresponding to the wall portion (not shown) that divides the area above and behind the area where the dice member 802 is displaced, and the position and orientation of the dice member 802 can be adjusted left and right. After adjustment by the device 805 and the front-rear adjusting device 806, the number of rolls on the front surface of the dice member 802 is grasped by reading the RFID tags on the rear surface and the upper surface of the dice member 802. The function of grasping the outcome of the dice member 802 constitutes the determination means. Further, a metal piece may be embedded in the central portion of the dice member 802 to make it difficult to read an unintended RFID tag.

The jackpot state of "8RN" in this embodiment is one pattern, and in the sixth round of the jackpot state of "8RN", the second variable winning device 32b is opened, and the other jackpot states of "8RN" are in the open state. In the round, the first variable winning device 32a is opened. In the first variable winning device 32a of the present embodiment, the first special ball winning portion 145a is omitted, and even if a game ball is inserted into the first variable winning device 32a, the probability variation mode is given. Absent.

In the sixth round of the jackpot state of "8RN", the second variable winning device 32b is opened and the second special ball entry portion 145b is opened, and the second special ball entry detection switch 223b is detected. When it is broken, the second opening / closing member 143b is set to the regulated position, and the second special ball entry portion 145b is set to the closed state. Further, based on the detection of the second special ball entry detection switch 223b, a winning mode determination lottery for determining the outcome of the dice member 802 corresponding to the winning in which the probability variation mode is given is performed.

After that, the range including the central portion of the display unit of the decorative symbol display device 42 is switched to the transparent state, the lottery unit 801 is visually recognized, and the range including the outer periphery of the display portion of the decorative symbol display device 42 is included. The result of the winning mode determination lottery, that is, the display that teaches the winning result of the dice member is derived. Then, as described above, the game ball that has entered the second special entry portion 145b pushes up the first pressing portion 808 via the interlocking mechanism 810, and the displacement of the first pressing portion 808 triggers electricity. The dice member 802 rolls when the second pressing portion 809 is displaced upward by the driving means.

When the stop of the dice member 802 is confirmed based on the detection information of the orientation grasping sensor 807, the position of the dice member 802 in the left-right direction is adjusted by the left-right adjustment device 805 as described above, and the front-rear adjustment device 806 adjusts the position and the like in the left-right direction. The position of the dice member 802 in the front-rear direction and the like are adjusted (the position of the dice member 802 may be adjusted by the left-right adjustment device 805 and the front-rear adjustment device 806 after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of fluctuation of the dice member 802). .. The function of determining the stop of the dice member 802 based on the detection information of the orientation grasping sensor 807 constitutes the stop determination means. Further, the left-right adjusting device 805 and the front-rear adjusting device 806 form a displacement limiting means.

After that, in a state where the left / right adjusting device 805 and the front / rear adjusting device 806 and the dice member 802 are substantially in contact with each other, the orientation grasping sensor 807 grasps the roll on the front surface of the dice member 802. Then, when the left / right adjusting device 805 and the front / rear adjusting device 806 are separated from the dice member 802 and the roll on the front surface of the dice member 802 grasped by the orientation grasping sensor 807 matches the winning roll, the probability change mode (For example, the same setting as in the case of turning on the second special ball entry flag of the first embodiment is performed, and the decorative symbol display device 42 displays a display that teaches the addition of the probability variation mode. Make settings for derivation).

In the fifth round of the jackpot state of "8RN", the decorative symbol display device 42 opens the second variable winning device 32b in the next round, so when a game ball is inserted there, the probability change mode is set. A guidance display is derived to the effect that the probability variation grant lottery for whether or not to be granted is performed, and that the probability variation grant lottery becomes invalid when the pachinko machine 10 is vibrated. In the sixth round, the fraud alert level is increased by using the detection information of the vibration detecting means provided at a plurality of places such as the back surface side of the game board 30. Normally, when the vibration detection means is detected, a caution display is derived, and if multiple vibration detection means detect multiple times within a certain period of time, it is determined to be an error state and error processing is performed. Do. In the 6th round, the sensitivity is higher than other vibration detecting means, and the warning display is derived by the detection of the special vibration detecting means which is not normally referred to, and then the vibration detection including the special vibration detecting means is derived within a certain period of time. When the means is detected once more, it is determined to be an error state and error processing is performed. In addition, a magnetic detection means capable of detecting magnetism is provided corresponding to the area where the dice member 802 is installed, and fraudulent acts using magnetism can be suppressed.

The method of displacing the dice member 802 is not particularly limited. The dice member 802 may be operated by using only the mechanical energy of the game ball that has entered the second variable winning device 32b, but it is basically difficult (if the dice member 802 is light and small, it can be moved, but the dice). It is conceivable that the member 802 will be difficult to see), and it is desirable to use (combined with) a power means that operates using electricity. However, the operation of the power means, the way in which the force of the power means is transmitted to the dice member 802, and the like are configured to be different depending on the momentum and timing of the game ball that has entered the second variable winning device 32b. For example, the wind is blown from the blowing means to the dice member 802 based on the entry into the second special entry section 145b, but depending on the momentum of the game ball entering the second special entry section 145b. Therefore, the position and size of the outlet at which the air sent from the blower means is blown toward the dice member 802 is changed (the lottery table has a grid pattern, and the shape differs between the lottery table and the blower means. A rotary plate provided with a plurality of outlets may be provided, and the rotary plate may be configured to rotate and displace in conjunction with a game ball that has entered the second special ball entry portion 145b).

As described above, in the third embodiment, the probability variation granting lottery for whether or not to grant the probability variation mode after the end of the jackpot state is performed by displacing the dice member 802 during the jackpot state, and depending on the stop mode of the dice member 802. , The result (win / fail) of the probabilistic grant lottery is decided. Therefore, it is possible to watch the progress from the start of the probability variation granting lottery to the finalization, and it is possible to predict the stop mode of the dice member 802 and enjoy it. In particular, as compared with, for example, a random number generating means is used to perform a probability variation granting lottery to teach the result of a probability variation granting lottery that has already been determined, the method of stopping the dice member 802 is different from the method of displacement of the dice member 802. You can enjoy the process of the probability variation grant lottery itself, such as being able to narrow down the pattern to some extent and making it easier to predict the stop timing of the dice member 802 from a stage shortly before the stop.

Further, in the third embodiment, the game ball that has entered the second special entry portion 145b and the first pressing portion 808 for displacing the dice member 802 are mechanically interlocked via the interlocking mechanism 810. The displacement amount of the dice member 802 changes according to the speed of the game ball that has reached the second special ball entry portion 145b. Therefore, the displacement amount of the dice member 802 can be made random, and the result of the probability variation granting lottery can be made random. Therefore, in the probability variation granting lottery using the dice member 802, the result of the probability variation granting lottery can be predicted at the speed of the game ball entering the second special ball entry unit 145b, or the player can enter the probability variation granting lottery. It is possible to reliably impart new playability such as intentionally aiming to bring the game ball to the second special entry portion 145b at a speed that is considered to be easy to win.

Further, prior to the probability variation granting lottery, a winning mode determination lottery for determining the mode of the dice member 802 corresponding to the winning in the probability variation granting lottery is performed. Therefore, the mode of the dice member 802 that wins the probability variation granting lottery is not uniform, and is changed according to the result of the winning mode determination lottery. Therefore, for example, by adjusting the momentum of the game ball to be entered into the second variable winning device 32b, it is possible to prevent the dice member 802 from making adjustments such as making it easier to win in the probability variation granting lottery. , Any player can proceed with the game relatively equally.

In addition, the winning mode determination lottery is performed based on the detection of the second special ball entry detection switch 223b that detects the game ball that has entered the second special ball entry section 145b, and the result of the winning mode determination lottery is the dice. It is taught before the member 802 is stopped (basically, it is taught from a stage before the displacement of the dice member 802). For this reason, the dice member corresponding to the winning is suppressed as much as possible from being suspected that the mode of the dice member 802 corresponding to the winning is decided based on the result of the probability variation granting lottery and the prediction of the result. While grasping the aspect of 802, you can enjoy the game of watching the displacement of the dice member 802.

Further, when it is determined that the dice member 802 is in a state corresponding to a stop, a left / right adjusting device 805 and a front-rear adjusting device 806 that come into contact with the dice member 802 to limit the displacement of the dice member 802 are provided. Further, after the displacement of the dice member 802 is restricted by the left / right adjusting device 805 and the front / rear adjusting device 806, the roll of the front surface of the dice member 802 is determined based on the detection information of the orientation grasping sensor 807. ..

By adopting such a configuration, for example, it seemed that the dice member 802 stopped and the result of the probability variation granting lottery was confirmed, but the dice member 802 was inadvertently displaced, and the result of the probability variation granting lottery. It is possible to prevent a situation in which is changed. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the aspect (roll) of the dice member 802 and the result of the probability variation grant lottery based on the determination of the roll of the dice member 802 based on the detection information of the orientation grasping sensor 807 are inconsistent. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of troubles. Further, for example, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the result of the probability variation granting lottery changes due to an act such as shaking the pachinko machine 10 by the player. In addition, it is possible for the player to easily understand that the dice member 802 is stopped and the result of the probability variation granting lottery is confirmed. Further, the left / right adjusting device 805 and the front / rear adjusting device 806 can adjust the posture and position of the stopped dice member 802 within a range in which the result of the probability variation granting lottery does not change, which facilitates the determination by the orientation grasping sensor 807. (It is possible to make an accurate and quick judgment), and it is possible to avoid a situation in which the player is confused about the judgment.

Further, an RFID tag is embedded in the dice member 802 corresponding to each outer surface, and the orientation grasping sensor 807 reads the RFID tag and determines the mode of the dice member 802 based on the information of the RFID tag. Therefore, for example, the mode of the dice member 802 can be determined more accurately and quickly than when a camera or the like is used to determine the outcome of the dice member 802. Further, even if the surface of the dice member 802 is damaged due to aged use or the display mode becomes difficult to recognize due to wear or the like, if the RFID tag (and the orientation grasping sensor 807) is not damaged, the probability variation granting lottery will be held. The result can be surely grasped. In addition, a dice member 802 that is not connected to the main body side of the lottery unit 801 at all (there is no structure such as an arm to be linked, wiring, etc.) can be used for the lottery. The degree of freedom in designing the lottery unit 801 can be improved.

In addition, a vibration detecting means for detecting the vibration of the pachinko machine 10 is provided, and error processing is performed when the vibration detecting means is detected in a state where the dice member 802 is displaced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the dice member 802 from being illegally displaced. Further, if the dice member 802 is not displaced, the pachinko machine 10 is configured so as not to be in an error state in consideration of the possibility that the player has hit the pachinko machine 10 unintentionally. It is possible to reduce the trouble of the persons concerned such as the installed game hall. However, regarding the detection of vibration, it is desirable that the detection information be output from the pachinko machine 10 to a computer or the like in the game hall.

Further, when the second special entry detection switch 223b is detected in the open state of the second special entry section 145b, the second opening / closing member 143b is set as the regulated position and the second special entry section 145b is set. It is closed. Therefore, for example, in a situation where it is highly likely that the dice member 802 will be won in the probability variation grant lottery, another game ball enters the second special entry section 145b and the dice member 802 is entered. It is possible to avoid a situation in which the dice begin to displace vigorously again, which may lead to a decline in interest.

In the third embodiment, when the game ball enters the second special ball entry portion 145b of the second variable winning device 32b (to achieve a specific condition), the dice member 802 (displacement means) is displaced, and the dice member Whether or not the probability change mode (privilege) is given is determined (lottery) by the result of 802. Here, a lottery is performed by achieving the specific conditions, a privilege advantageous to the player is given by winning the lottery, and the lottery means for performing the lottery displaces the lottery area based on the achievement of the specific conditions. The configuration in which the displacement means is provided and the result of the lottery is determined based on the stop mode in the lottery area of the displacement means or the discharge pattern from the lottery area is not particularly limited, and can be appropriately applied. ..

For example, when the small hit state is won among the big hit state and the small hit state based on the entry of the game ball into the second start winning device 33b, the second variable winning device 32b is set for a specified time (for example, 1.8 seconds). ), The specified number of times (for example, once) is opened, and when the game ball enters the second special ball entry portion 145b of the second variable winning device 32b, the right of the jackpot state is granted and the pseudo ball is released. Even if it is derived to the lottery area and rolls around the lottery area to some extent, the ball enters the second ball entry section instead of the first ball entry section and is discharged from the lottery area to give a probability variation mode. Good. Further, for example, in the jackpot state, the second variable winning device 32b is opened and the second special winning portion 145b is given a plurality of opportunities to enter the ball, and the game ball enters the second special entering portion 145. By making a ball, the right to displace the dice member 802 only once per round is given, and at the start of the jackpot state, the combination of the dice member 802 that is given the probability variation mode by deriving is taught. The probability variation mode may be provided by deriving the outcome of the combination of dice members 802 during the jackpot state.

As described above, the lottery is performed by displacing the displacement means, and the result (whether or not) of the lottery is determined by the stopping mode of the displacement means or the discharge pattern from the lottery area. Therefore, it is possible to watch the progress from the start of the lottery to the finalization, and it is possible to predict the behavior of the displacement means and enjoy it. In particular, compared to, for example, a lottery using a random number generating means and an effect of teaching the result of a lottery that has already been decided, it is possible to narrow down the development of the behavior of the displacement means to some extent from the way of displacement of the displacement means. You can enjoy the process of the lottery itself, such as grasping the timing when the result of the displacement means comes out shortly before that.

In addition, instead of the pseudo ball of the above-described embodiment, a game ball that has entered the second special entry portion 145b may be used. Further, for example, a game ball that has entered the second special ball entry portion 145b of the second variable winning device 32b is guided to the lottery area, and the game ball imitates a bowling pin installed in the lottery area. It may be configured so that the probability change mode is given according to the number of defeats.

Further, in the third embodiment, first, whether or not to open the second variable winning device 32b (to generate a jackpot state in which the second variable winning device 32b is opened) is determined by the start winning device 33a, It is performed by a winning / failing lottery based on the entry into 33b and a type lottery (the first lottery by software based on the first opportunity), and when the lottery is won, the second special entry section 145b of the second variable winning device 32b It is possible to put the game ball into the ball (a specific condition can be achieved as the second opportunity), and the dice member 802 is based on the fact that the game ball is put into the second special ball entry unit 145b (the second opportunity). A lottery (second lottery as a lottery) is executed using the lottery unit 801 (lottery means) equipped with the above, and when the lottery is won, a probability change mode (privilege) is given. That is, by making the first lottery software, it is possible to make the probability that the privilege is given appropriate while avoiding the complicated configuration of the lottery means. Further, by using the software in the first stage, the burden on the lottery means can be reduced and deterioration and the like can be suppressed.

In addition, in the third embodiment, the displacement means is provided with a displacement determining means (direction grasping sensor 807) capable of discriminating between a state in which the displacement means is displaced in the lottery area and a state other than that, and the displacement means is stopped. However, for example, it is not confirmed that the displacement means has stopped, and the displacement means is specified after a specified time after the displacement of the displacement means is started. The means for resting as a posture (left-right adjusting device 805) may be configured to stand still as a prescribed posture regardless of whether the displacement means is stopped or displaced after the specified time, and to determine the stopping mode. However, by waiting for the displacement means to stop with the displacement determination means, the lottery by the lottery means can be enjoyed more, and the sense of fairness is improved as compared with the case of forcibly stopping, for example (suspicion that it is match-fixing). Can be suppressed). In addition, it is possible to quickly recognize whether or not it is the timing to judge and teach the result of the lottery using the displacement means and move to the next process, or the vibration of the gaming machine or the like is illegal in the displacement state of the displacement means. The period for monitoring the behavior can be set appropriately.

In the third embodiment, it is desirable to provide a reset means capable of resetting the lottery area to the initial state. That is, the state of the lottery unit 801 when starting the lottery by the lottery unit 801 may be such that the dice member 802 is in a predetermined position and the predetermined surface faces the front of the pachinko machine 10. , When the specified surface of the dice member 802 (for example, the surface of the roll of "1") is desired to be in the initial posture facing the front of the pachinko machine 10 at the start of business of the amusement park or when an error occurs. Convenience can be improved.

A plurality of members used as the displacement means may be provided, and the members used as the displacement means may be interchangeably configured. For example, in the lottery unit 801 of the third embodiment, a storage unit for storing three dice members 802 up and down is provided on the back side of the area where the dice member 802 rolls (lottery area), and the lottery of the dice member 802 ends. And the dice member 802 is collected from above the lottery table 803 (lottery area) to the upper part of the storage unit, and when the lottery is started, one dice member 802 is taken out from the lower part of the storage unit to the lottery area and the lottery is performed. It may be configured to be performed. In this case, deterioration of the member used as the displacement means can be suppressed.

There may be a first lottery state in which the result of the lottery by the displacement means tends to be the first result, and a second lottery state in which the result of the lottery by the displacement means tends to be a second result more favorable to the player than the first result. For example, after the pseudo ball rolls into the lottery area, it is more advantageous for the player to enter the second entry section than to enter the first entry section, and the second By being in the lottery state, a part or all of the first ball entry portion may be covered with the movable covering means so that the ball can easily enter the second ball entry portion. In this way, by changing the state between the first lottery state and the second lottery state, it is possible to add a large inflection to the game.

In addition, in the winning / failing lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting winning device 33a and the type lottery, when the big hit state is won (for example, 1/259), the big hit state is obtained by the lottery by the dice member 802. There is a case of winning (when winning a small hit state, for example, 1/259), and in the winning / failing lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting winning device 33b and the type lottery, the big hit state is won. There is no case, and it may be configured to win only in the small hit state. In addition, there may be a case where a big hit state is won in a winning / losing lottery based on the entry of a game ball into the second start winning device 33b and a type lottery, but the entry of a game ball into the second starting winning device 33b. The probability of a small hit state is increased in the state where is allowed, and the small hit state (when winning the small hit state, for example, 1/29) before most of them become the big hit state (for example, 1/259). May be configured to win. Further, instead of the lottery using the dice member 802, the game ball is inserted into a specific area provided inside the second variable winning device 32b where the game ball can roll, and the game area is the specific ball entry portion. It may be decided whether or not to make a (probability change) jackpot state depending on whether or not to enter the ball. In the specific area of the second variable winning device 32b, a detection switch that detects a game ball that has entered the specific area (a prize ball is performed based on this detection) and a discharge that discharges the game ball from the specific area. At the entrance of the lottery area and the lottery area where the game ball is rolled and a lottery is performed such as whether the game ball enters the specific entry part or the non-specific entry part. In the open state of the second variable winning device 32b, one game ball that has entered the second variable winning device 32b can be stopped, and the second variable winning device 32b is closed. It is also possible to provide a stop guidance means for guiding the stopped game ball to the lottery area at the time. It should be noted that a plurality of game balls may be stopped by the stop guidance means, or the stop guidance means may be omitted. Further, in the small hit state, the winning probability may be the same in both the high probability state and the low probability state.

Further, even if a decorative symbol display device composed of a liquid crystal display device or the like is provided, the decorative symbol display device can be configured to teach or suggest the result of the winning / failing lottery in parallel with the lottery of the dice member 802. Good.

Further, it is possible to see through the rear region by arranging a transmissive liquid crystal display device, an EL display device, or a polarizing plate in the region including the front of the lottery unit 801 to change the visibility of the dice member 802. However, a grid-like, translucent, or surface-treated shutter such as frosted glass, which reduces visibility, can appear and disappear in the area including the front of the lottery unit 801 (positioned in front or on the side). When the lottery of the dice member 802 is performed, the visibility of the dice member 802 is reduced by the means for changing the degree of visibility until the lottery of the dice member 802 is completed, and the decoration is provided. The symbol display device may be configured to teach the result of the lottery of the dice member 802 (the lottery result of the dice member 802 is grasped and the effect display corresponding to the result is performed) (decorative symbol display device or lottery unit). At least one of the 801s is configured to be movable so that, for example, the decorative symbol display device can appear in the front area of the lottery unit 801). Further, instead of the configuration in which the result of the lottery of the dice member 802 is taught by the decorative symbol display device, a movable accessory or the like (for example, a plurality of pseudo game balls) that can be realized by controlling the final mode is determined. It is derived to the rolling region where the holes are provided, and the plurality of holes are provided with opening / closing plates, which are inconvenient holes (holes corresponding to the hit of the off situation, or out of the hit situation). The result of the lottery of the dice member 802 may be taught (there is also a pattern) by configuring so that the pseudo game ball does not enter the corresponding hole). By adopting the above configuration, it is possible to improve the performance and diversify the production.

The content is not limited to the description of the above-described embodiment, and may be implemented as follows, for example.

(A; Benefits, Conditions for Granting Benefits) In the first embodiment, one game ball enters the second special ball entry portion 145b of the second variable winning device 32b in the jackpot state, or the first variable winning device. It is configured so that the right to be granted the probability variation mode after the end of the jackpot state can be obtained on condition that three game balls enter the first special entry portion 145a of the device 32a. Not limited. For example, the probability variation mode is given by two game balls entering the second special entry section 145b (or the distinction between the probability variation jackpot and the normal jackpot is eliminated), and the second variable winning is achieved. When the device 32b is long open, the second special ball entry portion 145b (second distribution device 149b) is not opened, and like the first variable winning device 32a, when the short is opened, the second special entry section 145b is entered. By enabling the sphere, the configuration may be such that the possibility that the probability variation mode is not given is slightly increased. Further, the probability variation mode is given by the game ball entering the second special ball entry section 145b a specified number of times, and the first special entry section 145a of the first variable winning device 32a is omitted. The first variable winning device 32a may be configured so that the probability variation mode is not given even if the game ball enters the first variable winning device 32a (the first variable winning device 32a is a variable winning device dedicated to the winning ball).

Further, in the configuration in which the probability variation mode is not provided (there is no change in the jackpot probability) and the mode shifts to the time reduction mode or the normal mode after the jackpot ends, "giving the time reduction mode" is set to the first special entry section 145a. Provisions for game balls to the game It may be a "privilege" according to multiple hits.

Further, for example, when it is determined in the winning / failing lottery that the jackpot state is not won (neither the first winning / failing flag nor the second winning / failing flag is set to ON), it is determined whether or not to win the small hit state, and the small hit is determined. When the state is won, the first variable winning device 32a is opened, for example, 1.8 seconds each, four times with a closed state of 0.5 seconds to 3 seconds, and the first sorting device 149a is small. 80% of the game balls that have entered the first variable winning device 32a during the hit state perform an operation that allows the ball to enter the first special entry portion 145a, and the first special entry portion 145a is performed during the small hit state. The probability variation mode may be given when the game ball is inserted into the ball four times, for example. Here, a jackpot state may be generated instead of assigning the probability variation mode. In addition, it is desirable to explain the small hit state (guidance display) during the opening period of the small hit state, and to teach and suggest the open state of the first variable winning device 32a.

In the first embodiment, the second variable winning device 32b is entered into the second variable winning device 32b without being divided into the second special winning portion 145b and the second non-special winning portion 146b as the internal structure of the second variable winning device 32b. The ball is discharged from the common discharge hole to the outside of the game area (a second entry count switch 226b is provided on the upstream side or the downstream side of the discharge hole, and when the game ball is detected, the prize ball is ejected. It may be configured as (a variable winning device dedicated to a prize ball). When the second variable winning device 32b is dedicated to the winning ball, the second variable winning device 32b is basically opened except for the jackpot round that allows the ball to enter the first special winning section 145a. It may be configured as follows. For example, in the case of a 15-round probability variation jackpot, in the first round, the first variable winning device 32a is opened for a maximum of about 29 seconds, and then the second variable winning device 32b is 0.1 with a slight interval. It is opened twice for a second with a slight interval, and in each of the 2nd to 15th rounds, the 2nd variable winning device 32b is opened for a maximum of about 29.5 seconds, and in the case of a normal jackpot for 15 rounds. In the first round, the first variable winning device 32a is opened twice with a slight interval for a maximum of 0.1 seconds, and then the second variable winning device 32b is opened with a slight interval. The second variable winning device 32b may be opened for about 29.5 seconds at the maximum in each of the second round to the fifteenth round.

Further, it is also possible to omit the second variable winning device 32b. Further, regarding the probability variation mode, the upper limit of the number of fluctuations may be set (for example, the transition to the normal mode may be performed by performing the variation display 10 times in the probability variation mode). Further, the arrangement and number of the first start winning device 33a, the second starting winning device 33b, the through gate 34, the variable winning devices 32a, 32b and the like are not particularly limited, and can be appropriately arranged for each model.

Further, in the first embodiment, there are a plurality of types of benefits (the game mode that shifts after the jackpot state ends is different, the number of rounds in the jackpot state is different, etc.), and a specific period (one time of the first variable winning device 32a) Until the game ball that has entered the first variable winning device 32a at the time of opening is discharged from the first variable winning device 32a, the game ball is placed in the first special entry section at any time during the jackpot state (such as a specific round in the jackpot state). The privilege to be granted may be determined according to the number of times the 145a is reached (the privilege may be configured to be different). For example, if the number of times the game ball reaches the first special ball entry portion 145a in a specific period is 2 times or less, the mode shifts to the normal mode after the jackpot state, and if 3 or 4 times, the time shortening mode shifts to the time reduction mode after the jackpot state ends. If it is 5 times or more, it may be configured to shift to the probability change mode after the jackpot state ends. In this case, the playability for a specific period can be further improved.

The pachinko machines 10 of the first embodiment and the second embodiment are also provided with vibration detecting means and timing detecting means, and the warning level by detecting the vibration detecting means for detecting vibration can be set in a plurality of stages. May be good. For example, the state in which the game ball exists inside (specific area) of the first variable winning device 32a of the first embodiment and the central unit 471 of the second embodiment has smaller vibration than the state in which it does not exist. It is considered that the vibration is detected in the above state (error state), and the warning mode may be derived by the decorative symbol display device 42 or voice. As a state to raise the alert level, a state in which a game ball can exist in a specific area (a state in which the game ball can exist in a specific area after the specific area is opened, instead of a state in which the game ball exists in a specific area). If there is no game ball, the specific area may be closed, or if the game ball exists in the specific area, the game ball may not exist in the specific area). In addition, when the alert level is raised, the error state can be resolved by a player involved in the amusement park performing a release operation, and when the alert level is normal, the error status is resolved after a specified time. It may be possible (in the case of frequent frequency, large vibration, etc., automatic elimination may not be possible).

In the error state of transition such as detecting vibration, the lottery of the lottery means is invalidated. Further, the error state may be configured so as not to be resolved unless a person involved in the game hall performs a corresponding operation, or may be configured to be automatically resolved after a specified time from the detection of vibration or the like. , Depending on the degree of detection of vibration, magnetic force, etc. (for example, make it possible to detect the magnitude of vibration, make it possible to measure the length and number of vibrations, and judge whether it exceeds or does not exceed the specified threshold value) It may be configured to be divided into a case where the problem is solved by and a case where the problem is not solved automatically. It should be noted that the countermeasures against fraudulent acts using magnetism may be similarly configured.

In the above embodiment, even after a predetermined number (three) of game balls are entered into the first special entry portion 145a during the jackpot state and the right of the probability variation mode is granted, the first distribution is performed in advance. Regarding the period in which the device 149a is in the open state, the first distribution device 149a is configured to be in the open state (the number of game balls exceeding the specified number is the first special entry ball). Even if the ball enters the section 145a, a separate privilege is not given), and a specified number (three) of game balls are entered into the first special entry section 145a during the jackpot state. After that, the first sorting device 149a may be configured to be closed. After a specified number of game balls have been entered into the first special entry portion 145a during the jackpot state (three in the above example, but other than three, for example, even one is possible). Even if the first sorting device 149a is set to the open state, whether or not to give the probability variation mode is the number of game balls that have entered the first special entry section 145a at the end of the jackpot. Since it is performed by confirming whether or not the value of the first special ball entry counter that counts is equal to or more than the specified number (for notification that the player is given the probability variation mode, the main control device 261 informs the player. The sub-control device 262 is executed when the first special entry command indicating that the ball has entered the first special entry section 145a is sent three times), and no particular problem occurs.

Further, for example, the process based on the detection of the first special ball entry detection switch 223a is changed before and after the specified number of game balls are entered into the first special ball entry unit 145a during the jackpot state. It may be configured to be (different). That is, for example, when a probability variation acquisition flag indicating that a specified number of game balls have been entered is provided and the first special entry detection switch 223a is detected, the probability variation acquisition flag is off. In that case, that is, until a specified number of game balls are entered into the first special entry unit 145a during the jackpot state, the addition process of the first special entry counter is performed (a subtraction method may be used). ), Check whether the value of the 1st special entry counter is the value indicating the specified value, and if the value of the 1st special entry counter is the value indicating the specified value, turn on the probability variation acquisition flag. (The probability change acquisition flag is turned off after setting the probability change mode at the end of the jackpot state). The first special ball entry command is not output every time the first special ball entry detection switch 223a is detected, but a command indicating that the probability variation acquisition flag is set to ON is output. Further, when the first special ball entry detection switch 223a is detected and the probability variation acquisition flag is on, the first special ball entry counter is not counted (subtraction of the first ball entry counter). Do).

Further, in the above embodiment, the game ball is given (prize ball) based on the detection of the first ball entry count switch 226a, but the first special ball entry detection switch 223a and the first non-ball entry detection switch 223a are used. The game ball may be given (prize ball) based on the detection of the special ball entry detection switch 222a.

(B; Special Area and Specific Area) In the first embodiment, the first special area of the first variable winning device 32a is a special area in which a privilege (probability variation mode) can be obtained by reaching the game ball a specified number of times. The ball entry unit 145a is adopted. For example, although the ball entry unit is provided in the first specific area 141a, the ball entry unit is discharged to the outside of the game area (first specific area 141a). Instead, a special area may be formed by a gate portion through which the game ball can pass (existing in the first specific area 141a even after passing), or even if there is no clear division or the like, the game ball abuts or The area that can be detected by the detection means (switch or sensor) that detects proximity may be a special area.

In addition, the configuration of the specific area (first specific area 141a) in which the special area is provided is not particularly limited and can be changed as appropriate. For example, if the first special ball entry portion 145a is in the open state, all the game balls that have entered the first variable winning device 32a may be configured to be able to enter the ball, or the first special entry section 145a may be open. Even in the state, the game ball may be configured to enter the first special entry portion 145a or not to enter the first special entry portion 145a. Further, for example, a plurality of routes for the game ball entered in the first variable winning device 32a to reach the first special entry section 145a are provided, and the time required to reach the first special entry section 145a and the first special entry section are provided. It may be configured so that the possibility of reaching the sphere is different. As in the above embodiment, the game ball provided with the first sorting device 149a and entered in the first specific area 141a may or may not enter the first special entry portion 145a. By having it, it is possible to increase the production opportunity.

(C; Relationship between the open state of the first variable winning device 32a and the allowable state of the first sorting device 149a) In the above first embodiment, when the first variable winning device 32a is slightly opened in the jackpot state of 8RS. At that time, even if the game ball enters the first variable winning device 32a, there is no possibility that the game ball enters the first special ball entry portion 145a (the first distribution device 149a as a switching means). Is not allowed in the first fake short), when the first variable winning device 32a is slightly opened in the jackpot state of 8RN, when the game ball enters the first variable winning device 32a at that time, the game ball Is highly likely to enter the first special ball entry unit 145a (the first short circuit in which the first distribution device 149a is allowed for the same period as the opening period of the first variable winning device 32a). However, the configuration is not particularly limited to this.

For example, corresponding to one opening period in which the first variable winning device 32a is opened in the jackpot state of 8RN (from the opening state to the closed state of the first variable winning device 32a). A period during which the ball can enter the first special ball entry unit 145a and a period during which the ball cannot enter may be provided. Further, even after the first variable winning device 32a is closed, the permissible state of the first sorting device 149a is continued for a predetermined period (after the first variable winning device 32a is closed, the first sorting device 149a It may be configured to be in a regulated state). That is, for example, in a jackpot round in which the first variable winning device 32a is opened for 2 seconds (a game ball enters the first special winning portion 145a from the entrance of the first variable winning device 32a and is the first. It takes about 0.5 seconds to be detected by the special ball entry detection switch 223a), and the first variable winning device 32a is opened 0.5 seconds to 1.5 seconds later. The first open pattern in which the 1 distribution device 149a is in the allowable state and the first distribution device 149a in the allowable state in the period from 1.5 seconds to 2.5 seconds after the first variable winning device 32a is in the open state. The second open pattern, which is said to be, the third pattern in which the first sorting device 149a is allowed in the period from when the first variable winning device 32a is opened until 2.8 seconds have elapsed, and the third pattern. The fourth open pattern in which the first sorting device 149a is allowed in the period of 1.0 to 1.5 seconds after the 1 variable winning device 32a is opened and the first variable winning device 32a are opened. The fifth open pattern in which the first sorting device 149a is in the allowable state and the first variable winning device 32a in the open state in the period of 2.0 seconds to 2.5 seconds after the state is set to 0. A sixth open pattern may be provided so that the first sorting device 149a is in an allowable state during the period until 5 seconds have elapsed.

In addition, when adopting such a configuration, the period in which the first sorting device 149a is in the permissible state may be taught or suggested by the decorative symbol display device 42 or the like as a notification means. Further, such teaching or suggestion is not always given, and there may be a case where it is given or a case where it is not given.

In the first embodiment, the first variable winning device 32a is provided with the first first sorting device 149a, but the first sorting device 149a is omitted and the first variable winning device 32a (first specific area). The game ball that has entered the 141a) may be configured to always enter the first special entry portion 145a, or the game ball that has entered the first variable winning device 32a (first specific area 141a) is always the first. 1 The ball may or may not enter the special ball entry portion 145a. Further, the first sorting device 149a does not change the state between the state where the ball is allowed to enter the first special ball entry section 145a and the state where the ball is restricted, but the game ball is moved to the first special ball entry section 145a. It may be configured to change the state between a state in which it is easy to enter the ball and a state in which it is difficult to enter the ball.

In a configuration in which the variable display of the special display devices 43a and 43b can be held and stored a plurality of times, the first start winning device 33a and the second start winning device 33b are arranged close to each other, and a game ball that moves in the game area. The game ball that has entered the entrance where the ball can enter is provided with a guiding means that can alternately (with high probability or almost always) guide the game ball that has entered the first start winning device 33a and the second starting winning device 33b. , Changes in the special display devices 43a and 43b When the number of pending displays is 0 to 7, the special display devices 43a and 43b are changed by inserting a game ball into the entrance (achieving a specific condition). When the display is suspended, the hold icon 461 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 in the normal manner, and the number of hold of the variable display of the special display devices 43a and 43b is eight, the start winning devices 33a and 33b By entering the game ball (achieving a specific condition), the variable display of the special display devices 43a and 43b is suspended, and the decorative symbol display device 42 corresponds to the variable display stored at that time. Regarding the hold icon 461, the mode of the hold display area 462 and the hold icon 461 may be configured to be displayed in a mode different from the usual mode. In this case, putting a game ball into the variable winning devices 33a and 33b corresponds to achieving a specific condition, and by holding another variable display, the mode of the hold icon 461 can be changed. That (7 holding) corresponds to the 1st condition, and holding 8 fluctuation displays in total for the 1st fluctuation display and the 2nd fluctuation display corresponds to the 2nd condition, until the fluctuation display is completed. Corresponds to a specific period. In addition, the number of times the mode of the hold icon 461 is changed is not limited to the hold upper limit, and may be a plurality of other times (the first condition may be achieved by one hold or by a plurality of holds. May be good).

Further, for example, the effect button 125 is used to teach or suggest predetermined information (for example, whether or not super reach occurs, whether or not a jackpot state occurs, whether or not a probability variation mode is given, etc.). It is a button effect that enables the effect button 125 to be operated a specified number of times or more during the button operation reception period of the button effect (the effect detection means for detecting the operation of the effect button 125 is detected a specified number of times or more). The configuration may be such that the predetermined information is taught or suggested based on the above. Further, in order to make the number of achievements of the first condition different, when the effect button 125 is operated, the interlocking corresponding to the first sensor is internally performed and the interlocking corresponding to the second sensor is performed. The first condition may be achieved by 10 times of detection, and the first condition may be achieved by the second sensor by one detection. .. In addition, for example, when the derivation of the continuous hit button effect in which a predetermined instruction is given is determined by operating the effect button 125 a predetermined number of times when determining the fluctuation pattern in the sub control device 262, the first stage (first step) by lottery. One of the specified times of 1 to 30 times corresponding to the 1-condition state) and 1 to 50 times corresponding to the 2nd stage (the 2nd condition state) is selected, and the first after the button repeated hitting production starts. The first teaching is performed by performing the specified number of operations during the valid period of the stage (in the case of normal reach, the teaching that does not develop into super reach is performed, and the second stage of the button repeated hitting effect is not performed). , When the development to super reach is taught in the first teaching, the second teaching indicating the jackpot expectation degree is given by performing the operation a specified number of times during the valid period of the second stage of the button repeated hitting effect. It may be configured to be used. In addition, the decorative pattern display device 42 is configured to shift to the super reach effect when the first teaching of the button repeated hitting effect is performed, and the second stage of the button repeated hitting effect is a hidden element of the game. Yes, a display that prompts the operation of the effect button 125 is not derived, but for example, if the effect button 125 is continuously pressed in the flow from the first stage of the button continuous effect effect, further suggestions of the result of the game are derived. It can increase the enjoyment for the player. The configuration for deriving a specific effect based on the operation of the effect button 125 as a hidden element of the game is not particularly limited. For example, a button that shifts to the second stage instead of performing the second teaching by operating the effect button 125 a specified number of times from the end of the first stage of the button repeated striking effect to the stop of the variable display. When setting the continuous striking effect, a lottery is performed at what timing after the end of the first stage of the continuous striking effect to enable the operation of the effect button 125 as the operation of the second stage of the continuous striking effect (for example, the first stage). 1 second to 5 seconds after the end, 5 seconds to 8 seconds, 8 seconds to 10 seconds, 10 seconds to 11 seconds, 8 seconds to 13 seconds The second teaching may be performed by operating the effect button 125 during the selected period (any of the latter is selected).

Further, for example, there is a super reach effect in which a button effect for operating the effect button 125 is interposed a plurality of times in the effect variable display of the decorative symbol display device 42 performed in response to the variable display of the special display devices 43a and 43b. A predetermined effect is derived based on the operation of the effect button 125 (or by lottery based on the operation of the effect button 125) at the opportunity of each button effect of the reach effect (all or a specified number of times or more). (If the lottery is won), a special effect may be derived at the last button effect opportunity. That is, the button effect A (the effect display expands well) is derived in response to the first button effect of the predetermined variable display (by operating the effect button 125), and in response to the second button effect. When button effect B (effect display develops well) is derived and button effect C (effect display develops well) is derived corresponding to the third button effect, it corresponds to the fourth button effect. The button effect D that teaches the jackpot is derived, and the button effects A to C (the button effects A to C may have multiple patterns instead of one pattern) are derived in the first to third button effects, respectively. If not, the button effect D may not be derived even if the jackpot is taught. In a configuration in which it is also determined whether or not the probability variation mode is granted by the winning / failing lottery, the instruction on whether or not the probability variation mode is granted when the button effect D is derived, the jackpot probability, etc. The setting may be suggested or taught in a configuration that can be set (if the button effect D is not derived, it may not be taught or it is difficult to be taught).

In addition, the first open / close type ball entry device, the second open / close type ball entry device, and the second open / close type ball entry device, which can change the state between the open state in which the game ball moving in the game area can enter and the closed state in which the ball cannot enter, and A third openable / closable ball entry device is provided, and an actuating ball entry device capable of constantly entering a game ball moving in the game area is provided, and when the game ball enters the actuated ball entry device, it is interlocked with the game ball. When the first opening / closing interlocking member opens the first opening / closing interlocking device and the game ball enters the first opening / closing interlocking device, the first closing interlocking member interlocking with the game ball is the first. The open / close type ball entry device is closed, and the second open / close interlocking member interlocking with the game ball entered into the first open / close type ball entry device opens the second open / close type ball entry device, and the second open / close type. When a game ball enters the ball entry device, the second closing interlocking member interlocking with the game ball closes the second opening / closing type entry device and enters the second opening / closing type entry device. When the third open interlocking member linked to the game ball opens the second open / close type ball entry device and the game ball enters the third open / close type ball entry device, the third close interlocking member linked to the game ball is interlocked. The member may be configured to close the third open / close type ball entry device. Here, the privilege given to the player differs depending on whether the game ball enters the first and second opening / closing type entry devices and the game ball enters the third opening / closing type entry device. (For example, when a game ball enters the first and second open / close type ball entry devices, the open / close type ball entry device that is interlocked thereafter is only opened, but the third open / close type ball entry device is opened. When a game ball enters the device, the variable winning device is opened a plurality of times when the game ball enters the special ball entry portion provided inside the third opening / closing type ball entry device. A special gaming state may occur). In addition, each interlocking member is omitted, and the first open / close type ball entry device, the second open / close type ball entry device, and the third open / close type ball entry device are electrically operated (opened and closed by a solenoid or the like) and are activated. A lottery is performed when a game ball enters the ball device, the first open / close type ball entry device, the second open / close type ball entry device, and the third open / close type ball entry device. The opening / closing type ball-entry device or the variable winning device may be configured to be in the open state. Further, the number of open / close type ball entry devices and the like is not particularly limited, and may be one, for example. Further, the actuating ball entry device may be openable and closable so as to be released by winning the ball entry support lottery.

(D; a modified example of a configuration in which a probability variation mode is given by a plurality of game balls entering the first special entry portion 145a) In a jackpot state of 8 rounds (8RN, 8RS), the first round and the third round , In the 6th round, the first sorting device 149a is repeatedly displaced between the open position and the closed position (here, the first special ball entry portion 145a is opened a plurality of times during one round period. Although it is intended to be played, the configuration may be such that it is opened only once), but the game ball that has entered the first variable winning device 32a is the first special entry at a rate of about 1/8. It is configured to enter the ball portion 145a (each jackpot round of this example ends when eight game balls enter the first variable winning device 32a). However, in the second round, the fourth round, the fifth round, the seventh round, and the eighth round, there is a possibility that the game ball that has entered the first variable winning device 32a will enter the first special entry section 145a. Absent. In this embodiment, if three game balls enter the first special ball entry portion 145a during the jackpot state of eight rounds, the "probability variation mode" is given after the jackpot state ends.

In the decorative pattern display device 42, a "probability change mode acquisition effect" is performed. In the first round, an introduction effect (guidance display) including a commentary on the jackpot state is derived. Here, it is decided to convey the information that the probability variation mode cannot be acquired unless the game ball is inserted into the first variable winning device 32a.

In the following second and third rounds, the first result effect of whether or not the game ball has entered the first special ball entry portion 145a in the first round is derived. Here, if the game ball has not entered the first special ball entry portion 145a in the first round, the "probability change mode acquisition effect" becomes a bad end corresponding to the third round (does not shift to the probability change mode). An unsuccessful production to that effect is derived, and then, in the 4th to 8th rounds, a dedicated big hit medium movie is derived.

On the other hand, if the game ball has entered the first special ball entry section 145a in the first round, the continuation effect that the "probability change mode acquisition effect" will continue in the first result effect of the third round. Derived. In the following 4th and 5th rounds, the second result effect of whether or not the game ball has entered the first special ball entry portion 145a in the third round is derived. Here, if the game ball has not entered the first special ball entry portion 145a in the third round, the "probability change mode acquisition effect" becomes a bad end corresponding to the fifth round (does not shift to the probability change mode). An unsuccessful production to that effect is derived, and then, in the 6th to 8th rounds, a dedicated big hit medium movie is derived.

On the other hand, if the game ball has entered the first special ball entry section 145a in the third round, the second result effect of the fifth round is a continuous effect that the "probability change mode acquisition effect" continues. Derived. In the following 6th and 7th rounds, a third result effect of whether or not the game ball has entered the first special ball entry portion 145a in the fifth round is derived. Here, if the game ball has not entered the first special ball entry portion 145a in the fifth round, the "probability change mode acquisition effect" becomes a bad end corresponding to the seventh round (does not shift to the probability change mode). An unsuccessful production to that effect is derived, and then, in the eighth round, a dedicated jackpot movie is derived.

On the other hand, if the game ball has entered the first special ball entry section 145a in the fifth round, the "probability change mode acquisition effect" becomes a happy end in the third result effect of the seventh round (probability change mode). In the 8th round after that, a special big hit movie will be derived (at the time of success).

In the case of "8RS", since the transition to the probabilistic mode has been confirmed, the "probability mode acquisition effect" that is exactly the same as that of "8RS" may be performed, or at a predetermined timing (start of the first round). At the time, at the final timing of the 1st result production or the 2nd result production, or the timing in the middle of the 1st result production, the 2nd result production, or the 3rd result production), the "probability change mode acquisition production" becomes a happy ending. It is also possible to derive the establishment effect.

When a plurality of game balls enter the first special ball entry section 145a in quick succession, that is, when two game balls enter the first special entry section 145a, for example, in the first round. In the third round, the granting of the "probability variation mode" is confirmed only by one game ball entering the first special ball entry portion 145a. Therefore, the establishment effect may be performed in the second result production, or the establishment effect may be carried over to the third result production.

(E; Pattern in the jackpot state) In the first embodiment, the opening / closing patterns of the first variable winning device 32a and the second variable winning device 32b in the jackpot state are not particularly limited and can be changed as appropriate. .. For example, a plurality of patterns of interval lengths may be prepared so that the timing at which the first short is started is difficult to understand. Further, the first fake short and the first short may be mixed in one big hit state. Even in this case, if there is no instruction or suggestion that the first sorting device 149a is in the allowable state, it becomes more difficult to understand that it is the first short, and it is possible to diversify the production and playability. ..

Further, in the first embodiment, the first special ball entry portion 145a is configured to have a chance to enter a game ball in a plurality of round periods, but the game ball is provided only in one round period. (For example, a pattern in which the first special ball 145a is opened a plurality of times for a relatively short time when the first long is opened, and a configuration in which the first special ball 145a is provided with a chance to enter the ball. A pattern in which the first special ball opening portion 145a is opened only once for a relatively long time at the time of the first long opening, and the first special entry while the first short opening is performed multiple times in one round period. The sphere 145a may continue to be in the open state, or a pattern may be provided in which the ball portion 145a is partially opened).

Further, the timing at which the first sorting device 149a (second sorting device 149b) is opened in the jackpot state is not uniform, and a plurality of patterns may be provided. For example, the timing at which the second sorting device 149b can be opened is a predetermined period of any one of the first round, the third round, the fifth round, and the seventh round (may be constant, or is selected from a plurality of patterns). It may be configured such that the teaching / suggestion that the right of the probability variation mode is acquired is given or can be given during the jackpot state, the timing at which the second sorting device 149b is opened, and the timing at which the second sorting device 149b is opened. It does not teach that the game ball has entered the second special ball entry unit 145b (it may be configured so that it may be taught), and even after the jackpot state, it is determined whether it is the probability variation mode or the time reduction mode. The decorative pattern display device 42 may adopt a configuration in which it is not taught (it may be configured so that it may be taught). It is also possible to apply the configuration to the first sorting device 149a. Further, the jackpot states at different timings when the first sorting device 149a (second sorting device 149b) is opened are classified as individual jackpot types and are associated with the stop symbols of the special display devices 43a and 43b. It may be that.

(F; Guidance means) In the first embodiment, the game balls are arranged in a row on the upstream side of the first variable winning device 32a (having the first specific area 141a) in the game area to reach the first variable winning device 32a. It may be provided with a rectifying unit as a guiding means capable of guiding. For example, among the right-handed game balls using a game nail or an accessory, a game ball that does not enter the second variable winning device 32b or the second starting winning device 33b is always the first variable winning device. The upper surface of the first opening / closing member 143a of 32a may be configured to move from right to left (naturally, if the first opening / closing member 143a is open, the ball enters the first variable winning device 32a).

In this case, the game ball can be stably guided to the first variable winning device 32a. Therefore, there is a difference in the ease of reaching the first variable winning device 32a of the game ball for each pachinko machine 10, and whether or not the game ball can reach the first variable winning device 32a greatly changes (comparison). It is possible to prevent a situation in which the game performance is spoiled, such as a game ball being inserted into the first opening / closing member 143a a plurality of times.

When limiting the entry of the game ball into the first variable winning device 32a to the entry of the game ball through the rectifying unit (providing an entry restriction means for preventing entry from other routes), for example, In a configuration in which a specified number of game balls enter the first variable winning device 32a in the open state to close the state, a plurality of game balls are first variable at the same time at the timing when the specified number is counted. It is possible to eliminate as much as possible the difference in advantages and disadvantages in the progress of the game between the player who intentionally enters the winning device 32a (so-called over-winning) and the player who does not.

(G; Display of Remaining Information, etc.) In the first embodiment, the first special entry ball display 463 and the remaining information display 464 are configured to be performed by the decorative symbol display device 42 or the like. It is not limited to the configuration, and may be derived by other display means (liquid crystal display device, segment display device, etc.) provided in place of or in addition to the decorative pattern display device 42, or as a sub. A movable accessory whose mode is changed according to the value of the side first special entry counter is provided, and the remaining number of times until the game ball enters the first special entry portion 145a three times with the movable accessory is indicated. May be. For example, on both sides of the decorative symbol display device 42, a pair of left and right movable objects that can be tilted and displaced from a posture extending substantially vertically are provided on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 42, and a sub-side first special ball entry counter is provided. When the value of the sub-side first special ball entry counter reaches the specified multiple times (3 times) by tilting according to the value of (the number of remaining times until becomes "3"), the movable accessory becomes a predetermined value. To be completed as an object (for example, another movable accessory descends from above to be a visual mode integrated with the pair of left and right movable accessories, or / and the decorative symbol display device 42. It may be configured (such as deriving a display object that is associated with the pair of left and right movable accessories or is recognized as one with the movable accessory).

(H; Suggestion of display of residual information) When a jackpot state occurs in response to the variable display in the variable display of the special display devices 43a and 43b (the effect variable display of the decorative symbol display device 42), the jackpot state In, a teaching correspondence effect that teaches or suggests whether or not the residual information display 464 (and the first special entry display 463) is derived may be derived. For example, it may be a teaching correspondence effect that a predetermined character is displayed on a part of the decorative symbol display device 42, or it may be a teaching correspondence effect that a predetermined movable accessory operates, or it may be a decoration symbol display device. A mini-game effect that is completed in the middle of the effect variation display is derived at the lower part of 42, and a successful mini-game effect may be used as a teaching-corresponding effect. If it succeeds alone, there is no residual display, and if character A succeeds in the mission with character B, the success display with character B is a teaching-corresponding effect when the residual display is derived. It may be. Further, the variable display accompanied by the teaching-corresponding effect may have a higher expectation of winning the winning / failing lottery than the variable display not accompanied by the teaching-corresponding effect.

When such a configuration is adopted, the remaining information display 464 (and the first special entry display 463) is displayed when a big hit state occurs after that, depending on whether or not the teaching correspondence effect is performed along with the variable display. It is possible to grasp whether or not it is derived, and it is possible to strengthen the connection between the variable display and the jackpot state, and increase more interesting (meaningful) production opportunities that draw out the imagination of the player. In addition, if a teaching-corresponding effect is derived in order to meet the expectations that have increased the association with the jackpot state from the time of the variable display, the winning / failing lottery is won, that is, the degree of expectation that the jackpot state will occur is high. It has been raised. For this reason, there are frequent situations in which a teaching-corresponding effect that suggests the content of the jackpot state is derived, but the winning / failing lottery is not won and the jackpot state does not occur, which makes the teaching-corresponding effect itself unpleasant. Can be prevented. In addition, "expectation is increased" may be derived when the winner is won, and it is set so that it is relatively difficult to be derived when the winner is not won. Can be mentioned.

It should be noted that the remaining information display 464 (and the first special entry display 463) may be derived even if the teaching corresponding effect is not performed.

(I; Whether or not the remaining information can be displayed) In the first embodiment, the remaining information display 464 (and the first special entry display 463) is derived for "8RN-1 to 4", and "8RN-5" is derived. Assuming that the residual information display 464 (and the first special entry display 463) is not derived, the jackpot state in which the residual information display 464 is derived and the jackpot state in which the residual information display 464 is not derived are clearly distinguished. At the start, a lottery for teaching the remaining information as to whether or not to derive the remaining information display 464 (and the first special entry display 463) is performed, and if a winner is won, the remaining information display 464 (and the first special entry display 463) Is derived, and the remaining information display 464 (and the first special entry display 463) may not be derived in the case of non-winning. Further, even if the remaining information display 464 (and the first special ball entry display 463) is to be derived, it may be derived only when the game ball enters the first special ball entry section 145a for the third time. Derived only when it corresponds to the second and third entry of the game ball into the first special entry section 145a, or for the first and third entry of the game ball into the first special entry section 145a. It may be configured so that it may be derived only when it corresponds, or it may be derived when it corresponds to the first to third entry of the game ball into the first special entry portion 145a.

In addition, the remaining information teaching lottery may be performed every time the first special ball entry command is received (not performed when the value of the sub-side first special ball entry counter is "4" or more). In addition, even at the start of the jackpot state, a special residual information teaching lottery is performed to determine whether or not the residual information display 464 (and the first special entry display 463) is performed each time, and if the result is rejected, the first special The remaining information teaching lottery may be performed every time a ball entry command is received.

Further, in the first embodiment, when the first special entry command is received (at that timing), the remaining information display 464 (and the first special entry display 463) is derived. , The remaining information display 464 (and the first special ball entry display 463) is displayed at a timing different from the timing when the first special ball entry command is received (the timing when the value of the sub-side first special ball entry counter is updated). It may be configured so that it may be derived. For example, when the first variable winning device 32a, which is a jackpot of "8RN-1", is opened five times, the remaining information teaching lottery is won at the time of the first short opening, and the player enters the first special entry section 145a. There was also a ball, and the remaining information display 464 (and the first special entry display 463) was derived, and the remaining information teaching lottery was won at the time of the second short opening, but the first special entry section 145a was entered. There was no entry, and the remaining information display 464 (and the first special entry display 463) was not derived, and there was entry into the first special entry section 145a at the time of the third and fourth short opening. The remaining information teaching lottery was rejected, the remaining information display 464 (and the first special entry display 463) was not derived, and the remaining information teaching lottery was won at the time of the fifth short opening, which is the final short opening. In this case, even if there is no entry into the first special entry section 145a, the remaining information display 464 (and) indicating that the entry of the game ball into the first special entry section 145a has already been achieved three times. , The first special entry display 463) may be configured to be derived. In addition, it is not always necessary to tell whether or not the game ball has reached the first special ball entry section 145a three times in the final short opening, and the first special ball entry section 145a is reached during the subsequent rounds and endings. The first special entry display 463 indicating that the entry of the game ball three times has been achieved may be performed.

In addition, as a trigger for deriving the remaining information display 464 (and the first special entry display 463), it may be derived (in some cases) by operating the effect button 125.

When the first special entry command is received (except when the value of the sub-side first special entry counter is "4" or more), the remaining information display 464 and the first special entry are always received. Display 463 may be performed.

Further, although not particularly mentioned in the above embodiment, the management of "residual information" displayed in the jackpot state of "13RS-2,3" and "8RS" is not particularly limited, but as much as possible " It is desirable that it is configured so that it is difficult to understand that it is not "8RN". For example, when the first fake short is opened, a lottery is made as to whether or not to update (reduce) the remaining information based on the detection of the first ball entry count switch 226a (command from the corresponding main control device 261). May be configured to update the remaining information when winning.

Further, in the jackpot state of "13RS-2,3" and "8RS", a display showing that the remaining information is set to "0" may be derived at the stage before the second long opening. That is, since the probability variation mode is given if the game ball is allowed to enter the second special entry section 145b at the second long opening, the remaining information is set to "0" as a suggestion that the probability variation mode is almost obtained. It may be set to. At the time of opening the second long after displaying the remaining information as "0", in the decorative symbol display device 42, the second variable winning device 32b (the game ball is inserted into the second special ball entering portion 145b). It is desirable to display a note that the probability variation mode is not given unless the game ball is inserted.

(J; Correspondence regarding the first special ball entry part when an error state occurs) In the first remaining ball monitoring process and the second remaining ball monitoring process, the first is the first even though the specified time has passed since the jackpot state ended. The first special ball entry detection switch 223a and the second special ball entry detection switch 223b were detected in an error state that shifts to a case where it is determined that a game ball exists in the specific area 141a or the second specific area 141b. It is also possible to provide a means for detecting arrival during an error to memorize the fact. Further, a memory erasing operation means may be provided which is provided at a position where the player cannot operate and can perform an operation of erasing the memory of the arrival detection storage means during an error.

For example, when an error state occurs, if the cause of the error state is eliminated and then the error state is resolved by restarting the power supply, an error can be obtained by restarting the power supply while operating the RAM erase switch 323. The memory of the medium arrival detection storage means is erased, and by restarting the power supply without operating the RAM erase switch 323, the value of the first special ball entry counter is set based on the stored information of the error medium arrival detection storage means. It may be configured to add or turn on the second special entry flag.

If an error release switch that is operated when the error state is resolved is provided, the error release detection switch is operated while operating the RAM erase switch 323, so that the memory of the error arrival detection storage means is erased. By operating the error release switch without operating the RAM erase switch 323, the value of the first special entry counter can be added or the second special can be added based on the stored information of the error arrival detection storage means. It may be configured to turn on the entry flag.

As described above, when the player is in an error state due to the occurrence of a defect-free ball clogging or the like and the game is interrupted, the first special ball entry detection switch 223a or the second special ball entry detection switch 223b in the error state occurs. Can be added to the count of the first special entry counter and the second special entry flag after the error state is resolved. Therefore, the game can be restarted so as not to be disadvantageous to the player, and the deterioration of the player's interest can be suppressed.

In the first embodiment, the first special ball entry counter is configured to be incremented by "1" based on the detection of the first special ball entry detection switch 223a, but at the start of the jackpot state. "3" is set in the first special ball entry counter, and it is configured to be subtracted by "1" based on the detection of the first special ball entry detection switch 223a (probability change mode is given by "0"). You may.

Further, for example, when the first special ball entry detection switch 223a is detected, the value of the first ball entry counter is "1" or more before the value of the first ball entry counter is subtracted by "1". Whether or not it is determined, and if a negative determination is made, an error state may be generated.

Further, although not particularly mentioned in the above embodiment, the corresponding sound effect may be generated based on the detection of the first ball entry count switch 226a (second ball entry count switch 226b), or the decorative symbol display. The device 42 may be configured to derive the corresponding effect display.

(K; Modification Example of First Variable Winning Device and Second Variable Winning Device) In the first embodiment, both the first variable winning device 32a and the second variable winning device 32b are provided in the right side region of the game area. However, the arrangement, configuration, and the like of the variable winning devices 32a and 32b are not particularly limited and can be changed as appropriate.

For example, the first variable winning device 32a may be arranged in the left side region, and the second variable winning device 32b may be arranged in the right side region. Further, for example, in a predetermined jackpot state, a total of 3 game balls are added to the first special entry section 145a of the first variable winning device 32a and the second special entry section 145b of the second variable winning device 32b. The probability variation mode is given by turning the ball, and the first special ball entry section 145a and the second special entry section 145b are provided with the first variable winning device 32a and the second variable. It is configured so that a ball can be entered when the winning device 32b is short-opened, and in the predetermined jackpot state, one of the first variable winning device 32a and the second variable winning device 32b is short-opened three times and the other. May be configured to be short-opened twice. In this case, basically, the game ball is divided into the left side area and the right side area, and the big hit state is digested with the aim of entering the special ball entry portions 145a and 145b three times. Gender is given.

Further, when such a configuration is adopted, it is possible to derive an effect that teaches / suggests the first variable winning device 32a and the second variable winning device 32b, which are opened next short, in advance (even in a configuration that always teaches). Alternatively, it may be taught by lottery (for example, it may be suggested by a display accompanied by a left-pointing arrow or a right-pointing arrow on the decorative pattern display device 42, and a question mark is displayed if there is no teaching) to diversify the playability. Etc. can be planned.

It should be noted that the count of the game balls that have entered the first special entry section 145a and the count of the game balls that have entered the second special entry section 145b are performed separately, and either of the counts is counted separately. It may be configured so that the probability variation mode is given when the set specified value is reached. For example, the first variable winning device 32a provided in the left side region has a configuration in which the game ball is easy to reach or has a relatively large number of short openings, and the game is played on the first special ball entry portion 145a. The probability variation mode is given when the ball is entered four times, and the second variable winning device 32b provided in the right side region is configured so that the game ball is difficult to reach or the number of short releases is relatively small. At the same time, the probability variation mode may be provided when the game ball enters the second special ball entry portion twice.

(L; Operation confirmation of the first variable winning device and the second variable winning device) In the first embodiment, the input counting the total number of detections of the first ball counting switch 226a (second ball counting switch 226b). The ball number storage storage means and the arrival number storage storage means for counting the total number of detections of the first special ball entry detection switch 223a (second special ball entry detection switch 223b) are provided, and the ball number storage storage means and , The first special entry section 145a (second special entry section 145b) of the game ball that has entered the first specific area 141a (second specific area 141b) based on the information accumulated and stored in the arrival number storage storage means. ) May be determined to be within a preset numerical range (the determination function constitutes an appropriate value determination means). In this case, it is possible to determine whether or not the game ball has been properly entered into the first variable winning device 32a (second variable winning device 32b), and it is determined that the game ball has not been properly entered. In some cases, it is possible to check for fraud, failure, etc.

(M; Setting the upper limit of the count of the first special entry counter in one round period) The game ball enters the first special entry counter 145a with the upper limit of the count of the first special entry counter in one round period. It may be set with a number smaller than the number of times that the probability variation mode is given by spheres (three times in the above example) (in the above embodiment, the upper limit of the count of the first special ball entry counter in one round). Is not provided). For example, in one round period, the value of the first special ball entry counter is increased by "1" at the maximum, so that the first special ball entry detection switch 223a is in the allowable position when it is detected. 1 The distribution device 149a may be returned to the regulated position (in the case where the value of the first special entry counter increases by "2" at the maximum in one round, a dedicated counter is provided for the round period. Counts the number of detections of the first special ball entry detection switch 223a) If the number of detections of the first special ball entry detection switch 223a exceeds "2" in one round, the value of the first special ball entry counter is set. It may be configured not to count any more.

In this way, by setting the upper limit of the count of the first special ball entry counter per round, it is possible to surely enjoy the game such that the game ball enters the first special ball entry unit 145a over a plurality of rounds. In addition, a plurality of game balls in one round (for example, two times, which is less than the specified multiple times) are allowed (counted) to enter the first special ball entry unit 145a. By doing so (even in a state where the first short opening is only one time left and the number of times the game ball enters the first special ball entry section 145a is only once), the first with hope until the end. The game can be performed aiming at entering the special ball entry section 145a.

Basically, it is conceivable to make the count upper limit of the first special entry counter uniform in any round, but for example, even if the count upper limit of the first special entry counter is not set only for the last opening of the first short. It is also possible that the count upper limit of the first special entry counter is higher when the first short is opened in the second half than when the first short is opened in the first half, and as the first short open becomes later, the first is 1 The count upper limit of the special entry counter may be increased.

(N; switching means, influence means) In the first embodiment, the first variable winning device 32a regulates the permissible state in which the game ball is allowed to enter the first special ball entry unit 145a and the ball entry. Although the first sorting device 149a that changes state to the regulated state is provided, the configuration and operation timing of the first sorting device 149a are not particularly limited and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the positions of the first special ball-entry portion 145a and the first non-special ball-entry portion 146a of the first variable winning device 32a (see FIG. 4) are exchanged, and the first sorting device 149a is the first non-special entry device. When the ball portion 146a is provided so as to be switchable between the open state and the closed state so that the game ball that has entered the first specific area 141a can enter the first special entry portion 145a, the first The distribution device 149a may be closed.

Further, for example, the first sorting device 149a does not restrict the entry of the game ball into the first special entry section 145a, and the game ball entered into the first specific area 141a is the first special entry. A state in which it is relatively easy to enter the ball portion 145a (a state in which the game ball is guided to the first special entry portion 145a side by the first distribution device 149a, or a state in which the first special entry portion 145a is guided by the first distribution device 149a. The first sorting device changes the state so that the game ball that has entered the first specific region 141a is relatively difficult to enter the first special entry portion 145a. 149a may be configured.

(O; Relative timing between the opening period of the first variable winning device 32a and the allowable period of the first special ball-entry portion 145a) In the first embodiment, the short circuit of the first variable winning device 32a of "8RN". Upon opening, the first sorting device 149a is opened for the same period as the opening period of the first variable winning device 32a, and the first sorting device 149a is not opened at other opening opportunities of the first variable winning device 32a. However, the configuration is not particularly limited to this, and can be changed as appropriate. That is, the opening period (first period) of the first specific area 141a (first opening / closing member 143a) in which the game ball can be entered into the first specific area 141a of the first variable winning device 32a (first condition). , Allowable period (second period) in which the first special ball entry section 145a (first sorting device 149a) capable of allowing a game ball to enter the first special ball entry section 145a (second condition) is in an open state. If the first sorting device 149a is in the open position, the game ball that has entered the first specific area 141a will be placed approximately 0.5 seconds after entering the first specific area 141a. 1 Enter the ball into the sorting device 149a. Therefore, in the above embodiment, when the first variable winning device 32a is short-opened, the game is played 0.5 seconds before the first specific region 141a is opened and the first specific region 141a is closed. When the ball is entered into the first specific region 141a, there is a high possibility that the game ball will enter the first special entry portion 145a. Here, the first sorting device 149a of the above embodiment has a pattern in which the entire period in which the first specific region 141a is in the open state and a period in which the first specific region 141a is in the open state. There was only a pattern in which the entire period of the above was closed, but the period during which the first sorting device 149a was opened was relative to the period during which the first specific region 141a was opened. A plurality of patterns of specific timing may be provided.

For example, 1.2 seconds after the first variable winning device 32a is opened as the period during which the first special ball-entry portion 145a is opened with respect to the period when the first variable winning device 32a is opened. Pattern 1 until the elapse, pattern 2 between 1 second and 1.8 seconds after the first variable winning device 32a is opened, and the first variable winning device 32a Pattern 3 between 1.5 seconds and 2.5 seconds after the opening state and 2.5 seconds after the first variable winning device 32a was opened. Pattern 4 may be provided until the first variable winning device 32a is opened, and pattern 5 may be provided so that the closed state is maintained even when the first variable winning device 32a is opened.

In addition, as a state (first state) in which a game ball moving in the game area can be entered into the first special ball entry unit 145a, the first variable winning device 32a (first specific area 141a) is opened. In addition to the state in which the first special ball entry unit 145a (first distribution device 149a) is in the open state, the first variable winning device 32a is in the open state and the first special ball entry unit 145a is in the open state. From the closed state, the first variable winning device 32a is closed and the first special ball entry portion 145a is open (or the first variable winning device 32a and the first variable winning device 32a and the first. The first state is also included when the special ball entry portion 145a is switched to the open state). In this case, it is possible to further increase the production opportunities and diversify the playability. Further, the permissible period in which the first special ball entry portion 145a is opened in the jackpot state is not uniform, and the game ball is not fired aiming at the first variable winning device 32a according to the permissible period. Since there is a high possibility of being disadvantageous, it is difficult to use the technique of firing the game ball only when there is a possibility of entering the first variable winning device 32a, and the difference in advantages and disadvantages between players regarding the presence or absence of such a technique. Can be eliminated as much as possible. Therefore, any player can enjoy the game without hesitation.

Further, for example, in the first embodiment, the first special ball-entry portion 145a (first distribution device 149a) is opened when the first variable winning device 32a is short-opened. Instead of the configuration (short opening is omitted), or in addition, the first special ball-entry portion 145a may be opened when the first variable winning device 32a is long-opened. When the first special entry portion 145a is in the open state for the entire period during which the first variable winning device 32a is long open, the game ball is first specially used to obtain the probability variation mode in the jackpot state of "8RN". As the number of times the ball is entered into the ball entry unit 145a, a number larger than the total of the upper limit of the number of game balls that can be entered into the first variable winning device 32a is set in all rounds. That is, it is premised that a ball that exceeds the upper limit of the round game ball (so-called over-winning) is premised, and there is a possibility that there will be a gap with a player who has a technique of intentionally aiming for over-winning. Therefore, it is desirable to provide the first sorting device 149a and set the period during which the first special ball-entry portion 145a is open to be shorter than the period during which the first variable winning device 32a is long-opened. 1 It is desirable to suggest and teach the period during which the special ball entry portion 145a is in the open state with the decorative symbol display device 42 or the like during that period and further in advance.

In addition, in the first embodiment, the timing at which the first special ball entry portion 145a is opened is set with reference to the timing at which the first variable winning device 32a is opened. 1 The special ball entry section 145a (first sorting device 149a) is opened at a predetermined timing from the start of the jackpot state (for example, the first special ball entry section 145a is closed for 15 seconds. It may be repeated (repeatedly being opened for 1 second), or a lottery will be held to determine whether or not the first special entry portion 145a is opened at a predetermined timing in the jackpot state. It may be configured so that it is appropriately opened when it is won.

(P; Teaching the permissible period of the first special ball-entry unit 145a) In addition, a display, a voice mode, etc. that teach the permissible period in which the first special ball-entry unit 145a (first sorting device 149a) is in the open state are displayed. It may be configured so that it can be derived. However, for example, when the first special ball-entry portion 145a adopts a configuration that can be opened even during the period when the first variable winning device 32a is closed, the first special ball-entry portion 145a is in the open state. Of the permissible periods, the mode in which the permissible period can be taught may be derived according to the period during which the game ball may exist in the first specific area 141a, while the game ball is in the first specific area 141a. Corresponds to a period that cannot exist (a period in which the first variable winning device 32a is closed, and approximately 0.5 seconds after the first variable winning device 32a, which has been in the open state, is closed). Therefore, it is desirable that the mode for teaching the permissible period is not derived.

That is, even if the permissible period is taught, if it is in a state where the game ball cannot enter the first specific area 141a, the player cannot do anything and the interest is reduced. There is a risk of inviting. Therefore, it is possible to avoid such a possibility by teaching the permissible period only in the situation where the game ball is expected to reach the first specific region 141a.

It should be noted that it may be suggested that the first special ball-entry portion 145a is opened at a timing before the first variable winning device 32a is opened, and the suggestion is made. In that case, the first special ball entry portion 145a may be configured to be always in the open state in the immediately following round period, and even if the suggestion is made, the first special ball entry portion 145a may be in the immediately following round period. 1 The special ball entry portion 145a may be configured to be open or not open. Further, when adopting a pattern in which the first special entry portion 145a is not necessarily opened, the degree of expectation that the first special entry portion 145a is opened differs depending on the type of suggestion. May be good.

Further, when a game ball is inserted into the first variable winning device 32a which is in the open state, a special first opening period is provided in which the game ball always enters the first special entry portion 145a. In addition, it may be possible to derive a dedicated embodiment that teaches or suggests the special first opening period. In this case, by providing an easy-to-understand opening period (first opening period) in which the ball is always entered into the first special entry portion 145a when the game ball is entered into the first specific area 141a, the motivation for playing the game is improved. Can be planned.

In addition, in the first embodiment, the short opening of the first variable winning device 32a can be derived in the jackpot state of "8RN", and the short opening of the first variable winning device 32a in the jackpot state of "13RS" and "8RS". Although it is said that the fake short opening can be derived, the fake short opening of the first variable winning device 32a may be derived even in the jackpot state of "8RN", or in the jackpot state of "13RS" and "8RS". The short opening of the first variable winning device 32a may be derived.

(Q; Arrangement of the first special entry portion 145a and the first non-special entry portion 146a) Regarding the arrangement of the first special entry portion 145a and the first non-special entry portion 146a (specific discharge portion) It is not particularly limited and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the first special entry portion 145a and the first non-special entry portion 146a may be arranged so as to be arranged in the front-rear direction (whichever may be the front). In this case, since the first special entry portion 145a and the first non-special entry portion 146a overlap in the front-rear direction from the viewpoint of the game, the game ball that has entered the first specific area 141a is the first special entry. It is possible to make it difficult to tell whether or not the ball has entered the ball portion 145a, and in that regard, another directing means (whether or not the game ball has entered the first special entry portion 145a, or the first (Whether or not the game ball has entered the special ball entry unit 145a three times, etc.) can be produced, and the effectability can be improved.

(R; Teaching / Suggesting the Remaining Number of Short Opening of the First Short Open) In the first embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the remaining number of short opening of the first variable winning device 32a is taught or suggested in the jackpot state. May be good. That is, in the first round of "8RN-1", there is an opportunity for a game ball to enter the first special entry portion 145a (chance to get a key) with respect to the vertical intermediate portion of the right portion of the decorative symbol display device 42. The remaining number of times is displayed, which is the remaining 5 times, and it is suggested that the first variable winning device 32a is aimed at in the interval period immediately before the short opening, and the value of the remaining number display is displayed each time the first short opening is completed. It may be configured to subtract one. The function of deriving the remaining number of times display constitutes the remaining number of times open notification means.

In this case, it becomes easier to grasp the current situation by comparing the number of times the game ball reaches the first special ball entry portion 145a, which is required until the privilege (probability change mode) is granted, and the number of times the remaining first short is opened. , You can get interested in the game based on such information.

If the remaining number of times display suggests that the number of shorts is not necessarily the same as the number of shorts released, for example, "?" Is displayed when the remaining number of times is "0", and the round progresses and the shorts are opened a predetermined number of times. The remaining "0 times" may be displayed at the place where it is broken (in this case, the initial remaining number display is displayed less than the actual number). In this case, you can enjoy the surprise effect that the first short opening that was thought to be left was left, and because there is a possibility of the surprise effect, the effect is not actually derived. Even in this case, the game can be played with the hope that the effect will be derived until the end. Further, it is also possible to provide a pattern that becomes the ending without deriving the short release after the display of "? Times".

(S; How to show the effect of 8RN) In the above first embodiment, when the first variable winning device 32a is always short-opened in the first round of 8RN, if the game ball is inserted a total of three times, the probability variation mode is acquired. A guidance display indicating that it is possible is derived. For example, a combination of the first short and the first fake short (for example, four times only for the first short, four times only for the first fake short, and the first short). 2 times and 1st fake short 2 times, 1st short 3 times and 1st fake short 1 time, etc.), open the 1st variable winning device 32a about 4 times, display guidance in the subsequent rounds, and then The first variable winning device 32a is opened and closed so as to include the first short opening or the first fake short opening in the round of the above, and the game ball is specified a plurality of times (for example, three times) in the first special entry portion 145a in the final round. It may be configured to derive the result display of whether or not the ball has entered.

(T; Modified Example of Operating Conditions of First Sorting Device) In the first embodiment, the first sorting device 149a is opened in synchronization with the opening of the first variable winning device 32a. However, for example, the first distribution device 149a may be set to the open state based on a predetermined number of game balls entering the first variable winning device 32a. For example, if the specified number is set to 10 which is the upper limit of the round entry, the privilege (probability change mode) is obtained unless the game ball is entered into the first variable winning device 32a beyond the upper limit of the round entry. It will not be possible.

In this case, when a specified number (10) of game balls are inserted into the first specific area 141a, which is closed, and a number of game balls exceeding the specified number is inserted, the game ball is inserted. The ball enters the first special ball entry section 145a. Therefore, in each opening period, a larger number of game balls than the specified number are entered into the first specific area 141a (the specified number of game balls and the number of game balls exceeding the specified number are at the same time. It is possible to add playability such as playing a game aiming at (1 entering a specific area 141a).

(U; When the number of times the game ball enters the first special ball entry portion 145a exceeds the specified multiple times (three times)) Although not particularly mentioned in the first embodiment, the first special entry section 145a When a game ball is entered more than a plurality of times (three times) specified in the above, a dedicated effect may be derived so as to be derived.

In this case, a special effect can be derived as a privilege when the game ball enters the first special ball entry unit 145a more than a specified number of times. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the impression that the game ball has entered the first special ball entry unit 145a more than a specified number of times is completely useless. In a configuration provided on the rear surface side of the pachinko machine 10 (inner frame 12, etc.) and provided with a setting changing device capable of setting the winning probability of the winning / losing lottery in a plurality of stages, the setting of the winning probability is set as the dedicated effect. It may be configured so that the effect to be suggested or taught can be derived. " For example, the jackpot probability can be set and changed in 6 stages, and as the dedicated effect, there are a mode (for example, 6 types) that does not include a suggestion of setting, and a setting of up to 3 from the one with the highest jackpot probability. A mode indicating that (for example, one type), a mode suggesting that there is a high possibility of setting up to three from the one with the highest jackpot probability (for example, two types), and a mode from the one with the highest jackpot probability to two. A mode indicating that it is a setting (for example, one type), a mode indicating that it is a setting having the highest jackpot probability (for example, one type), and a mode indicating that the jackpot probability is the highest, the first, the third, and the fifth. A mode (for example, one type) indicating that any of the above may be provided.

If it is relatively difficult to understand the entry into the first special entry section 145a, it is also difficult to grasp that the game ball has entered the first special entry section 145a more than a specified number of times. In that case, the player does not have to know that the game ball has entered the first special ball entry unit 145a more than a specified number of times by not performing the dedicated effect.

(V; a configuration in which a privilege is given by allowing a game ball to be entered into the first special entry section a specified number of times without using the first special entry counter)
(V-1) As shown in FIG. 52, in the first special ball entry section 145a, the V winning opening 821 that imparts a probability variation mode based on the entry of a game ball and the first special entry section 145a. An out hole 822 is provided to discharge the entered game ball to the outside of the game area without entering the V winning opening 821, and the game ball is guided to the V winning opening 821 only once, and the out hole 822 is provided. A predetermined number of times distribution device 823 may be provided as a arrival counting means that repeats the guidance to.

The first special ball entry portion 145a communicates with the first specific region 141a and is opened and closed by the first distribution device 149a, and the entrance passage portion 824 and the distribution region 825 through which the game ball passing through the entrance passage portion 824 is guided. To be equipped. The specified number of times distribution device 823 is arranged in the distribution area 825 and includes a feed member 826 that rotates in the counterclockwise direction of FIG. 52. Further, the V winning opening 821 is provided in connection with the lower left of the distribution area 825, and the out hole 822 is provided in connection with the rear of the lower left of the distribution area 825.

The feed member 826 includes a shaft portion 827 extending in the front-rear direction and four feed plate portions 828 extending in the centrifugal direction from the shaft portion 827 and provided at equal positions. Three of the four feed plate portions 828 are formed so that the portion on the tip side is curved in the clockwise direction. The remaining one of the four feed plate portions 828 extends linearly in the centrifugal direction of the shaft portion 827 in a front view, and is adjacent to the feed plate portion 828 on the clockwise side of the feed plate portion 828. The region between the feed plate portion 828 and the feed plate portion 828 located in (hereinafter, the region is referred to as "safe feed region 829" and the region between the other feed plate portions 828 is referred to as "out feed region 830") is fed. A closing plate portion 831 is provided so as to connect the trailing edges of the plate portions 828.

Further, a stopper 833 for preventing the feed member 826 from being displaced in the counterclockwise direction, a release switch 834 provided on the inlet passage portion 824 for canceling the function of the stopper 833, and a lock switch for returning the stopper 833 to a functioning state. The 835 and the positioning unit 836 that regulates the displacement (reverse) of the feed member 826 in the clockwise direction are provided.

The stopper 833 is provided so as to be retractable back and forth with respect to the distribution region 825 at a position slightly to the left below the shaft portion 827 of the feed member 826, and abuts on the counterclockwise side surface of the feed plate portion 828. It is configured to be possible. When the counterclockwise side surface of the predetermined feed plate portion 828 and the stopper 833 are in contact with or close to each other, the outlet of the inlet passage portion 824, the safe feed region 829, and the three out feed regions The position of the game ball is the same as that of any of the 830s, and the game ball discharged from the exit of the entrance passage portion 824 flows into the safe feed area 829 and one of the three out feed areas 830. ..

Then, when the game ball enters the entrance passage portion 824, the release switch 834 provided near the exit of the entrance passage portion 824 is operated by the game ball, and the stopper 833 is retracted to the outside of the distribution area 825. There is. As a result, the feed member 826 is in a state where rotational displacement in the counterclockwise direction is allowed.

When the game ball is housed in the safe feed area 829 or the out feed area 830 of the feed member 826, the feed member 826 is rotationally displaced in the counterclockwise direction due to the weight of the game ball. During the rotational displacement of the feed member 826, the lock switch 835 is operated by the predetermined feed plate portion 828, and the stopper 833 projects into the distribution region 825. As a result, when the predetermined feed plate portion 828 comes into contact with the stopper 833, the rotational displacement of the feed member 826 in the counterclockwise direction is restricted. The stopper 833 may be configured to mechanically interlock with the release switch 834 and the lock switch 835, or the release switch 834 and the lock switch 835 are configured by a sensor, and the stopper is based on the detection of the sensor. The 833 may be configured to appear and disappear by electrical control.

Further, the positioning portion 836 is provided so as to be able to appear and disappear in the front-rear direction with respect to the distribution area 825, and has a substantially triangular plate shape in which the projecting length in the forward direction gradually increases toward the counterclockwise direction side, and the distribution area 825 is formed by a spring. It is maintained in a protruding state. Then, at a stage slightly before the predetermined feed plate portion 828 comes into contact with the stopper 833, another feed plate portion 828 sets the positioning portion 836 to the outside (rear) of the distribution region 825 against the spring of the positioning portion 836. ), It passes in front of the positioning unit 836. When the other feed plate portion 828 passes in front of the positioning portion 836, the predetermined feed plate portion 828 comes into contact with the stopper 833, and the positioning portion 836 returns to a state of protruding into the distribution region 825. As a result, even if the feed member 826 tries to rotate in the clockwise direction, the surface of the feed plate portion 828 on the clockwise side and the positioning protrusion 836 come into contact with each other, and further displacement in the clockwise direction is caused. It is becoming regulated.

Further, when the game ball that has passed through the entrance passage portion 824 is housed in the safe feed area 829 of the feed member 826, the feed member 826 rotates 90 degrees in the counterclockwise direction due to the weight of the game ball ( It stops (by the action of the stopper 833 and the like), and the safe feed area 829 and the V winning opening 821 match (communicate). As a result, the game ball housed in the safe feed area 829 will enter the V winning opening 821. The game ball housed in the safe feed area 829 is prevented from entering the out hole 822 by the blocking plate portion 831 provided in the safe feed area 829.

On the other hand, when the game ball that has passed through the entrance passage portion 824 is housed in the out feed area 830 of the feed member 826, the feed member 826 rotates 90 degrees in the counterclockwise direction due to the weight of the game ball. Then, it stops (by the action of the stopper 833 and the like), and the out feed area 830 and the out hole 822 match (communicate). As a result, the game ball accommodated in the out feed area 830 enters the out hole 822 while being restricted from moving toward the V winning opening 821 by the curved shape of the tip of the feed plate portion 828.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the feed member 826 is provided with one safe feed area 829 and three out feed areas 830, and each time a game ball enters the predetermined number of times distribution device 823. , The feed member 826 is rotated by 90 degrees, and the safe feed area 829 and the out feed area 830 that match the V winning opening 821 or the out hole 822 are changed in order. That is, the specified number of times distribution device 823 is configured to alternately repeat guiding the game ball to the V winning opening 821 only once and discharging the game ball to the outside of the game area only three times. Every time four game balls enter the specified number of times distribution device 823, one is guided to the V winning opening 821.

Further, on the front surface side of the feed member 826, a display plate 837 as a number interlocking means as shown in FIG. 53 is provided. The display board 837 is composed of a transparent plate-like body on which numbers are written on the front side. In the present embodiment, the character "0" is written on the display board 837 that blocks a part of the front of the safe feed area 829, and the out feed area 830 located next to the safe feed area 829 on the counterclockwise direction side. A character "1" is written on the display board 837 that blocks a part of the front part of the display board that blocks a part of the front part of the out-feed area 830 located next to the safe feed area 829 in the clockwise direction. The letter "3" is written for 837, and the letter "2" is written for the display board 837 that blocks a part of the front of the remaining out feed area 830. In the present embodiment, a lamp (not shown) capable of irradiating light is provided in a portion of the distribution region 825 adjacent to the entrance passage portion 824, and the safe feed region 829 and the out feed region 830 are provided. The numbers (remaining information) in the area communicating with the entrance passage portion 824 are easier to see than the numbers in the other areas. Means that can grasp the posture (direction, rotation phase) of the feed member 826 (for example, an RFID chip is embedded corresponding to each out feed area 830 and safe feed area 829 of the feed member 826 and read by a reading means). May be provided and the decorative symbol display device 42 may perform the corresponding effect according to the posture of the feed member 826 (the remaining two times, the remaining one time, etc. may be displayed, or the character approaches the goal. You may derive the production). Further, in front of the specified number of times sorting device 823, the visual mode changing means (transparent display means, half) capable of changing the state of the display board 837 from the front into a visible or easy state and an invisible or difficult state. A mirror + illumination, a shutter, etc.) may be provided so that the residual information cannot be visually recognized.

Further, in this example, at the end of the jackpot state, the stopper 833 and the positioning portion 836 are forcibly retracted out of the distribution area 825. Further, when the center of gravity of the feed member 826 is displaced from the shaft portion 827 and the stopper 833 and the positioning portion 836 are retracted out of the distribution area 825, the character "3" is displayed. Is displaced until the display board 837 on which is described is oriented so as to communicate with the entrance passage portion 824 so as to stand still. At the start of the jackpot state, the stopper 833 and the positioning portion 836 are returned to the positions protruding into the distribution region 825. By adopting the above configuration, the probability variation mode is given by inserting four game balls into the first special ball entry unit 145a in the jackpot state.

(V-2) As another example of the embodiment, the first non-special entry portion 146a is arranged below the first entry count switch 226a, and the first distribution is performed at the entrance of the first non-special entry portion 146a. A device 149a is provided, and a special area and a stopping device as a arrival counting means are provided on the left side of the first sorting device 149a. By projecting the first distribution device 149a above the first non-special entry portion 146a, the entry of the game ball into the first non-special entry portion 146a is restricted, and the first distribution device 149a is first specified. By retracting from the area 141a, entry of the game ball into the first non-special entry section 146a is permitted. When the upper surface of the first sorting device 149a is inclined downward to the left and the first sorting device 149a is in a position protruding into the first specific region 141a, the game ball entering the first specific region 141a is You will be guided to the stop device.

The stopping device is provided with a substantially plate-shaped base portion that is inclined downward on the left side, and game balls can enter the base portion at three locations separated by a predetermined distance from each other in the extending direction, and the base portion can be moved up and down. A stop hole is provided through the hole. Further, a slide plate that can be slidably displaced in the front-rear direction is provided below the base portion, and when the slide plate protrudes below the base portion, the game ball that has entered the stop hole portion is placed in the stop hole portion. It is designed to be supported by the slide plate while staying in place. On the other hand, when the slide plate is retracted from below the base portion, the game ball stopped in the stop hole portion falls downward and is discharged out of the game area.

Further, a first special ball entry detection switch 223a is provided below the third stop hole portion from the upstream side of the stop hole portion (when the slide plate projects below the base portion). , The first special ball entry detection switch 223a is located below the slide plate, and the game ball is not detected by the first special ball entry detection switch 223a).

In the jackpot state, the slide plate is in a state of protruding downward from the base portion, and the first sorting device 149a is in a state of protruding into the first specific region 141a in response to the opening of the first short circuit. When the game ball enters the first specific area 141a at the time of opening the first short, the game ball is guided by the stop device, and first enters the first stop hole portion from the upstream side of the stop hole portion. , Will be stopped. The upper end portion of the game ball anchored in the retaining hole portion is substantially flush with the upper surface of the base portion.

When the second game ball enters the first specific area 141a at the time of opening the first short, the game ball guided by the stop device uses the game ball stopped in the first stop hole as a foothold. When the ball gets over the first stop hole, enters the second stop from the upstream side and is stopped, and the third game ball enters the first specific area 141a. Is stopped by entering the third stop hole from the upstream side. A discharge hole for discharging the game ball to the outside of the game area is provided on the most downstream side of the base portion, and the discharge hole is not closed by the slide plate. In addition, a detection means for detecting the game ball stopped in each stop hole is provided, and based on the detection information, various effects and the number of times the ball enters the stop device (remaining information) until the probability change mode is given are taught. It may be that.

At the timing after the final opening of the first short, the slide plate is set to a position retracted from below the base portion, and a probability change mode is given when the first special ball entry detection switch 223a is detected. By adopting the above configuration, the probability variation mode can be obtained by allowing three or more game balls to reach the stopping device in the jackpot state. It should be noted that, in front of the stopping device, a visual mode changing means (transparent type) capable of changing the state of the stopping device (parked game ball) from the front to a state where it can be visually recognized or easily and a state where it cannot be seen or is difficult. Display means, half mirror + lighting, shutter, etc.) may be provided.

(W; display of the number of acquired balls) In the above embodiment, in the state from the occurrence of the jackpot state to the transition to the normal mode (continuous chan state), the balls are given based on the balls entered into the variable winning devices 32a, 32b, and the like. The total number of game values (game balls) (some of which may be in the process of being granted) is counted, and the number is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 (the number of acquired balls display 465 is derived). However, instead of or in addition to such a configuration, it may be possible to display the number of game values granted during the period of the jackpot state. In addition, every time the total number of game values granted increases by a specified number (for example, 5000), a specific number excess display that teaches that the total number of grants exceeds a predetermined number is displayed in a large scale at the center of the decorative symbol display device 42. It may be configured to be displayed. It should be noted that there may be a period during which the acquired ball number display 465 is not displayed (for example, during the super reach effect or during the judge effect) between the occurrence of the jackpot state and the transition to the normal mode. In addition, the total number of grants may be configured to decrease (subtract the number of fired game balls) as well as increase. Further, for example, a "small hit" may be won in a winning / losing lottery performed based on a ball entering the second starting winning device 33b, and if a small hit is won, the first variable winning device 32a or the first variable winning device 32a or , Either of the second variable winning devices 32b may be opened for a short time (so that the special ball entry portions 145a and 145b are not allowed to enter the ball). It is also possible to omit the derivation function of displaying the number of acquired balls.

(X; Hold ream effect) In the above embodiment, the hold ream suggests and teaches that the fluctuation information held at a predetermined time in the jackpot state includes the jackpot in the jackpot state. It may be configured to perform a challenge effect. However, in the present embodiment, the probability variation mode is imparted by allowing the game ball to enter the second special entry section 145b one or more times, or by entering the game ball into the first special entry section 145a three times or more. Is determined, so if the hold challenge effect is performed before the timing when the game ball may enter the first special entry section 145a or the second special entry section 145b, a high probability state is obtained. , And only when the value of the hit / miss random number counter C1 which is a big hit in either of the low probability states is acquired (at a later timing, when the big hit is made according to the corresponding game mode). It is possible to derive a pending consecutive challenge).

(Y; button effect) In the above embodiment, the hit middle button effect using a button or the like that can be operated by the player such as the effect button 125 may be derived so as to be able to be derived. For example, after the short opening of the first variable winning device 32a and the second variable winning device 32b (for example, at the time of long opening following the short opening), a display prompting the operation of the effect button 125 is derived, and the effect button 125 is displayed. Even if it is configured to teach or suggest whether or not a game ball has entered the first special entry section 145a or the second special entry section 145b when the short is opened, triggered by the operation. Good.

It should be noted that the relative timing between the short opening period in which the short opening is performed a plurality of times in succession and the period in which the first sorting device 149a is opened is not uniform, that is, short opening and long opening. If the closing period is short, it is possible to know whether or not the game ball has entered the variable winning devices 32a and 32b and whether or not the game ball has entered the special entry portions 145a and 145b. It becomes difficult, and the interest (production value) in the above-mentioned hit middle button production increases.

(Z; configuration in which the opening / closing member of the central unit of the second embodiment is omitted) In the second embodiment, an opening / closing member 475 that opens / closes the ball entry opening 474 of the central unit 471 is provided, and is provided outside the central unit 471. The opening / closing member 475 is configured to be in the open state when a small hit is won in a winning / failing lottery based on the entry of a game ball into the provided first starting winning device 491. Is configured so that the game ball can always enter the specific area 473 (for example, about 2 to 4 of the 250 game balls fired aiming at the entry opening 474) enter. The first start winning device 491 is provided at the bottom of the specific area 473, and a winning or losing lottery is performed with a probability of 10/10, and if the winning or losing lottery is won, a big hit state occurs. You may. Also in this case, the game ball has passed through all of the special safe hole 481b of the first sorting device 477, the special safe hole 481b of the second sorting device 478, and the special safe hole 481b of the third sorting device 479. When a game ball enters the 1-start winning device 491, a probability variation mode is provided, and the special safe holes 481b of the first special passage hole 477, the second special passage hole 478, and the third special passage hole 479 are provided. If a game ball enters the first start winning device 491 in a state where no one of the game balls has passed, the normal mode is given.

(Aa; a configuration in which a plurality of special areas are provided in a specific area of the V attacker type in which the specific area opens and closes) In the first specific area 141a of the first variable winning device 32a of the first embodiment (comparing the first specific area 141a). As the first special entry section, a plurality of 1-1 special entry section, 1-2 special entry section, and 1-3 special entry section are provided, and the 1st 1st special entry section is provided. 1-1 special entry detection switch as arrival detection means for detecting that a game ball has entered the 1 special entry section, the 1-2 special entry section, and the 1-3 special entry section. , 1-2 special ball entry detection switch and 1-3 special ball entry detection switch are provided. Further, a first distribution device is provided which changes the state between a regulated state for restricting the movement of the game ball moving in the first specific area 141a toward the first special entry portion side and a permissible permissible state. In the jackpot state, an opportunity is given that the first sorting device is allowed in a predetermined round (for example, a plurality of rounds). Then, in the jackpot state, when the game ball can be entered into all of the 1-1 special entry section, the 1-2 special entry section, and the 1-3 special entry section, the jackpot is achieved. It may be configured so that the probability change mode is given after the state ends.

Further, a arrival information storage means for storing each detection information of the 1-1 special entry detection switch, the 1-2 special entry detection switch, and the 1-3 special entry detection switch, and the first specific area. The remaining ball grasping means capable of grasping the number of game balls existing in 141a may be provided, and the stored information of the arrival information storage means may be erased when the game balls no longer exist in the first specific area 141a. ..

Even in the case of adopting this configuration, in the jackpot state, it is possible to give a game in which the player operates the probabilistic change mode step by step, and it is possible to improve the interest. Further, for example, when a plurality of game balls enter the first specific area 141a in quick succession, even if any of the game balls is discharged from the first specific area 141a, another game ball is first. As long as it exists in the specific area 141a, the stored information of the arrival information storage means is not erased. That is, for example, of the two game balls that entered the first specific area 141a at almost the same time, the preceding game ball reached the 1-1 special entry section, but the 1-2 special entry section and , Even if the ball does not reach the 1-3 special entry section, if the subsequent game ball reaches the 1-2 special entry section and the 1-3 special entry section, , Benefits (probability change mode) are given. For this reason, by setting a plurality of game balls into the first specific area 141a, it is possible to greatly increase the expectation of granting the privilege (providing a high probability state of granting the privilege). You can be more interested in the behavior of the game ball in the state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the playability by adding more intonation to the game. Furthermore, the player can extend the high-probability state of granting the privilege by himself (if all the game balls continue to enter the first specific area 141a before being discharged from the first specific area 141a). Good), diversification of game playability, increase of intonation during game, etc. can be achieved.

Further, when the game ball does not exist in the first specific area 141a, the stored information of the arrival information storage means is erased, so that it can be confirmed that the privilege at that time is not given. Therefore, it is possible to improve the crime prevention property, the playability, and the like.

It should be noted that the game ball that has entered the special ball entry section is not the ball entry section that is discharged outside the game area, but the gate portion (passing game) that remains in the first specific area 141a even after the game ball passes through. It may be configured by (providing a passage detecting means for detecting a sphere). Further, the game ball that has passed through the 1-1 special entry section (gate portion) may also pass through the 1-2 special entry section and the 1-3 special entry section. The game ball that has passed through the 1-1 special entry section (gate section) may pass (enter) either the 1-2 special entry section or the 1-3 special entry section. .. In addition, a visual mode changing means (lamp, etc.) capable of changing the visual mode is provided in the 1-1 special ball entry section, the 1-2 special ball entry section, and the 1-3 special ball entry section and its vicinity. Corresponds to the visual mode of the means for changing the visual mode of the 1-1 special ball entry section, the 1-2 special ball entry section, and the 1-3 special ball entry section where the ball entry (passage) is confirmed. It is desirable to configure it so that it changes to the embodiment.

When the first specific area 141a is closed, the first specific area 141a can be opened even if the game ball is present in the first specific area 141a. Alternatively, when the first specific area 141a is closed, the first specific area 141a may not be opened while the game ball is present in the first specific area 141a. ..

It should be noted that the stored information of the arrival information storage means is stored after the possibility of the game ball reaching the first special entry portion 145a in the jackpot state disappears (after the final round or after the first special entry portion It may be configured to be erased (after the end of the last opportunity to be open).

In this case, when the first specific area 141a is opened once, the game is played in all of the 1-1 special entry section, the 1-2 special entry section, and the 1-3 special entry section. Even if the ball does not reach, until the jackpot state ends (until the game ball can no longer reach the first special entry section 145a), the 1-1 special entry section and the 1-2 special If the game ball can reach all of the ball entry section and the first to third special ball entry sections, the probability variation mode is given. Therefore, it is expected that the production opportunities will increase, and the playability can be improved.

(Bb; a configuration in which a start winning device is provided at the entrance of the central unit of the second embodiment) The opening / closing member 475 is omitted corresponding to the entry ball opening 474 of the specific area 473 of the second embodiment. Therefore, a first start winning device is provided as a starting entry means that allows the game ball to pass through (it is designed to be placed in place of the entry detection switch, and the opening / closing member is omitted, so the prize is based on detection. The ball is not made, but the winning ball count is counted), and based on the detection of the starting ball detecting means that detects the game ball that has passed through the first starting winning device, whether to generate a jackpot state as a special privilege A winning or losing lottery will be held. Further, the special display devices 43a and 43b and the decorative symbol display device 42 perform variable display for teaching the result of the winning / failing lottery, and the variation display is stopped and displayed after a predetermined time to teach the result of the winning / failing lottery. Then, if the jackpot state is won, the jackpot state is started. Further, the game ball that has passed through the first start winning device moves in the specific area 473, and the game ball moves in the special safe hole 481b of the first sorting device 477 and the special safe hole 481b of the third sorting device 479. When the above is passed, the corresponding first special flag, second special flag, and third special flag are set to be turned on. The fourth sorting device 480 and the V winning device 476 of the second embodiment will be omitted. In addition, there is no function to hold the variable display.

Then, when the fluctuation display is stopped and the jackpot state is started in the situation where the first special flag, the second special flag, and the third special flag are all set to ON, the probability changes. A jackpot will be given. The first special flag, the second special flag, and the third special flag are the discrimination information setting processing at the end of the variation display of the special display devices 43a and 43b and the decorative symbol display device 42 (the jackpot confirmation flag is turned on. If so, the jackpot is set, and if all of the first special flag, the second special flag, and the third special flag are set to on, the probability variation jackpot is set). The flag. The decorative symbol display device 42 does not display information on the probability variation mode at the timing of the stop display of the special display devices 43a and 43b, and when teaching the probability variation jackpot, it teaches after the jackpot state starts (following the variation display). It may be displayed or taught after the start of a predetermined round). During the jackpot state, the off settings of the first special flag, the second special flag, and the third special flag may be maintained, or the game mode after the jackpot state is confirmed at the start of the jackpot state. (The first special flag, the second special flag, and the third special flag are set off just in case when the jackpot state ends).

Further, the timing at which the variation display as the result teaching effect of the decorative symbol display device 42 as the effect means ends is later than the timing at which the game ball triggered by the variation display is discharged from the specific area 473. Is set to. For example, it takes about 20 seconds on average for the game ball that has entered the specific area 473 to be discharged from the specific area 473, and the fluctuation time of the special symbol display devices 43a and 43b and the decorative symbol display device 42. Is set to 30 seconds to 1 minute.

In the case of adopting the above configuration, among the jackpot states given when winning the winning or losing lottery, the right to generate a probabilistic jackpot of a type more advantageous to the player is applied, and the special of the first sorting device 477 is applied. It is possible to impart gameability such as performing a mission to pass a game ball through all of the safe hole 481b and the special safe hole 481b of the third sorting device 479. Further, the probability variation mode cannot be substantially obtained only by passing the game ball through the special safe hole 481b of the first sorting device 477 and the special safe hole 481b of the third sorting device 479, and the winning / losing lottery is won. Therefore, it is possible to have a very strong interest in both the result of the winning / failing lottery and whether or not the game ball passes through the special safe hole 481b. Therefore, it is possible to add a large inflection to the game, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest.

Further, the variable display of the decorative symbol display device 42 is set so that the game ball triggered by the variable display is stopped and displayed after being discharged from the specific area 473. Therefore, it is possible to impart the game property of waiting for the instruction of the variation display after visually confirming the behavior of the game ball in the specific area 473 and confirming whether or not the right of the probability variation mode is obtained. You can get a stronger interest in variable display in the state where you have the right. In addition, even if the right of the probability change mode is obtained, the right of the probability change mode is meaningless unless the winner is won by the winning / losing lottery and the jackpot is won (the game mode can be switched before and after the jackpot state). Therefore, it is not possible to grant the probability variation mode by itself, but it is granted because it is a probability variation jackpot), so the right of the probability variation mode is granted after the negative winning is first taught in the variable display (become a jackpot). It is possible to prevent the occurrence of situations such as (which should have been granted).

Further, the first special flag, the second special flag, and the third special flag are set to off at the end of the variation display. Therefore, every time the process corresponding to the variable display is completed, it is possible to determine whether or not to give the probability variation mode corresponding to each winning / failing lottery. Therefore, it is possible to improve the crime prevention property, the playability, and the like.

Further, the first special flag, the second special flag, and the third special flag that have been set to be turned on remain on set unless the variation display ends. That is, for example, of the two game balls that have entered the specific area 473 at almost the same time, the preceding game ball passes through the special safe hole 481b of the first sorting device 477 and the special safe hole 481b of the third sorting device 479. However, even if the ball does not pass through the special safe hole 481b of the second sorting device 478, if the subsequent game ball passes through the special safe hole 481b of the second sorting device 478 as long as the variation is displayed. Will be a probabilistic jackpot when a jackpot condition occurs. Therefore, by setting a plurality of game balls into the specific area 473, the expectation of granting the probability variation mode can be significantly increased (providing a high probability state of granting the probability variation mode). The behavior of the game ball in that state can be more interesting. Therefore, it is possible to improve the playability by adding more intonation to the game. Furthermore, the player can prolong the high-probability state of granting the probability variation mode by himself (the game ball may be kept in the specific area 473 before the end of the variable display), and the game playability is diversified and the game is played. It is possible to increase the intonation at that time.

The remaining time of the fluctuation time may be displayed. In this case, the game ball is passed through the special safe hole 481b of the first sorting device 477, the second sorting device 478, and the third sorting device 479 in the specific area 473, and the first special flag, the second special flag, and the second special flag are passed. , It can be said that the grace time for setting all of the third special flags on is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to make the game property of aiming at the passage of the game ball through the special safe hole 481b by the end of the fluctuation in order to generate the probability variation mode.

(Cc; a configuration in which the jackpot type is selected from three or more types according to the combination of the special areas passed by the game balls of the second embodiment) In the second embodiment, the first sorting devices 477 to 477 to the first. 3 The game ball enters the V winning device 476 in a state where it is said that the game ball has passed through all of the special safe holes 481b of the distribution device 479 (when all the first to third special flags are set to ON). By doing so, a probabilistic jackpot (shifts to the probabilistic mode after the jackpot state ends) is given, and the game ball is a V winning device 476 in a state where even one of the first to third special flags is not set to be on, which is a normal jackpot. (Transition to normal mode after the end of the jackpot state) is given, but the pattern of the combination of the special safe hole 481b through which the game ball has passed and the jackpot type associated with it is different for each model. Can be changed as appropriate.

For example, as a special area, there are 1st to 5th special safe holes, and the 1st to 3rd special safe holes can be passed through all by one game ball, but the 4th and 5th special safe holes can be passed through. Is capable of entering a game ball that has passed through the first to third special safe holes, but it is impossible for one game ball to pass through only one of them (for example, side by side). Further, it is assumed that there is a jackpot type similar to that of the first embodiment, and further, the variable winning device 482 of the second embodiment corresponds to the first variable winning device 32a of the first embodiment (having the same configuration). ) Does not correspond to the second variable winning device 32b of the first embodiment, and the variable winning device 482 is opened when the second variable winning device 32b is supposed to be in the open state. (If the first special entry section 145a is opened during the entire period of the long opening of the first variable winning device 32a, it is relatively easy to insert three or more game balls into the first special entry section 145a. Can be done).

When the game ball passes through all the special safe holes (passes out of 5 points), "13RS-1" is selected, and the game is played in either the 1st to 3rd special safe holes and the 4th or 5th special safe holes. When the ball passes (passes 4 points), "8RS" is selected, and the game ball passes through any two of the 1st to 3rd special safe holes and the 4th and 5th special safe holes (passes 4 points). If this is the case, "13RS-2,3" is selected, and if the game ball passes through any three of the first to fifth special safe holes (three points pass), "8RN-1,2" is selected, and the first When the game ball passes through any two of the 1st to 5th special safe holes (passes 2 points), "8RN-1 to 5" is selected (selection rate of 8RN-1 and 2 compared to the case of passing 3 points). Is low), when the game ball passes through any one of the 1st to 3rd special safe holes (passes 1 point), or when the game ball does not pass through any of the special safe holes "8RN-4" , 5 ”is selected and the game ball passes only through the 4th special safe hole (1 point passes)“ 8RN-1 ”is selected and the game ball passes only through the 5th special safe hole (1 point passes) If so, "13RS-2,3" is selected.

As described above, the type of jackpot to be given changes depending on what kind of route the game ball that has entered the specific area 473 takes. Therefore, the behavior of the game ball in the specific area 473 can be more interested, and the interest can be improved.

In addition, there are multiple types of benefits (the game mode that shifts after the end of the jackpot state is different, the number of rounds in the jackpot state is different, etc.), and the game that entered the specific area 473 when the specific area 473 was opened once. Until the ball is ejected from the specific area 473, the privilege to be given is determined according to the combination of the special area (safe hole) that made the game ball reach the specific round of the jackpot state at any time during the jackpot state. The configuration (configured so that different benefits can be granted) is not particularly limited and can be changed as appropriate. For example, a special area in which the probability variation mode is given when the game ball arrives and a special area in which the jackpot state continues when the game ball arrives may be provided. Further, for example, by making the game ball reach the special area where the jackpot state continues when the game ball arrives and continuing the jackpot state, the game ball is given to the special area where the probability variation mode is given when the game ball arrives. May be configured so that can be reached. When such a configuration is adopted, the playability for a specific period can be further improved.

(Dd; Displacement of special region, etc.) In the first embodiment and the second embodiment, the first special ball entry unit 145a, the first sorting device 477, the second sorting device 478, and the third sorting device 479 are special. It may be configured so that the position of the safe hole 481b can be displaced. For example, a driving means for displacementing the first special ball entry portion 145a is provided. For example, there is no first opening / closing member 143a, and the first special entry section 145a is displaced to the first special entry section 145a. It may be configured to change the state between an open state in which the ball can be easily entered and a closed state in which the ball cannot be entered or is difficult to enter. Further, for example, the guide light emitting unit 483 is provided corresponding to all the holes of the first distribution device 477, and the position of the passage connecting the first distribution device 477 and the second distribution device 478 can be changed. Then, it may be configured so that which of the six holes of the first sorting device 477, the normal safe hole 481a and the special safe hole 481b, is determined by lottery, order, or the like. Further, for example, a plurality of patterns of the area of the entrance of the first special ball entry portion 145a in the open state are provided (for example, the front-rear width and the left-right width of the entrance are about 1.5 times the diameter of the game ball, and the game ball is 1. There are cases where balls can be inserted one by one, and cases where the left and right width of the entrance is about three times the diameter of the game ball, and two game balls can be inserted at the same time). By adopting the above configuration, it is possible to make the behavior of the game ball whether or not the game ball reaches the first special ball entry portion 145a and the special safe hole 481b even more interesting. ..

(Ee; lottery means, displacement means of the third embodiment) In the third embodiment, the lottery means for performing the probability change granting lottery for whether or not to give the probability variation mode performed in the jackpot state is the dice member 802 as the displacement means. Although it is composed of the lottery unit 801 including the above, the probability variation granting lottery may be performed by using another displacement means. That is, a plurality of modes when the displacement means is displaced and stopped are provided depending on the difference in posture, position, orientation, shape, etc., so that a mode corresponding to winning and a mode corresponding to non-winning can be distinguished. It should be.

For example, roulette may be adopted as a lottery means. For example, a wheel that has a substantially disk shape in a plan view, has six pockets having an equal width along the outer circumference on the upper surface side, and has the character "" in red corresponding to only one pocket. , The wheel is rotatably supported, and a main body having a track on which the ball can turn is provided on the outer peripheral side of the wheel, and the wheel rotates counterclockwise based on the detection of the second special ball entry detection switch 223b. The ball is derived so as to turn the track clockwise in conjunction with the game ball that has entered the second special entry portion 145b, and the momentum of the ball weakens so that the ball enters one of the pockets of the wheel. Enter the ball.

RFID tags are provided on the outer peripheral surface of the wheel, which is not visible, at a position corresponding to the "this" pocket, and at a predetermined position (for example, the position on the back side) facing the outer peripheral surface of the wheel on the main body side. A reading means for reading the RFID tag is provided. In addition, the bottom of the wheel pocket can be opened. Then, after the ball turning the track is accommodated in one of the pockets (may be provided with a means for detecting the game ball moving on the track), the wheel is rotated and the RFID tag is positive as the reading means. Stop the wheel at the position facing it. Subsequently, the bottom of the pocket portion is opened. Here, when the ball is housed in the "this" pocket, it is detected by the dedicated detection means when passing through the dedicated passage. When the dedicated detection means is detected, the probability change mode is given.

For example, a type of roulette that does not use a ball may be used. For example, a relatively thin wheel (displacement means) is arranged so that the display surface faces forward. The entire circumference of the wheel is divided into eight parts, and each of the divided areas (hereinafter referred to as the divided area) is marked with a number of "0 to 2", and the boundary near the outer periphery of each divided area A pin that protrudes forward is provided in the portion. Of the eight compartments, four (every other) are marked with a "0", three are marked with a "1", and one is marked with a "2". RFID tags are provided on the outer periphery of each compartment area of the wheel.

The main body that rotatably supports the wheel is provided with an indicator needle portion (elastically deformable) whose lower part protrudes in front of the wheel corresponding to the upper position of the wheel, and the RFID tag is provided at the position corresponding to the indicator needle portion. Is provided with a reading means for reading. The value corresponding to the number in the compartment area pointed to by the indicator needle is added to the first special ball entry counter (for example, the value of the first special ball entry counter should be "3" or more as in the first embodiment above. If probabilistic mode is given).

The wheel is rotated by a stepping motor via a drive transmission mechanism that can switch between an interlocking state and a non-interlocking state (for example, a predetermined gear can be displaced to a position where it meshes with another gear and a position where it does not mesh). When the first special ball entry detection switch 223a is detected, the first distribution device 149a is set to the regulated position, the stepping motor is driven to rotate the wheel, and then the drive transmission mechanism is not interlocked. Switch to the state. It should be noted that a brake that can slow down or stop the rotation of the wheel may be provided.

After the wheel is stopped, the drive transmission mechanism is interlocked, and the wheel is rotated until the predetermined "0" section area is in the direction corresponding to the indicator needle ("2" is to the left of "0" in the lower center. (Set to the next reference posture) and stop. The function of returning the wheel to the reference posture (reference mode) constitutes the reset means. By the reset means, the mode (posture, position, etc.) of the wheel when the probability variation grant lottery is started can be made constant. Therefore, basically, the probability variation grant lottery can be performed under the same conditions at all times, and fairness can be improved. Further, since the RFID tag is embedded in the wheel, it can be suitably used when returning the wheel to the reference posture.

In addition, the RFID tag is embedded in the boundary of the compartment area of the wheel to enable more accurate judgment, and it is difficult to tell which one the needle tip of the indicator needle portion is located at the boundary of the compartment area. In this case, the stepping motor may rotate the wheel so that the indicator needle portion is located in the center of the compartmentalized area based on the determination of the reading means.

(Ff; Interlocking of the game ball that has entered the second special entry section of the third embodiment and the dice member) In the above third embodiment, the game ball that has entered the second special entry section 145b and the game ball. The first pressing portion 808 that displaces the dice member 802 is mechanically interlocked via the interlocking mechanism 810, but the interlocking configuration is not particularly limited. For example, among the interlocking mechanism 810, a configuration is adopted in which the area of a portion that can come into contact with the game ball that has entered the second special entry portion 145b is relatively large, or there are a plurality of portions, and the game to the interlocking mechanism 810 is adopted. The displacement operation of the first pressing portion 808 may be different depending on the contact point of the sphere, which of the plurality of interlocking mechanisms 810 is abutted, or the combination of abutments.

Further, for example, a means for measuring the velocity of the game ball that has entered the second special ball entry unit 145b, or a means for measuring the pressure generated when the ball enters the second special ball entry unit 145b and comes into contact with the game ball. May be provided so that a separate driving means (motor or the like) displaces the first pressing portion 808 with a strength corresponding to the measured value of the measuring means.

(Gg; Another Example of Operation of Dice Member of Third Embodiment) The method of moving the dice member 802 of the third embodiment is not particularly limited and can be changed as appropriate. For example, a rotating plate may be placed on the lottery table 803 so that the dice member 802 can be dropped onto the rotating plate, or the room (displacement region) in which the dice member 802 is installed is oriented in the front-rear direction. It may be configured to rotate as an axis a plurality of times and then stop.

In addition, a plurality of types of dice members 802 (4, 6, and 8) are used for the probability variation granting lottery, and the entire room (displacement area) where the dice member 802 is shaken is configured to be displaceable in three stages up and down. The dice member 802 with a smaller surface may be used as the displacement on the upper side increases. In addition, for example, when the outcome of the probability variation granting lottery is determined by the outcome of the upper surface of the dice member 802, the room (displacement region) where the dice member 802 is shaken can be tilted forward, and the dice member 802 stops. In addition, the dice member 802 may be gripped by the left / right adjusting device 805, and the chamber of the dice member 802 may be tilted forward so that the appearance of the upper surface of the dice member 802 can be easily seen.

(Hh; operation confirmation of the lottery unit of the third embodiment) In the third embodiment, the main control device 261 is stored and stored in the lottery result storage means for storing and storing the result of the probability variation granting lottery and the lottery result storage means. Based on the information, whether or not the winning probability of the probability variation grant lottery is within a preset numerical range (for example, whether or not it is within the range of 1/3 to 1/15 for every 100 times, 20 times It may be provided with an appropriate value determination means for determining (whether or not it is within the range of 1/2 to 1/30 each time).

In this case, it is possible to determine whether or not the probability variation grant lottery is properly performed, and if it is determined that the lottery is not performed, a report is sent to the hall computer or the like and fraudulent (for example, business hours). It is possible to check the dice member 802 and the region where the dice member 802 is displaced so that the dice member 802 can easily become a winning mode) and a failure.

The determination result of the appropriate value determination means may be displayed by the decorative symbol display device 42 (determination result display means). In this case, the winning probability of the probability variation grant lottery can be displayed and grasped on the pachinko machine 10 (by the operation of the player), and it is confirmed before the game whether or not the pachinko machine 10 can play the game with a normal probability. can do. Here, the idea of displaying the measured value related to the game on the pachinko machine 10 is applied to another configuration, for example, any winning device such as the first starting winning device 33a for the total number of shots of the game balls in the normal mode can be entered. It may be possible to display the ratio of the winning balls that did not enter, or the ratio of the winning balls that did not enter any winning device to the total number of shots of the gaming balls in the jackpot state.

(Ii; 1st variable winning device of the 3rd embodiment) In the 3rd embodiment, the 2nd variable winning device 32b mechanically uses the game ball entered into the 2nd special winning section 145b and the dice member 802. In the first variable winning device 32a, the first special ball-entry unit 145a is omitted. For example, the first special ball-entry unit 145a and the first special ball-entry unit 145a are configured to be interlocked with each other. A game ball is inserted into the first variable winning device 32a in the predetermined round in a configuration in which the first special ball entry portion 145a is opened at a predetermined timing in a predetermined round in the jackpot state while being provided with the sorting device 149a. The probability that the game ball will enter the first special entry unit 145a when the ball is continuously made is almost the same as the winning probability of the probability variation grant lottery using the dice member 802 (such a probability). It can also be set).

In this case, the probability variation granting lottery can be shared, the burden on the lottery unit 801 can be reduced, and deterioration of the lottery unit 801 can be suppressed. Further, when the lottery unit 801 breaks down, the round in which the second special entry portion 145b is opened is switched to the round in which the first special entry portion 145a is in the open state, so that an emergency measure is taken. It can be performed.

(Jj; effect means) The number, shape, and type of display means for effect are not particularly limited, and can be appropriately set for each model. For example, in addition to the decorative pattern display device 42, a movable display device or accessory may be provided. Further, a dot matrix display device, an EL display device, or the like may be mounted.

Further, in the above embodiment, between the functional position located in front of the decorative symbol display device 42 (in the display unit) as the effect display means and the retracted position displaced from the front (in the display unit) of the decorative symbol display device 42. A movable accessory (movable accessory) may be provided as a displaceable effect means, and the movable accessory may be configured to be displaceable to a functional position in response to a button effect using the effect button 125. ..

In addition, a light guide plate is provided in front of the game area, and a light source that allows light to enter the light guide plate is provided so that the light source emits light according to a predetermined opportunity so that a predetermined display mode is visually recognized on the light guide plate. It may be configured. Regarding the display of the light guide plate, a disapproval display or the like may be set for each model, and when the disapproval display is used, the display may be configured to avoid duplication with the specific character display.

(Kk; Display in front of the game area) In front of the game area (glass unit 137), a transmissive display device (transmissive liquid crystal display device, etc.) may be provided so as to cover almost the entire front of the game area. Good. For example, in the range in front of the area in the game area (in the current situation) where the game ball is unlikely to pass, a predetermined display (the effect display may be performed, the remaining information may be displayed, or the number of acquired balls may be displayed. Alternatively, a predetermined guidance display, for example, a display for guiding the aiming place of the game ball, that is, when the first variable display device 32a is short-opened, the guidance display is performed near the first variable display device 32. It may be configured so that (may be) is performed. In addition, in a state where the trajectory of the game ball is not fixed (the handle 18 is moving by a predetermined amount or more within a predetermined period, the left is hit even though it is the period when the right hit should be made, etc.), the transmissive display device is used. It may be configured to be hidden.

(Ll; Hold icon) The mode and display position of the hold icon 461 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 and the effect using the hold icon 461 (the content of the change information is grasped at the stage when the change information is held and stored). , The hold look-ahead effect that performs the corresponding effect (suggestion of jackpot expectation, etc.) in the mode of the hold icon 461 can be appropriately set for each model. Further, in the above embodiment, in the aspect of the hold icon 461, it is not taught which of the first start winning device 33a and the second start winning device 33b is the variable display based on the ball, but for example, , The hold icon 461 may have information on whether it corresponds to the first variable display or the second variable display, or may be configured to have such an aspect. Good. It is also possible to omit the hold icon 461.

(Mm; Proximity detection means) Further, in the above embodiment, the proximity detection means (mm; proximity detection means) that can detect the proximity of an object to a plurality of locations of the decorative symbol display device 42 and is connected to the input / output port 554 of the sub control device 262. For example, a proximity detection sensor or a touch panel having a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit) may be provided. For example, when the player brings a finger or the like close to the hold icon 461 displayed in the hold display area 462 of the decorative symbol display device 42, the mode of the hold icon 461 is based on the detection of the finger or the like. It may be configured to change or move. In this case, the interest in the hold icon 461 can be increased.

(Nn; Mobile interlocking game) In the above embodiment, data is exchanged between the pachinko machine 10 and a server operated by a game machine maker or the like via a communication mobile terminal or the like owned by the player (so-called mobile). It may be configured so that interlocking games) can be performed. Further, when the mobile interlocking game is terminated, the two-dimensional code including the game information of this time is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42, and the player reads the two-dimensional code on the mobile communication terminal and the mobile communication terminal. In a configuration in which the game information is transmitted to the server by accessing the server, the pachinko machine 10 counts the number of fluctuation counters that count the number of fluctuations of the special display devices 43a and 43b, and the number of occurrences of various jackpot states. A jackpot counter or the like may be provided, and the two-dimensional code displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 at the end of the mobile interlocking game may be configured to include information indicating the values of the various counters. Furthermore, the information on the total number of shots of the game ball, the type of the derived effect, the number of times, the number of times the player operates the effect button 125 during the button effect, and the like are also included in the two-dimensional code. May be good. In this case, the gaming machine maker can grasp the gaming situation.

In addition, the information output from the pachinko machine 10 (information included in the two-dimensional code) includes information on the number of occurrences of various jackpot types and the number of detections of the special entry detection switches 223a and 223b (first special entry). The number of times the probability variation mode is given based on the three detections of the ball detection switch 223a) may be included. In this case, the actual situation during the jackpot state can be grasped by the gaming machine maker side, which can be utilized for the development of a new model or the like.

The value of the counter is erased by being two-dimensionally coded, and other than that, it is accumulated (even if the power is turned off) (erased by turning on the power while operating the RAM erase switch 323). ) May be. Further, the tendency of the behavior pattern of the pseudo-blade member 431 may be configured so that the player can select from several types (with respect to the player performing the mobile interlocking game).

(Oo; Augmented Reality) In the pachinko machine 10 of the above embodiment, the functions of augmented reality and virtual reality (mixed reality) may be provided. That is, when a player installs an AR application provided by a game machine manufacturer's server or the like on a mobile communication terminal and points the mobile communication terminal at the pachinko machine 10 with the AR application activated, the mobile communication terminal is photographed. A virtual image object (character moving image, etc.) added by the function of the AR application is synthesized with the image of the pachinko machine 10 taken by the means (camera), and the display means (display such as a liquid crystal display) of the mobile communication terminal. To be displayed with. Further, the marker for recognizing the type and location of the image object to be derived for the AR application may be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42, for example. Then, when the mobile communication terminal is pointed at the pachinko machine 10 with the AR application activated so that the marker is included in the shooting range, for example, the character is displayed as if it pops out in front of the decorative symbol display device 42. For example, when the first variable winning device 32a is short-opened (immediately preceding interval period), a mode for prompting the ball to enter the first variable winning device 32a is derived, and the game ball enters the first special ball entry unit 145a. When the ball is played, a mode such as a bird jumping out from the first variable winning device 32a may be derived (however, when the marker is out of the shooting range, the display is not updated and such a mode is not derived).

(Pp; real-time clock) A real-time clock capable of grasping the date and time may be provided so that an effect mode corresponding to the information on the date and time of the real-time clock can be derived. In addition, the effect that is easy to be selected may change depending on the time and date (the table for the effect that is easy to select changes). For example, once every two hours, a dedicated effect is continuously derived for about 15 minutes, and the opening period in which the first variable winning device 32a is opened and the opening period in which the first sorting device 149a is opened are set. In a configuration in which the relative timing with respect to the period is not uniform, and the period in which the first sorting device 149a is in the open state is taught or not taught, the dedicated effect is provided. In the derived period, the period during which the first sorting device 149a is opened (the period overlapping with the opening period of the first variable winning device 32a) may be taught.

In addition to providing a real-time clock in the main control device 261 and providing a plurality of fluctuation time determination tables referred to when determining the fluctuation time of the special display devices 43a and 43b, it is relatively short at night (for example, after 21:00). The fluctuation time determination table, which is easy to set the fluctuation time, may be easily selected.

(Qq; simultaneous fluctuation of special figure 1 and special figure 2) In the above embodiment, when one of the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b is performing the fluctuation display, the fluctuation display of the other is a line. Although it is configured so as not to be disengaged (standby), the variable display of the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b may be configured to be executable at the same time. That is, if there is a hold for each of the first variable display and the second variable display, the corresponding variable display is executed (except during the hit state). In the state where the variation display that teaches the occurrence of the jackpot state is performed, the variation display that overlaps with the variation display may be configured so as not to be newly started. Further, when one fluctuation display is stopped and displayed in a manner that teaches the occurrence of a jackpot state, even if the other fluctuation display is changing, the other fluctuation display is interrupted (restarted after the jackpot state ends). ) Or may be erased.

Further, for example, in the decorative symbol display device 42, the first variable display and the variable display by the decorative symbol corresponding to the second variable display (hereinafter, the first effect variable display and the second effect variable display) are simultaneously displayed. It may be displayed, or one of them (the second variable display or the one that is stopped and displayed first) may be displayed preferentially, or both are visually recognized and only one is visually recognized. It may be configured to be appropriately switched to the state in which it is performed.

In addition, in the low ball entry state, the fluctuation display of the first fluctuation display is set to be relatively short, and the fluctuation time of the second fluctuation display is set to be relatively long. The fluctuation time of the second fluctuation display may be set to be relatively long and relatively short. The remaining time may be displayed to suggest or teach the first fluctuation time and the remaining time of the second fluctuation time.

(Rr) In the above embodiment, the jackpot probability, the number of jackpot types, the opening / closing patterns of the variable winning devices 32a and 32b of various jackpot types are not particularly limited, and can be appropriately set for each model. Further, a state in which a high probability state and a low ball entry state (“latent probability mode”) may be provided. Further, the jackpot state in which the latent probability mode is given is not a jackpot where an increase in game balls can be expected, but an opening time of the first variable winning device 32a is short, the number of jackpot rounds is small, and an increase in game balls can be expected so much. It may not be a big hit. For example, the first variable winning device 32a may be opened for 1.8 seconds as one round, and may be repeated twice before the jackpot state ends. Further, the first variable winning device 32a is provided with a small hit state (winning with a predetermined probability when the big hit state does not occur) in which the first variable winning device 32a is opened and closed in the same pattern as the big hit state in which the latent probability mode is given. May be. In this case, since it is difficult to understand the assignment of the latent mode, it is possible to perform an effect suggesting whether or not the latent mode is provided.

In addition, in the case of a big hit in the "latent mode", the decorative symbols are not doublet, but a specific combination on the effective line (a combination of specific hit symbols, for example, in the upper / middle / lower symbol display area, " 3 ”,“ 4 ”, and“ 1 ”are stopped and displayed). Further, as an effect stage of the decorative symbol display device 42, a "precursor stage" that shifts after the end of the big hit state of the "latent mode" and after the end of the "small hit" state is provided, and in the "precursor stage", the background However, it may be configured so that the effect balance or the effect content changes (for example, it becomes easier to select an effect pattern that is normally difficult to select).

In addition, in the above embodiment, the winning probability in the winning / losing lottery fluctuates, but the winning probability does not fluctuate (is constant), and the period of the high-entry state given after the jackpot state ends ( The above configuration may be applied to a pachinko machine in which a plurality of patterns of fluctuations) are prepared. Further, the winning probability in the ball winning support lottery, the opening / closing pattern of the second starting winning device 33b when winning, and the like can be appropriately set for each model.

(Ss) In the above embodiment, the reserved order is set such that the second variable display held after the first variable display already held is digested before the first variable display. The second variation display is configured to be digested preferentially over the first variation display in a back-and-forth manner, but the first variation display based on the entry of the game ball into the first start winning device 33a, And, regardless of which of the second variable display based on the entry of the game ball into the second start winning device 33b, the entry of the game ball into the first start winning device 33a and the second start winning device 33b. In order, the corresponding variation display may be suspended, and the variation display may be configured to be digested in order from the previously reserved variation display.

Further, in the above embodiment, the case where a big hit is won in the winning / failing lottery performed based on the ball entering the first starting winning device 33a and the case where the ball is entered into the second starting winning device 33b are performed. The distribution ratio of the jackpot types that can be given differs depending on whether the jackpot is won in the winning or losing lottery, but it may be configured to be the same. In addition, in the above embodiment, the number of prize balls based on the entry into the first start winning device 33a and the number of prize balls based on the entry into the second start winning device 33b are the same, but on the other hand. May be configured to be greater than the other.

Further, it is also possible to configure so that at least one of the first variation display and the second variation display cannot be held and stored.

(Tt) In the above embodiment, the main control device 261 is configured to perform the normal processing (see FIG. 10) after the main processing (see FIG. 9), but is particularly limited to such a configuration. is not it. For example, after step S111 of the main process, processing such as updating the counter value performed in steps S209 to S218 of the normal process in the above embodiment is performed, for example, in the timer interrupt process performed every 2 msec. The processing performed in steps S201 to S208 of the normal processing in the embodiment and the processing in step S401 performed as the NMI interrupt processing in the above embodiment may be performed. As the process of step S401 in this case, for example, it is determined whether or not the power failure signal SK1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 501, and when the output of the power failure signal SK1 is confirmed, the power failure occurs. There is a configuration in which the flag indicating the occurrence of is turned on. Further, the process of step S401 may be separately performed as NMI interrupt process as in the above embodiment.

(Uu) Further, in the above embodiment, at the start of the variable display of the special symbol, it is reconfirmed whether or not the value of the winning / failing random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to winning, and the result of the confirmation processing (winning / failing flag). It may be configured so that whether or not to generate a jackpot state, a pattern of variable display, and the like are determined according to the state of the above.

Further, in the above embodiment, the main control device 261 determines the launch timing (launch interval) of the launch device 60, but the configuration is not particularly limited to this, and the launch timing is determined by the launch control circuit 312. It may be configured to measure (launch interval). In this case, the control load of the main control device 261 can be suppressed.

(Vv) In the above embodiment, the second start winning device 33b is an opening / closing type starting winning device including the blade member 37, but the opening / closing type starting winning device may be eliminated. Further, in the above embodiment, when the blade member 37 is in the closed position and the second start winning device 33b is in the closed state, it is impossible to enter the second start winning device 33b. The game ball can enter the second start winning device 33b (starting winning opening) even when the second starting winning device 33b is closed (a space through which the game ball can pass between the pair of blade members 37). And the space is connected to the game area). However, when the second start winning device 33b is in the closed state, it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the second start winning device 33b than in the open state (when the second start winning device 33b is in the open state). Can be said that it is easy to enter a game ball).

(Ww) It may be implemented as a pachinko machine of a type different from the above embodiment. For example, a movable means that can be changed into a specific area in which a game ball moving in a game area can enter, an open state that allows the ball to enter the specific area, and a closed state that prohibits the ball from entering the specific area ( Detects variable ball-entry means including a wing member), specific ball-entry means and non-specific ball-entry means that allow a game ball that has entered a specific area to enter, and a game ball that has entered the specific ball-entry means. Detects specific ball entry detection means (condition satisfaction detection means), special starting means that is provided outside the specific area and allows game balls that move in the game area to enter, and game balls that have entered the special starting means. It is provided with a special start detection means for detecting the opening and closing of the variable ball entry means, and when a game ball enters a specific area, the game ball enters the specific ball entry means and the non-specific ball entry means. A predetermined number of game values (game balls) are given to the player regardless of which of the balls is entered, and the main control means sets the variable ball entry means for the first time based on the detection of the special start detection means. A specified number of variable winning means that are opened only once or multiple times, or that the variable ball-entry means is opened for a second time longer than the first time, or that the variable winning means is opened. One round is until the game ball enters, and a winning / failing lottery is performed to determine whether or not to generate a jackpot state in which this is repeated a specified number of times. If a small hit is won in the winning / failing lottery, a small hit state is generated. If a big hit is won in the winning / failing lottery, or if a specific ball entry detection means is detected, a big hit state is generated, and if a special ball entry detection means is detected in the small hit state, a big hit state is generated. It may be applied to a gaming machine such as generating.

In addition to pachinko machines, it is also implemented as an arrange ball machine, various similar game machines such as sparrow balls, slot machines as rotating cylinder type game machines, and game machines that combine slot machines and pachinko machines. You may.

As a basic configuration of a slot machine (rotary gaming machine), "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and an operation means for starting (for example, operation). The dynamic display of the identification information is started due to the operation of the lever), the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button), and the definite identification at the time of the stop is confirmed. A gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, provided that the information is specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

Further, in the slot machine, a plurality of (for example, three) rotating bodies are rotated based on operating the start lever in a state where the game value is separately operated, such as by operating the (max) bet button, and the operation is performed. In the lottery conducted based on the above, when a small winning combination that can be aligned by hitting the stop order of the first stop button, the second stop button, and the third stop button for stopping the corresponding rotating body is won. In addition, a state in which the order is taught and a state in which the order is not taught may be provided.

Furthermore, when a prize is won, the probability of establishing a predetermined small winning combination accompanied by the addition of game value is greatly increased, and the bonus state ends when the number of the first specified number of games is exhausted or the number of the first specified number is exceeded (the first). 1 Special game state), a winning / failing lottery that generates a bonus state, and a child actor (if the winning / failing lottery fails or is performed in parallel with the winning / failing lottery) is established (allowing the winning of the small winning combination) A lottery is held, and it is configured so that it can be stopped in a stop mode based on the result of the applicable / non-applicable lottery and the child actor lottery. ) Is performed, the normal game is replayable without using the game value, and the probability of winning a small winning combination is increased, and multiple rotating bodies used by the normal game. When a small winning combination that can be arranged by hitting the order to stop is won, at least one of the states in which the order is taught is given, and due to the exhaustion of the second specified number of games or the excess of the second specified number of games. There is a second special game state (replay time, assist time, or assist replay time) that ends, and a lottery to shift to the second special game state (for example, in the normal game and at least the normal game among the bonus states). A lottery for small roles, which is a trigger for the transition) may also be performed. Even if the player has won the bonus state or the second special game state, the bonus state or the second special game state will not start unless the corresponding winning combination is won (the rotating body is stopped by the combination of the bonus symbols, and the bonus is given. Bonus state starts when the winning combination is won). Here, the bonus lottery is not performed during the period from the bonus winning to the bonus winning, but the bonus winning is taught by displaying "bonus confirmed" etc., and in each game, the small role lottery and the second special A lottery for the game state is held. In addition, during the period from the winning of the transition to the second special gaming state to the start of the second special gaming state, a display such as "Preparing for the second special gaming state" is displayed and the second special gaming state is won. In addition to teaching, a bonus lottery, a small role lottery, and a lottery related to the period of the second special game state (a lottery for adding the number of games that can be the upper limit of stay and the number of game value acquisitions, for example, the second special game state is 1 for a predetermined game. When it is performed as a set, a lottery for adding the number of sets, etc.) is performed, and a lottery for starting the second special game state is not performed.

The basic configuration of a gaming machine (ball-using rotating cylinder type gaming machine) that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine is "variable to dynamically display an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information and then confirm and display the identification information. The display means is provided, and the dynamic display of the identification information is started due to the operation of the start operation means (for example, the operation lever), and the dynamic display of the identification information is started due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or for a predetermined time. With the passage of time, the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped, and the special gaming state generating means for generating the special gaming state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information at the time of the stop is the specific identification information. In addition to using a ball as a game medium (sharing a game ball of a pachinko machine), a predetermined number of balls are required to start the dynamic display of the identification information, and many balls are required when a special game state occurs. It is a game machine that is configured to pay out the balls.

Further, in the above embodiment, the game ball is paid out as a game value to the upper plate 19 and the lower plate 15 on which the player can put in and take out the game ball. The game ball that is launched and guided to the game area is circulated and used inside the pachinko machine (or a device for cleaning the game ball can be interposed), and the player (of the pachinko machine 10) The game ball may not be taken out (from the front side). That is, while the configuration related to the tank 355 to which the game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall is replenished becomes unnecessary, the game balls discharged from the game area reach the launching device 60 (ball feeding device 63). Mechanism for feeding (storing part of the game ball, mechanism for sending the game ball from the storage part to the launching device 60; the storage part may also be used, or basically the game ball may be sent only by the height difference, or electric. The game ball may be fed by the feeding device of the pachinko machine), and the game ball is discharged or filled from the pachinko machine for maintenance or movement of the game ball or the pachinko machine. Further, in the mechanism for bringing the game ball discharged from the game area to the launching device 60 (ball feeding device 63), the game ball is placed at a position where the player can see the game ball as in the upper plate 19 of the above embodiment. It is assumed that a structure is provided to be derived (as many as the corresponding number) so that the game ball of the upper plate 19 cannot be touched by the player (covered with a transparent plate-like body or the like). May be good.

(Xx) In the above embodiment, the jackpot state is generated only when the jackpot is won in the winning / failing lottery performed when the game ball enters the starting winning devices 33a and 33b. It may be configured so that a jackpot state can be generated by the condition device of. For example, if a big hit is not won in the winning / losing lottery, a small winning lottery is performed, and if the small winning is won, the second variable winning device 32b is opened and the second variable winning device 32b is entered. A jackpot state also occurs when the ball is entered into the second special entry section 145b (when the game ball enters the second special entry section 145b, the jackpot state is not in the probability variation mode. It is also possible to apply it to pachinko machines such as (the right to generate (continue) is granted).

Further, for example, in the first winning / failing lottery based on the ball entering the first starting winning device 33a, the first variable winning device 32a is won in the jackpot state in which the first variable winning device 32a is opened with the first probability, and the normal mode and the time are shortened. Of the modes, the ratio in which the time reduction mode is given is the first ratio, and in the time reduction mode in which it is easy to win the ball entry support lottery and it is easy to enter the second variable winning device 32b, the second start. In the second winning / failing lottery based on the winning ball to the winning device 33b, the second variable winning device 32b is won in the small hit state in which the second variable winning device 32b is opened with a second probability, and the second variable winning device 32b is opened. The game ball that has entered the ball enters the special ball entry portion 145 at a second rate, and a jackpot state occurs (the first variable winning device 32a continues to the jackpot state in which it is opened). It is also possible to apply. When adopting this configuration, the game ball is won in the small hit state in the time reduction mode and the game ball is placed in the special entry section 145, as compared with the case where the big hit state is won in the first win / fail lottery or the second win / fail lottery. It is easier to generate a big hit state by letting the ball enter, and it is faster when the small hit state is won and the game ball is put into the special entry section 145. It is also possible to make it easy to select the jackpot type to which the mode is given.

[Additional Notes]
The technical ideas that can be grasped from the above embodiments are described below.

A. As a kind of gaming machine, for example, there is a pachinko machine. In pachinko machines, when a game ball launched by a launching means enters a starting ball entry means provided on a game board, a lottery is held to determine whether or not a special game state advantageous to the player is generated. The variable display means is used to perform variable display for teaching the result of the winning / failing lottery (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-271480).

By the way, as a gaming machine, there is a demand for new improvements in interest, such as by constantly incorporating new configurations.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest.

Means A-1. A transition is made between a first condition state in which the first condition can be achieved by achieving the specific condition and a second condition in which the second condition can be achieved by achieving the specific condition. A gaming machine characterized in that it can be changed to a conditional state.

According to the means A-1, even if the same specific condition is achieved, the first condition state in which the first condition can be achieved and the second condition state in which the second condition can be achieved by the achievement are obtained. By providing the above, it is possible to obtain a wider variety of directing and playability while suppressing the complexity of the configuration as much as possible. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest. The first condition state is a state in which the first condition can be achieved by achieving the specific condition, but the second condition cannot be achieved.

Means A-2. By achieving the specific condition, the first condition and the specific period in which the second condition can be achieved are provided, and outside the specific period, the specific condition cannot be achieved or the specific condition is satisfied. A gaming machine characterized in that the first condition and the second condition cannot be achieved even if they are achieved.

According to the means A-2, the game can be sharpened, and the playability can be improved.

Means A-3. The first condition can be achieved by achieving the specific condition a specified number of times or more in the first condition state.
The gaming machine according to means A-1 or A-2, wherein different effects can be derived depending on the number of times the specific condition is achieved in the first condition state.

According to the means A-3, a wider variety of effects can be derived. It should be noted that "the above-mentioned specified multiple times may be provided with a plurality of patterns". In this case, it is possible to further diversify the playability and the directing property. For example, if a means for switching between a state in which the game ball entering the entrance is guided to the first point and a state in which the game ball is guided to the second point is provided, and the game ball is guided to the first point, the first The first condition is achieved by reaching one point twice, and when the game ball is guided to the second point, the first condition is achieved by reaching the second point once. You may. Further, in the configuration in which the number of achievements of the first condition is different, when a predetermined button is operated, the interlocking corresponding to the first sensor is internally performed and the interlocking corresponding to the second sensor is performed. It can also be applied to other configurations such as switching to and. Further, for example, a game ball that has reached a special area that can be reached by a game ball moving in a specific area is guided to a special passage, and the special passage has a branch, and the branch has a distribution means (electricity) for distributing the game ball. (Perform a certain operation at a certain timing or mechanically a certain operation) is provided, and a plurality of detection means are provided in the special passage, and the game ball is detected by the route of the game ball moving in the special passage. The number of detection means to be detected is different, and the first condition may be satisfied when the number of detections is a specified plurality of times or more.

Means A-4. The gaming machine according to any one of means A-1 to A-3, wherein the second condition is achievable by achieving the specific condition once in the second condition state.

According to the means A-4, the value of the second condition state can be increased, and further intonation can be imparted by the game. In addition, it is possible to surely derive an effect suitable for the last one, and it is possible to improve the effect.

Means A-5. The gaming machine according to any one of means A-1 to A-4, which comprises a teaching means for teaching that the second condition state has been set.

According to the means A-5, it is possible to raise the understanding of the game playability and to perform an effect that excites the game. In addition, "when the state in which the specific condition can be achieved is started (the first round of the jackpot state), the specific condition, the first condition, and the second The content of the condition is taught. " At that time, the privilege when the second condition is achieved may also be taught.

Means A-6. A state in which the specific condition can be achieved and a state in which the specific condition cannot be achieved are provided.
It is characterized by comprising an assist teaching means for teaching that the specific condition can be achieved at least in the second condition state among the states capable of achieving the specific condition. The gaming machine according to any one of means A-1 to A-5.

According to the means A-5, awareness and game (operation) corresponding to a state in which a specific condition can be achieved (a state in which a game ball can enter the first special ball entry unit 145a). You can have them perform the game, guide the progress of the game, and liven up the game. In addition, it is possible to teach that the conditions for achieving the second condition are finally established, and it is possible to further excite the game. It should be noted that the teaching by the assist teaching means is not started after the specific condition can be achieved, but is started in advance and is performed until the specific condition can be achieved. It is desirable to. Further, it is possible to expand the range of playability by configuring so that the teaching by the assist teaching means (teaching of the teaching means of the above means A-5) may not be performed and by not giving the teaching regarding specific conditions. it can.

Means A-7. A pre-detection means capable of detecting the achievement of the specific condition in advance is provided.
The gaming machine according to any one of means A-1 to A-6, which is configured to be able to derive an effect based on the detection of the advance detection means.

According to the means A-7, for example, by achieving the specific condition once more, at the stage where the second condition can be satisfied, the effect based on the detection of the pre-detection means is performed (the second condition is satisfied by this). It is possible to perform a wider variety of productions, such as (the suggestion is made).

Means A-8. The game area where the game ball launched by the launching means is guided, and
It is provided with a special area that can be reached by a game ball moving in the game area.
The gaming machine according to any one of means A-1 to A-7, wherein reaching the gaming ball in the special region is the specific condition.

According to the means A-8, even if the game ball reaches the same special area, the first condition state in which the first condition can be achieved and the second condition state in which the second condition can be achieved are determined by the arrival. By providing it, it is possible to obtain a wider variety of directing and game characteristics while suppressing the complexity of the configuration of the game area and the like as much as possible.

It should be noted that "making the game ball reach the special area" corresponds to "achieving the specific condition" of the means A-1. Further, regarding the "special area", "a specific area in which the game ball moving in the game area can enter and a special area in which the game ball moving in the specific area can reach" may be provided. In that case, the "specific area" changes to "an open state in which the game ball moving in the game area can enter or is easy to enter, and a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter or is difficult to enter. It may be a "possible specific area".

Means A-9. The game area where the game ball launched by the launching means is guided, and
A specific area whose state can be changed to an open state in which a game ball moving in the game area can enter and a closed state in which a game ball cannot enter.
It is provided with a special area that can be reached by a game ball moving in the specific area.
A game ball is reached to the special area a specified number of times or more in response to a specific period (from the start of the first round of the jackpot state to the end of the final round) in which the specific area is opened at least once. A gaming machine characterized in that benefits (probability change mode, time reduction mode, etc.) that are advantageous to the player are given by letting the player do so.

According to the means A-9, the privilege can be obtained by making the game ball reach the special area multiple times in a specific period, and the privilege can be given by the player's operation (and the privilege can be given). It is possible to impart the playability of (gradually approaching). Therefore, it is possible to enjoy the game with more emotional feeling, such as a higher feeling of exhilaration when the privilege is given closer to the stage. In addition, if the number of game balls that have reached the special area in a specific period is less than the specified number of times, the privilege will not be given, so the time zone when the player can get an uplifting feeling and the opportunity to perform the production. It is possible to improve the playability as well as increase the number of players. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest. It is possible to appropriately combine the configurations of the means A-3 to the means A-8 with the configurations of the present means.

It should be noted that the game ball that has entered the specific area may always reach the special area, or the game ball that has entered the specific area may or may not reach the special area. Good. Further, when the game ball enters the specific area at a specific timing in the specific period, the game ball may be configured to reach the special area without fail, or the game may be played in the specific area at any timing in the specific period. Even if the ball enters, there may be a case where the game ball reaches the special area and a case where the game ball does not reach the special area. In addition, the configuration is not limited to a configuration in which a privilege is given when a game ball that has entered the specific area reaches the special area a specified number of times while the specific area is opened once (specific period). , The privilege may be given when the game ball reaches the special area a specified number of times while the specific area is opened a plurality of times (a specific period). In addition, in the case where the specific area is opened a plurality of times in a specific period, the upper limit of the number of times the game ball can reach the special area when the specific area is opened once, or the game ball is in the special area. You may or may not set an upper limit on the number of times that is valid as the number of times you have reached.

Further, "there are a plurality of types of the privilege, and the privilege to be granted is determined according to the number of times the game ball reaches the special area in the specific period (the privilege is configured to be able to be granted different privilege). ) That may be used. In this case, the playability for a specific period can be further improved.

Means A-10. An arrival detection means for detecting that the game ball has reached the special area, and
The gaming machine according to means A-9, which comprises an error processing means that determines an error state and performs a corresponding process when the arrival detection means is detected other than the specific period. ..

According to the means A-10, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts such as erroneously detecting the arrival detection means and obtaining a privilege other than a specific period.

Means A-11. A arrival counting means that counts the number of times the game ball has reached the special area in the specific period based on the detection of the arrival detecting means.
A residual information teaching means capable of teaching residual information indicating the specified plurality of remaining times in the specific period based on the count of the arrival counting means.
The gaming machine according to means A-10, characterized in that it includes an effect means capable of deriving an effect corresponding to the count of the arrival counting means based on the detection of the arrival detection means.

According to the means A-11, it is possible to grasp the current situation regarding the granting of benefits based on the remaining information, and it is possible to further increase the interest in the game in a specific period, such as proceeding with the game while holding the ideal from the current situation. it can. In addition, each time the arrival detection means is detected, it is possible to derive an effect suitable for the count of the arrival counting means, so that the effect of increasing the production opportunity and improving the interest can be achieved more reliably.

It should be noted that "the arrival counting means may be reset at the end of the specific period". Further, the configuration of the remaining information teaching means is not particularly limited, and the number of remaining times of the specified plurality of times of the display means such as the liquid crystal display device and the segment display device, or the number of times the game ball reaches the current special area can be determined. It may be configured to display, or a movable accessory whose mode is changed according to the number of times the game ball reaches the special area is provided (for example, on both sides of the liquid crystal display device, the liquid crystal is displayed from a substantially vertically extending posture. A pair of left and right movable accessories that can be tilted and displaced are provided on the front side of the display device, tilted according to the remaining number of specified multiple times, and when the specified multiple times are reached, the movable accessory is completed as a predetermined object. For example, another movable accessory descends from above to become a visual mode integrated with the pair of left and right movable accessories, or / and the liquid crystal display device with the pair of left and right movable accessories. It may be related or (such as deriving a display object that is recognized as one with the movable accessory).

Means A-12. The gaming machine according to means A-11, wherein a case where the remaining information is taught and a case where the remaining information is not taught are provided in the specific period.

According to means A-12, there is a case where the specific period is advanced while confirming that the remaining number of specified multiple times gradually decreases (remaining information), and a specific period without knowing how many times the specified multiple times remain. It is possible to provide a case for advancing the game, and it is possible to diversify the playability. In other words, when the remaining information is taught, an effect is derived so that the success of the predetermined mission approaches as the remaining number of specified multiple times decreases, and if the remaining information is not taught, the progress is in progress. Rather, it is possible to diversify the production, such as performing an production that teaches the final result. Further, in the pre-stage of the specific period, there is no residual display when the character A displayed on the display device succeeds the mission alone, and the character A displays whether or not the residual information is taught. If the mission is successful with the character B, the remaining display can be derived, etc.), and more interesting (meaningful) effects can be increased.

In addition, for example, in a configuration in which a privilege is given when the game ball reaches the special area three times or more in a specific period, the remaining three teachings are given at the start of the specific period, and the game ball reaches the special area. The remaining information may be taught by a lottery, and the remaining information may be taught when the player is elected, and not when the player is not elected. Further, when the residual information is updated, the residual information is taught, and when the residual information is updated, the residual information is taught at a timing different from the timing when the residual information is updated. It may be configured to have. For example, when the game ball reaches the special area when the remaining 3 times, the remaining information is not taught by the lottery, and the game ball reaches the special area when the remaining 2 times. Win the remaining information teaching lottery and teach the remaining one time, and when the game ball reaches the special area at the time of the remaining one time, it is out of the remaining information teaching lottery and the remaining information is not taught (here, the remaining information teaching lottery) If you win, you will be taught to grant the privilege because you have already obtained the privilege right with 0 times remaining), and the game ball to the special area to the special area when there are 0 times remaining Remaining information teaching upon arrival If you win the lottery, you will be taught the granting of benefits.

In addition, the meaning of "when the residual information is taught in the specific period and when the residual information is not taught" is (basically) when the residual information is taught in the entire period of the specific period and when the residual information is taught in the specific period. There may be a configuration in which the remaining information is not taught at all, or there may be a specific period in which the residual information is taught in the entire period and a specific period in which the residual information is not taught in a part of the period. There may be a configuration in which there is a specific period in which information is not taught and a specific period in which residual information is taught in a part of the period, and there is a period in which residual information is taught in a specific period and a period in which residual information is not taught. It may be configured to be used.

Means A-13. A winning / failing lottery means for performing a winning / failing lottery as to whether or not to generate the specific period, and
It is provided with a lottery result teaching means for teaching the result of the winning / failing lottery and displaying the result teaching.
When the teaching correspondence effect is performed along with the result teaching display that teaches that the winning or losing lottery has been won, the remaining information is derived in the corresponding specific period.
When the teaching corresponding effect is not performed in association with the result teaching display that teaches that the winning or failing lottery has been won, the remaining information is not derived or the remaining information is not derived in the corresponding specific period. Configured to be
Described in means A-12, wherein the result teaching display accompanied by the teaching corresponding effect has a higher expectation of winning the winning / failing lottery than the result teaching display not accompanied by the teaching corresponding effect. Gaming machine.

According to the means A-13, it is possible to grasp whether or not the remaining information is derived when a specific period occurs after that, depending on whether or not the teaching correspondence effect is performed along with the result teaching display, and the result. It is possible to strengthen the connection between the teaching display and a specific period, and increase more interesting (meaningful) production opportunities that bring out the imagination of the player. In addition, if the teaching-corresponding effect is derived so as to meet the expectation that the association with the specific period is raised from the time of the result teaching means, the winning / failing lottery is won, that is, the degree of expectation that the specific period occurs. Has been raised. For this reason, there are frequent situations in which a specific period does not occur without winning the winning / failing lottery while deriving a teaching response effect that suggests the content of a specific period, which makes the teaching response effect itself unpleasant. Can be prevented. In addition, "expectation is increased" may be derived when the winner is won, and it is set so that it is relatively difficult to be derived when the winner is not won. Can be mentioned.

Means A-14. The winning / failing lottery means, the main control means having the arrival counting means, and
The lottery result teaching means is provided with the result teaching display based on a command from the main control means, and the residual information teaching means is provided with a sub control means for deriving the residual information.
When the detection of the arrival detection means is confirmed, the main control means updates the count of the arrival counting means and outputs a arrival command to the sub control means.
The sub-control means includes a sub-side arrival counting means that accumulates and stores the number of times the arrival command is received in the specific period, and transmits the remaining information based on the stored information of the sub-side arrival counting means.
The gaming machine according to means A-13, wherein the main control means determines the granting of the privilege based on the stored information of the arrival counting means at the end of the specific period.

According to the means A-14, by providing the sub control means, it is possible to reduce the burden on the main control means in terms of the effect. In particular, since the sub control means is also provided with a sub-side arrival counting means that can grasp the number of times the game ball has reached the special area, the game ball is based on the stored information of the sub-side arrival counting means. It is possible to reliably derive the remaining information according to the remaining number of times until the number of arrivals of the special area reaches the specified multiple times, and on the main control means side, the stored information of the arrival counting means at the stage of detecting the arrival detecting means. It is not necessary to perform the process of confirming (it only needs to be confirmed once when deciding to grant the privilege). Therefore, while simplifying the processing of the main control means, the above-mentioned effects such as increasing the production opportunities and enlivening the game are surely achieved.

Means A-15. Pre-detection means for detecting all game balls that have entered the specific area on the upstream side of the special area, and
An emission detecting means for detecting a game ball ejected from the specific area, and
The pre-detecting means and the incoming ball counting means for counting the number of game balls existing in the specific area based on the detection of the discharge detecting means are provided.
An error-in-error arrival detection storage means that stores that the arrival detection means has been detected in a predetermined error state, and
It is provided with a memory erasing operation means which is provided at a position where the player cannot operate and can perform an operation of erasing the memory of the arrival detection storage means during an error.
When the error state is resolved without performing the erasing operation by the storage erasing operation means, the detection information of the arrival detection means stored in the arrival detection storage means during the error becomes the count of the arrival counting means. The gaming machine according to any one of means A-11 to A-14, which is characterized in that it is added.

According to the means A-15, when the player is in an error state due to the occurrence of a defect-free ball clogging or the like and the game is interrupted, the arrival detection means in the error state is detected by the arrival counting means after the error state is resolved. It can be added to the count (added when added by detection, subtracted when subtracted by detection). Therefore, the game can be restarted so as not to be disadvantageous to the player, and the deterioration of the player's interest can be suppressed.

Means A-18. The means according to any one of means A-9 to A-15, which comprises a special special area to which the privilege is given by causing the game ball to reach a special specified number of times less than the specified plurality of times. Amusement machine.

According to the means A-16, the playability can be diversified. In addition, the development that completely changes the situation that seems to be disadvantageous (the situation where it is impossible or almost impossible for the game ball to reach the special area more than once specified) (the game ball is the first in the special special area). 2 It is possible to derive the specified number of times, etc.), and it is possible to improve the motivation to play. The "special specified number of times" may be "once" or "plurality".

Means A-17. The specific area includes a first specific area provided with the special area and a second specific area provided separately from the first specific area and provided with the special special area.
In the specific period, the second specific region is brought into the open state at a timing different (not overlapping) from the first specific period in which the first specific region is in the open state and the first specific period. 2. The gaming machine according to means A-16, which comprises at least the first specific period of the specific period.

According to the means A-17, by separating the first specific area and the second specific area, it is possible to determine which of the special area and the special special area the game ball can reach at present. It can be made easy for people to understand. Therefore, it is possible to get the excitement firmly at the timing of the excitement. In addition, it is possible to make a distinction that the game ball reaches either the special area or the special special area and the game ball does not reach the other, resulting in diversification of game playability and design benefits. It is possible to suppress a situation in which a large gap occurs between the grant rate of the above and the actual grant rate of the privilege.

Means A-18. A-17 means provided with a second open teaching means capable of teaching or suggesting that the second specific region is in the open state before the second specific period is started. The described gaming machine.

By opening the second specific area, it can be expected that the number of times the game ball is reached before the privilege is obtained is smaller than that of the first special area. Therefore, the second specific area can be expected to be reached. It is preferable for the player that the area is opened, and it is also interesting (want to know) for the player. According to the means A-10, only that the second specific region is opened by being able to teach or suggest that the second specific region is opened at the stage before the second specific period. Instead, it is possible to look forward to the teaching or suggestion that the second specific region is in an open state, and as a result, it is possible to improve the playability and the directing property.

It should be noted that "the teaching or suggestion that the second specific region is set to the open state by the second open teaching means is such that the second specific region is in a short time (only during a period when it is difficult to enter the game ball). It may be "what is done by being in an open state". In this case, it is possible to strengthen the association with the fact that the second specific area is opened (the period during which the game ball can enter).

Means A-19. The special area includes a first special area and a second special area.
The specific area includes a first specific area provided with the first special area and a second specific area provided separately from the first specific area and provided with the second special area.
It is provided with a firing operation means capable of changing the strength at which the game ball is launched by the launching means according to the operation of the player.
The first specific area and the second specific area, in response to the operation of the launch operation means, cause the game ball to reach the second specific area without reaching the first specific area, and the game. The gaming machine according to any one of means A-9 to A-18, wherein the ball is arranged so as to be able to reach the first specific region without reaching the second specific region. ..

According to the means A-19, it is possible to add a game property such as hitting a game ball into the first specific area and the second specific area, and it is possible to diversify the game property.

It should be noted that "in the game area, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the first specific area as compared with the first game area in which the game ball easily enters the first specific area and the first specific area. In addition, the second specific area is provided with a second game area in which the game ball can easily enter. " In this case, a game in which a game ball is fired by alternately aiming at both of them so that either the first specific area or the second specific area may be opened is to fire at one of them. A configuration that avoids a situation in which a game ball is more likely to enter a specific area than a game such as continuing (for example, a game ball that can be launched every 0.6 seconds is divided into a first game area and a second game area. Even if you try to make them flow in alternately, a few game balls will flow into one of them during the switching).

Regardless of whether the game ball reaches either the first special area or the second special area, the count of the common arrival counting means of the means A-10 may be updated. When the game ball reaches the 1 special area, the count of the first arrival counting means is updated, and when the game ball reaches the second special area, the count of the second arrival counting means is updated. It may be configured as. Further, the first specific region, the first specific region to be opened in the second specific region, and the open teaching means capable of suggesting the second specific region in advance may be provided.

Means A-20. The gaming machine according to any one of means A-9 to A-19, wherein the gaming ball that has entered the specific region may reach the special region or may not reach the special region. ..

According to the means A-20, it is possible to produce whether or not the game ball that has entered the specific area has reached the special area, and it is possible to increase the production opportunities, diversify the game playability, and the like.

Means A-21. A means characterized in that it is configured to be displaceable in a range including at least a part of the specific area, and is provided with an influence means capable of influencing the movement path of a game ball moving in the specific area. The gaming machine according to A-20.

According to the means A-21, it is possible to increase the variation in the behavior of the game ball in the specific area, such as restricting the arrival of the game ball moving in the specific area to the special area or being assisted by the position of the influencing means. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest. It should be noted that the game ball that has entered the specific area may be configured to reach the special area regardless of the position of the influential means, or the game ball that the influential means has entered the specific area. It may be configured to be displaceable between a position that allows access to the special area and a position that regulates the area.

Means A-22. Pre-detection means for detecting all game balls that have entered the specific area on the upstream side of the special area, and
An input ball number storage storage means for storing and storing the detection information of the pre-detection means, and
An arrival detection means for detecting that the game ball has reached the special area, and
The arrival number storage storage means for accumulating and storing the detection information of the arrival detection means,
Based on the information stored in the arrival number storage storage means and the arrival number storage storage means, the arrival ratio of the game ball entering the specific area to the special area is a preset numerical value. The gaming machine according to any one of means A-9 to A-21, which comprises an appropriate value determining means for determining whether or not it is within the range.

According to the means A-22, it can be determined whether or not the game ball has been properly entered into the specific area, and if it is determined that the game ball has not been properly entered, fraud, failure, etc. Can be checked.

B. There is a pachinko machine as a kind of game machine. In pachinko machines, when a game ball launched by a launching means enters a starting ball entry means provided on a game board, a lottery is held to determine whether or not a special game state advantageous to the player is generated. The variable display means is used to perform variable display for teaching the result of the winning / failing lottery (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-271480).

By the way, as a gaming machine, there is a demand for new improvements in interest, such as by constantly incorporating new configurations.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest.

Means B-1. By achieving specific conditions in response to a specific period, advantageous benefits are given to the player,
In the specific period, a first state in which the specific condition can be achieved and a second state in which the specific condition cannot be achieved are provided.
A gaming machine characterized in that a plurality of patterns of timings in which the first state is set in the specific period are provided.

According to the means B-1, the timing of the first state in which the specific condition can be achieved is not uniform. For this reason, it is possible to increase the production opportunities by performing the production every time the specific conditions are achieved, and to dramatically improve the playability in the specific period while suppressing the rut, and as a result, the interest is improved. Etc. can be planned.

Means B-2. The gaming machine according to means B-1, wherein the privilege is granted by achieving the specific condition a specified number of times or more in the specific period.

According to the means B-2, a wider variety of effects can be derived.

Means B-3. Achievement teaching means for teaching that the specific condition has been achieved is provided.
The gaming machine according to means B-2, characterized in that the means for determining the specific condition to which the teaching by the achievement teaching means is to be performed is provided.

According to means B-3, it is possible to grasp the achievement of a specific condition by teaching the achievement teaching means, but there are cases where it is taught and cases where it is not taught. Can be planned.

Means B-4. The gaming machine according to any one of means B-1 to B-3, wherein the opportunity to be in the first state is provided a plurality of times in the specific period.

According to the means B-4, a wider variety of effects can be derived. In addition, in response to means B-2, "it is difficult or impossible to achieve the specified condition a plurality of times or more in the specific period only by one period in which the first state is set." It may be "configured". For example, in a pachinko machine, a specific condition is achieved by inserting a game ball into a special area of a specific area a specified number of times, and the state changes between the first state and the second state by opening and closing the specific area. When a game ball is inserted into a specific area a specified number of times, or when a game ball is inserted into a game area one less than the specified number of times (one more times or two less times). In some cases, the specific area may be closed.

Means B-5. An effective teaching means for teaching the first state is provided.
The gaming machine according to means B-4, characterized in that the means for determining the first state to which the teaching by the effective teaching means is to be performed is provided.

According to the means B-5, the occurrence of the first state can be grasped by the teaching of the effective teaching means, but there are cases where it is taught and cases where it is not taught. Etc. can be planned.

Means B-6. The gaming machine according to any one of means B-1 to B-5, wherein a plurality of patterns are provided for the number of times the first state is set in the specific period.

According to the means B-6, it is possible to further diversify the playability and the directing property. It should be noted that the longer the period of the first state is, the more advantageous it is for the player.

Means B-7. The gaming machine according to any one of means B-1 to B-6, wherein a plurality of patterns are provided for the number of times the specific condition is achieved in the specific period before the privilege is granted.

According to the means B-7, it is possible to further diversify the playability and the directing property.

Means B-8. When the specific condition is achieved a specified number of times or more in response to a specific period, a privilege advantageous to the player is given, and the number of times the specific condition is achieved in a specific period is less than the specified multiple times. Is a configuration in which the above benefits are not granted.
In the specific period, a first state in which the specific condition can be achieved and a second state in which the specific condition cannot be achieved are provided.
A gaming machine characterized in that a plurality of patterns of timings in which the first state is set in the specific period are provided.

According to the means B-8, the same effects as those of the above means B-1 and the means B-2 are exhibited. That is, in order to obtain the privilege, it is necessary to achieve the specific condition a plurality of times in a specific period, and further, the timing of the first state in which the specific condition can be achieved is not uniform. For this reason, it is possible to increase the production opportunities by performing the production every time the specific conditions are achieved, and to dramatically improve the playability in the specific period while suppressing the rut, and as a result, the interest is improved. Etc. can be planned. It is possible to appropriately combine the configurations of the means B-3 to the means B-7 with the configurations of the present means.

Means B-9. The specific period is provided with a first period in which the first condition can be achieved and a second period in which the second condition can be achieved.
The second condition is configured to be achievable within a predetermined period after the first condition is achieved by achieving the first condition.
The first period and the second period are provided a plurality of times in the specific period.
The gaming machine according to means B-8, wherein a plurality of patterns of relative timings of the second period with respect to the first period are provided.

According to the means B-9, the first state is set when the first period and the second period are well overlapped with each other. Therefore, basically, while aiming at the first period and achieving the first condition, the player expects the achievement of the second condition, which is relatively easy to understand as a player's operation, but adds playability that is not simple. can do. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored quickly while avoiding the playability that is difficult to attach.

Further, by providing the second period separately from the first period, it is possible to set a suitable length as the first period and a suitable length as the second period, for example, the entire first period can be set. It is possible to avoid a situation in which the second period is too long. Further, by providing a plurality of patterns of the relative derivation timing and length of the second period with respect to the first period, it is possible to diversify the playability and the like, and it is possible to suppress the rut.

In addition, "a state in which the first condition can be achieved and the second condition cannot be achieved in the specific period, and a state in which the first condition cannot be achieved and the second condition can be achieved. And the state where the first condition and the second condition can be achieved, and the state where the first condition and the second condition cannot be achieved are provided. " Further, as the first state, not only the state in which the first condition and the second condition can be achieved, but also the state in which the first condition can be achieved and the second condition cannot be achieved, the first condition cannot be achieved. The first state also includes switching to a state in which the second condition can be achieved (or a state in which the first condition and the second condition can be achieved).

Means B-10. The game area where the game ball launched by the launching means is guided, and
A specific area whose state can be changed to an open state in which a game ball moving in the game area can enter and a closed state in which a game ball cannot enter.
A special area that can be reached by a game ball moving in the specific area,
A state in which the game ball is displaceable in a range including at least a part of the specific area and is allowed to reach the special area of the game ball moving in the specific area, and a game ball moving in the specific area. It is provided with a switching means capable of changing the state from the regulated state that regulates the arrival at the special area.
During the specific period, the specific area is opened a plurality of times.
By making the game ball reach the special area, the specific condition is achieved, and the specific condition is achieved.
The privilege is given by allowing the game ball to reach the special area a plurality of times as specified.
It is characterized in that a plurality of patterns of relative timings of the permissible period in which the switching means is in the permissible state with respect to the open period from the opening state to the closed state of the specific region are provided. The gaming machine according to the means B-8.

According to the means B-10, basically the same effects as those of the above means B-9 are exhibited. In other words, the privilege can be obtained by reaching the special area multiple times in a specific period, but the specific area is provided with a switching means, and the specific area is open. The timing of the period and the permissible period in which the switching means is in the permissible state is not uniform. For this reason, after the game ball is put into a specific area, the game of wishing that the game ball reaches the special area is repeated at least a specified number of times, and conventionally, the game ball is basically constant. It is possible to add a non-uniform game with a privilege for which the result of whether or not it is granted has not yet been decided in a specific period in which the ball is only continuously fired with the strength of. As a result, the motivation to play in a specific period can be improved, and the interest can be improved.

Further, by providing the switching means, even when the configuration of the specific region is relatively simple, it is possible to set a suitable length as the open period and a suitable length as the allowable period, for example. It is possible to avoid a situation in which it is too long if the entire opening period is set as the permissible period. Further, by providing a plurality of patterns of the derivation timing and the length of the permissible period, it is possible to diversify the playability and the like, and it is possible to suppress the rut. In addition, it is possible to improve crime prevention by, for example, restricting the period during which the game ball is not expected to enter the special area.

Further, in the case of a configuration in which a specific area is opened a plurality of times in a specific period, a player having a technique of launching a game ball aiming only at a period in which the specific area is open, and a player having such a technique. There is a concern that there will be a difference in advantages and disadvantages in the progress of the game with the player who does not or does not perform the game. In this respect, in this means, the permissible period is not uniform, and there is a high possibility that the game ball is not launched aiming at a specific area according to the permissible period, so that the above technique is difficult to use. , The difference between advantages and disadvantages between players can be eliminated as much as possible. Therefore, any player can enjoy the game without hesitation.

In addition, corresponding to the means B-9, the first condition is achieved by allowing the game ball to enter the specific area, and the period in which the specific area is open, that is, the opening period is the first period. The second condition is achieved by allowing the game ball to reach the special area, and the state in which the game ball can reach the special area, that is, the allowable period is the second period.

Means B-11. The gaming machine according to means B-10, wherein the gaming machine is provided with a notification means for performing at least one of the teaching of the permissible period and the suggestion that the permissible period is started.

According to the means B-11, by providing the notification means, the player can grasp at what timing there is a chance to reach the game ball in the special area even in the configuration provided with the switching means. That is, since it is necessary for the player to first put the game ball into the specific area, he / she is paying attention to the entrance of the specific area, and it is conceivable that he / she cannot pay much attention to the switching means. Compared to the fact that the specific area was opened before that, it may be relatively difficult (difficult to see) whether or not the game ball has reached the special area in the specific area where the game area is further narrowed. There is. In this regard, it is possible to inform the player of the permissible period in an easy-to-understand manner by means of the notification means, and grasp or assume the permissible period while smoothly advancing the game of the specific period aiming at the entry of the game ball into the specific area. Therefore, it is possible to more reliably enjoy the playability related to the granting of benefits.

The "switching means" is provided so that a game ball that has entered the specific area and has not reached the special area can enter and close the specific discharge unit that is discharged to the outside of the specific area. By setting the allowable state, the specific discharge unit may be blocked, while the game ball entering the specific area may be configured to reach the special area, or the switching means can open and close the special area. By providing the switching means in the permissible state, the special area (passage leading to) may be opened so that the game ball entering the specific area can reach the special area.

Means B-12. The arrival counting means for counting the number of times the game ball has reached the special area in the specific period based on the detection of the arrival detecting means is provided.
Granting of the privilege is determined based on the count of the arrival counting means.
The specific period is a plurality of round periods that end based on the lapse of a specified time after the specific area is opened or the entry of a specified number or more of game balls into the specific area. Consists of
As the upper limit of the count of the arrival counting means in one round period, a number smaller than the specified plurality of times, which is the number of times the game ball is reached to the special area to which the privilege is to be granted, is set. The gaming machine according to means B-10 or B-11.

According to the means B-12, by setting the upper limit of the count of the arrival counting means per round, it is possible to surely enjoy the game such as putting the game ball into the special area over a plurality of rounds.

Means B-13. The arrival counting means for counting the number of times the game ball has reached the special area in the specific period based on the detection of the arrival detecting means is provided.
Granting of the privilege is determined based on the count of the arrival counting means.
The specific period is a plurality of round periods that end based on the lapse of a specified time after the specific area is opened or the entry of a specified number or more of game balls into the specific area. Consists of
The gaming machine according to any one of means B-10 to B-12, wherein the arrival counting means can be counted a plurality of times in one round period.

According to the means B-13, the game balls reach the special area (for example, reach the special area) by allowing (counting) the entry of the game balls into the special area of a plurality of game balls in one round. With only one chance left, you can play the game aiming to enter the special area with hope until the end (even if it is not enough twice up to the specified multiple times).

Means B-14. Of the permissible period, the instruction that the game ball is in the permissible period may be given corresponding to the period in which the game ball may exist in the specific area, and during the period in which the game ball cannot exist in the specific area. Correspondingly, the gaming machine according to any one of means B-10 to B-13, characterized in that the instruction of the allowable period is not performed.

Even if the permissible period is taught, if it is in a state where the game ball cannot be put into a specific area, the player cannot do anything and there is a risk that the interest will be lowered. Therefore, according to the means B-14, it is possible to avoid such a possibility by teaching the permissible period only in the situation where the game ball is expected to reach the special area.

Means B-15. The game ball that has entered the specific area and has reached the special area is discharged from the specific area.
A specific discharge unit is provided, wherein a game ball that enters the specific area and does not reach the special area enters the specific area and is discharged from the specific area.
The gaming machine according to any one of means B-10 to B-14, wherein the special region and the specific discharge portion are arranged side by side in the front-rear direction.

According to the means B-15, it is possible to make it difficult to tell whether or not the game ball that has entered the specific area has reached the special area, and in that respect, another effect means (the game ball reaches the special area). Whether or not the game ball has reached the special area only a specified number of times, etc.) can be produced, and the effectability can be improved.

Means B-16. During the opening period, when the game ball enters the specific area, the first opening period in which the game ball may reach the special area and the game ball enter the specific area. However, there is a second opening period in which the game ball is unlikely to reach the special area.
When the first opening period and the second opening period are provided in the specific period, the specific area is set to the closed state between the first opening period and the second opening period. The gaming machine according to any one of means B-10 to B-15, characterized in that a closing period is intervened.

According to the means B-16, by distinguishing the first opening period and the second opening period, it is possible to give a sharpness to the game in a specific period. Furthermore, by interposing a closing period between the first opening period and the second opening period, it becomes easier to distinguish the first opening period, and it is possible to grasp the points that the player should concentrate on or the points that are exciting. Therefore, you can enjoy the game more positively.

In addition, "In the first opening period, a special first opening period is provided in which the game ball always reaches the special area when the game ball enters the specific area during the first opening period. It may be "what you are doing". In this case, it is possible to improve the motivation to play by providing an easy-to-understand first opening period in which the ball is always reached in the special area when the game ball is put into the specific area.

Means B-17. In the specific period, the first opening period and the second opening period are provided, and the first opening period is provided a plurality of times.
The gaming machine according to means B-16, which comprises a fake derivation means capable of deriving an aspect similar to the teaching or suggestion by the notification means corresponding to the second opening period.

According to the means B-17, it is possible to diversify the specific period and, by extension, diversify the playability of the specific period.

Means B-18. An arrival detection means for detecting that the game ball has reached the special area, and
A arrival counting means that counts the number of times the game ball has reached the special area in the specific period based on the detection of the arrival detecting means.
A residual information teaching means capable of teaching residual information indicating the specified plurality of remaining times in the specific period based on the count of the arrival counting means.
The gaming machine according to means B-16 or B-17, characterized in that the means for notifying the remaining number of open times that can be taught or suggested for the remaining number of times of the first open period in the specific period is provided.

According to the means B-18, it becomes easier to grasp the current situation by comparing the number of times the game ball reaches the special area required for the privilege to be granted and the number of times of the remaining first opening period, and the information is obtained. You can get interested in the game based on it. Further, "the remaining opening number notification means may suggest that the remaining number of times of the first opening period remaining in the specific period does not remain". In this case, you can enjoy the surprise effect that the first opening period, which was thought to be not left, was left, and because of the possibility of the surprise effect, the effect is not actually derived. Even in this case, the game can be played with the hope that the effect will be derived until the end.

Means B-19. The specific period is a plurality of round periods that end based on the lapse of a specified time after the specific area is opened or the entry of a specified number or more of game balls into the specific area. Consists of
The round period includes a normal round period in which the opening period is composed of only the second opening period and an opportunity round period in which the opening period includes the first opening period.
The gaming machine according to any one of means B-16 to B-18, wherein immediately after the start of the opportunity round period is the first opening period.

According to means B-19, when the opportunity round period is started, the first open period is first derived, so that, for example, a specific area between the round periods is closed. If the act of refraining from launching the game ball during the period is performed, there is a possibility of reducing the chance of the game ball entering a specific area during the first opening period. For this reason, it is possible to suppress the difference between a player who makes full use of the game technology such as refraining from launching the game ball during the closed period and suppressing the reduction of the game ball and a player who does not. Even a player can enjoy the game under the same conditions as possible.

Means B-20. The gaming machine according to means B-19, wherein the switching means is brought into the permissible state when the specified number of gaming balls enter the specific area during the round period.

According to the means B-20, when a specified number of game balls are inserted into a specific area that is closed by entering a specified number of game balls, the game balls are placed in a special area. Will reach. Therefore, in each opening period, a larger number of game balls than the specified number are entered into the specific area (the specified number of game balls and a larger number of game balls enter the specific area almost at the same time. It is possible to add playability such as playing a game aiming at (balling).

Means B-21. Means B-10, characterized in that a dedicated effect can be derived when the game ball reaches the special area more than a plurality of times in response to the specific period. The gaming machine according to any one of B-20.

According to the means B-21, a special effect can be derived as a privilege when the game ball reaches the special area more than a specified number of times. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the impression that the game ball has reached the special area more than a specified number of times is completely useless. In addition, "In a configuration in which the winning probability of a predetermined lottery (whether or not the specific period is generated) can be set in a plurality of stages by a predetermined operation, the setting of the winning probability is suggested or suggested as the dedicated effect. It may be configured so that the effect to be taught can be derived. ”In this case, the action and effect of the means B-18 described above are more prominently exhibited.

C. There is a pachinko machine as a kind of game machine. In pachinko machines, when a game ball launched by a launching means enters a starting ball entry means provided on a game board, a lottery is held to determine whether or not a special game state advantageous to the player is generated. The variable display means is used to perform variable display for teaching the result of the winning / failing lottery (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-271480).

By the way, as a gaming machine, there is a demand for new improvements in interest, such as by constantly incorporating new configurations.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest.

Means C-1. Equipped with multiple means of achieving specific conditions
The condition achievement means includes a first condition achievement means capable of achieving the first specific condition and a second condition achievement means capable of achieving the second specific condition.
By achieving a plurality of predetermined specific conditions including at least one of the first specific condition and the second specific condition, a privilege advantageous to the player is given (compared to the case where the specific condition is not reached). A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the means C-1, it is possible to impart the playability of going up the stairs until the privilege is granted step by step (gradually approaching the grant of the privilege), and more emotionally embrace and enjoy the game. You can get it. Therefore, it is possible to increase the time zone in which the player can get an uplifting feeling and the opportunity to perform the production, and to improve the playability, and as a result, the interest can be improved. It should be noted that this means includes a configuration in which the condition achievement means are only the first condition achievement means and the second condition achievement means, and the privilege is given by achieving the first condition and the second condition.

Means C-2. The gaming machine according to means C-1, wherein a plurality of patterns are provided for a combination of the plurality of specific conditions that must be achieved before the privilege is granted.

According to the means C-2, it is possible to further diversify the playability and the directing property.

Means C-3. The gaming machine according to means C-1 or C-2, which comprises a target teaching means for teaching the condition achievement means, which is a target for achieving the specific condition for granting the privilege.

According to the means C-3, it is possible to prevent a situation in which it is not possible to recognize which condition achievement means should achieve the specific condition.

Means C-4. The gaming machine according to any one of means C-1 to C-3, wherein the privilege is given by achieving the plurality of predetermined specific conditions in a designated order.

According to means C-4, it is possible to increase the chances that the player can concentrate and get excited. It should be noted that "a plurality of patterns are provided in the order of achievement of the plurality of specific conditions that must be achieved before the privilege is granted". In this case, it is possible to further diversify the playability and the directing property.

Means C-5. The game area where the game ball launched by the launching means is guided, and
In a gaming machine provided with a specific region into which a gaming ball moving in the gaming area can enter.
It is provided with a plurality of special areas provided at positions where the game ball moving in the specific area may or may not reach.
The plurality of special regions include at least a first special region and a second special region.
When the game ball moving in the specific area reaches the second special area without reaching the first special area, and when it reaches the first special area without reaching the second special area. There is,
A game ball moving in the specific area is visibly configured from the front of the game machine.
A gaming machine characterized in that a privilege advantageous to a player is given by causing a game ball to reach the first special area and a plurality of predetermined special areas including the second special area.

According to the means C-5, by allowing the game ball to reach a plurality of predetermined special areas, it is possible to impart the game property of gradually approaching the granting of the privilege, and to be more emotionally embraced. You can enjoy the game. Therefore, it is possible to increase the time zone in which the player can get an uplifting feeling and the opportunity to perform the production, and to improve the playability, and as a result, the interest can be improved. It should be noted that "reaching the game ball to the first special area corresponds to the achievement of the first condition, and causing the game ball to reach the second special area corresponds to the achievement of the second condition. It is possible to appropriately combine the configurations of the means C-1 to the means C-4 with the configurations.

Means C-6. The game ball may reach one of the first special area and the second special area and then reach the other, and one game ball that has entered the specific area is discharged from the specific area. The gaming machine according to means C-5, wherein the privilege is configured to be able to be granted by reaching the plurality of predetermined special areas in the meantime.

According to the means C-6, the behavior of the game balls arriving at a plurality of special areas can be more interesting, and if even one game ball is put into a specific area, a privilege is given. Since there is a possibility, it is possible to always have an expectation for a game ball that has entered a specific area (a game ball that has entered a specific area).

Means C-7. The specific area is configured so that the state can be changed into an open state in which a game ball moving in the game area can enter and a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter.
When the game ball reaches the plurality of predetermined special areas in response to the specific period in which the specific area is opened only a plurality of times, a privilege (probability variation mode, time) that is advantageous to the player. The gaming machine according to means C-5 or C-6, wherein a shortened mode or the like is provided.

According to the means C-7, in a specific period in which the specific area is open, a mission is performed to reach a plurality of predetermined specific areas by determining whether or not the privilege is given. Playability can be imparted. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in a specific period.

In addition, as the "privilege", "a second state (a state in which the winning probability of a predetermined lottery is increased, etc.) that is more advantageous to the player than the first state is given after the end of the specific period" and the like can be mentioned. Be done. In this case, if the game ball cannot reach the plurality of predetermined special areas corresponding to the specific period, the first state is granted after the end of the specific period. ..

In addition, "there are a plurality of types of the privilege, and the privilege to be granted is determined according to the combination of the special areas where the game ball is reached during the specific period (the privilege is configured to be able to be granted different privilege). It may be "that". In this case, the playability for a specific period can be further improved.

Means C-8. A plurality of arrival detection means for detecting the arrival of the game ball in each of the special areas, and
A arrival information storage means for storing each detection information of the plurality of arrival detection means, and
It is provided with a remaining ball grasping means capable of grasping the number of game balls existing in the specific area.
The gaming machine according to means C-7, wherein the stored information of the arrival information storage means is erased when the gaming ball no longer exists in the specific area.

According to the means C-8, for example, when a plurality of game balls enter a specific area in quick succession, even if one of the game balls is discharged from the specific area, another game ball is in the specific area. As long as it exists in, the stored information of the arrival information storage means is not erased. That is, for example, in a configuration in which a privilege is given by allowing a game ball to reach (via, pass through) both the first special area and the second special area as a special area, the ball enters a specific area almost at the same time. Of the two game balls, when the preceding game ball reaches the first special area, but the succeeding game ball reaches the second special area even if it does not reach the second special area. Will be given benefits. For this reason, by setting a plurality of game balls into a specific area, it is possible to greatly increase the expectation of granting the privilege (making it a high probability state of granting the privilege), and the game in that state. The behavior of the sphere can be more interesting. Therefore, it is possible to improve the playability by adding more intonation to the game. Furthermore, the player can prolong the high-probability state of granting the privilege by himself (it is sufficient to keep the game ball in the specific area before all the game balls are discharged from the specific area), and the game is playable. It is possible to diversify and increase intonation during games.

Further, when the game ball does not exist in the specific area, the stored information of the arrival information storage means is erased, so that it can be confirmed that the privilege at that time is not given. Therefore, it is possible to improve the crime prevention property, the playability, and the like.

Even if the game ball exists in the specific area when the specific area is closed, the specific area may be set to the open state, or the specific area may be closed. When the state is set, the specific area may not be opened while the game ball is present in the specific area.

Means C-9. A plurality of arrival detection means for detecting the arrival of the game ball in each of the special areas, and
It is provided with a arrival information storage means for storing each detection information of the plurality of arrival detection means.
Described in means C-7, wherein the stored information of the arrival information storage means is erased after the possibility of the game ball reaching the special area disappears in the specific period. Game machine.

According to the means C-9, even if the game ball does not reach a plurality of predetermined special areas when the specific area is opened once, until the specific period ends (game to the special area). If the game ball can reach a plurality of predetermined special areas (until the ball becomes unreachable), a privilege will be granted. Therefore, it is expected that the production opportunities will increase, and the playability can be improved.

Means C-10. A game ball that moves in the specific area is configured to be able to enter the ball, and is arranged on the downstream side of the plurality of special areas.
An opportunity detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the opportunity entry means and
Granting means for granting special benefits (big hit state) based on the detection of the trigger detecting means, and
A plurality of arrival detection means for detecting the arrival of the game ball in each of the special areas, and
It is provided with a arrival information storage means for storing each detection information of the plurality of arrival detection means.
There are multiple types of special benefits,
As the privilege, the special privilege of a type advantageous to the player is selected.
A means C characterized in that when the trigger detection means is detected and the grant of the special privilege is determined, the type of the special privilege is determined based on the stored information of the arrival information storage means. The gaming machine according to -5 or C-6.

According to the means C-10, a plurality of predetermined special benefits given when the game ball enters the triggering ball means, with the right to select a more advantageous type for the player. It is possible to impart playability such as performing a mission to reach a game ball in a special area. Furthermore, it is not possible to obtain a practical benefit simply by reaching a plurality of predetermined special areas, and it is necessary to allow the game ball to enter the ball entry means. It is possible to have a very strong interest in the behavior of the game ball after the game ball reaches a plurality of special areas. Therefore, it is possible to add a large inflection to the game, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest.

It should be noted that "the specific area is configured to be able to change state between an open state in which a game ball moving in the game area can enter and a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter, and the specific area is the specific area. When the area is won in the open lottery for whether or not the area is set to the open state, the open state is set, and when the game ball exists in the specific area, the open lottery is not performed, and the specific area is specified. The game ball exists based on the remaining ball grasping means even after the first specified time has passed since the detection of the pre-detection means for detecting all the game balls that have entered the area on the upstream side of the special area is performed. Then, an error state is generated when the determination is made, and the second specified time from the detection of the trigger detection means to the granting of the special privilege elapses. 1 It may be set so that the specified time elapses. " In this case, it is possible to more reliably prevent the granting of special benefits in a situation where the trigger detection means may be detected illegally.

Means C-11. The remaining ball grasping means capable of grasping the number of game balls existing in the specific area is provided.
The gaming machine according to means C-10, wherein the stored information of the arrival information storage means is erased when the gaming ball no longer exists in the specific area.

According to the means C-11, for example, when a plurality of game balls enter a specific area in quick succession, even if one of the game balls is discharged from the specific area, another game ball is in the specific area. As long as it exists in, the stored information of the arrival information storage means is not erased. That is, for example, in a configuration in which a privilege is given by allowing a game ball to reach (via, pass through) both the first special area and the second special area as a special area, the ball enters a specific area almost at the same time. Of the two game balls, when the preceding game ball reaches the first special area, but the succeeding game ball reaches the second special area even if it does not reach the second special area. Will be given benefits. For this reason, by setting a plurality of game balls into a specific area, it is possible to greatly increase the expectation of granting the privilege (making it a high probability state of granting the privilege), and the game in that state. The behavior of the sphere can be more interesting. Therefore, it is possible to improve the playability by adding more intonation to the game. Furthermore, the player can prolong the high-probability state of granting the privilege by himself (it is sufficient to keep the game ball in the specific area before all the game balls are discharged from the specific area), and the game is playable. It is possible to diversify and increase intonation during games.

Further, when the game ball does not exist in the specific area, the stored information of the arrival information storage means is erased, so that it can be confirmed that the privilege is not given at that time. Therefore, it is possible to improve the crime prevention property, the playability, and the like.

Means C-12. A starting ball entry means configured to allow a game ball to pass through corresponding to the entrance of the specific area.
A start-in ball detection means for detecting a game ball that has passed through the start-in ball means, and a start-in ball detection means.
Based on the detection of the start-in ball detection means, a winning / failing lottery is performed to determine whether or not to grant a special privilege advantageous to the player, and if the winning / failing lottery is won, the granting means for granting the special privilege and
A plurality of arrival detection means for detecting the arrival of the game ball in each of the special areas, and
It is provided with a arrival information storage means for storing each detection information of the plurality of arrival detection means.
A plurality of types of the special privilege are provided, and as the privilege, the special privilege of a type advantageous to the player is selected when the grant of the special privilege is decided.
The gaming machine according to means C-5 or C-6, wherein the granting means determines the type of the special privilege based on the stored information of the arrival information storage means when the winning or losing lottery is won. ..

According to the means C-12, among the special benefits given when the winner is won in the winning / losing lottery, the right to generate a special benefit of a type more advantageous to the player is applied to a plurality of predetermined special areas. It is possible to impart playability such as performing a mission to reach a game ball. Furthermore, it is not possible to obtain a substantial privilege simply by reaching a plurality of predetermined special areas, and it is necessary to win the winning / failing lottery. Therefore, the result of the winning / failing lottery and the game ball Can be very intriguing both whether or not they reach a special territory. Therefore, it is possible to add a large inflection to the game, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest.

Means C-13. A production means for executing a result teaching effect for teaching the result of the winning / failing lottery performed based on the detection of a predetermined game ball by the starting ball detecting means is provided.
The gaming machine according to means C-12, wherein the timing of ending the result teaching effect is set to be later than the timing at which the predetermined gaming ball is discharged from the specific region.

According to the means C-13, after visually recognizing the behavior of the game ball in a specific area and confirming whether or not the right to grant the privilege is obtained, it is possible to impart the game property of waiting for the teaching of the result teaching effect. It is possible to have a stronger interest in the result teaching production in the state where the privilege is granted. In addition, even if the grant of the privilege is confirmed, if the prize is won in the winning / failing lottery and the special privilege is not granted, there is no point in granting the privilege. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the grant of benefits is confirmed later.

Means C-14. The gaming machine according to means C-12 or C-13, wherein the stored information of the arrival information storage means is erased when the process corresponding to the result teaching effect is completed.

According to the means C-14, since the stored information of the arrival information storage means is deleted every time the process corresponding to the result teaching effect is completed, whether or not to give the privilege corresponding to each winning / losing lottery is determined. Can be confirmed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the crime prevention property, the playability, and the like.

Further, for example, the stored information of the arrival information storage means is not erased unless the result teaching effect is completed. That is, for example, in a configuration in which a privilege is given by allowing a game ball to reach (via, pass through) both the first special area and the second special area as a special area, the ball enters a specific area almost at the same time. Of the two game balls, when the preceding game ball reaches the first special area, but the succeeding game ball reaches the second special area even if it does not reach the second special area. Will be given benefits. For this reason, by setting a plurality of game balls into a specific area, it is possible to greatly increase the expectation of granting the privilege (making it a high probability state of granting the privilege), and the game in that state. The behavior of the sphere can be more interesting. Therefore, it is possible to improve the playability by adding more intonation to the game. Furthermore, the player can prolong the high-probability state of granting the privilege by himself (it is sufficient to keep the game ball in a specific area before the end of the result teaching effect), diversify the playability, and play the game. It is possible to increase intonation.

Means C-15. Means C- characterized in that a reach teaching means for indicating that the game ball has arrived corresponding to each of the plurality of predetermined special regions based on the stored information of the arrival information storage means is provided. The gaming machine according to any one of 8 to C-14.

According to the means C-15, which of the plurality of predetermined special areas the game ball has already reached, and which remaining special area the game ball should reach. It is possible to grasp more clearly whether it is.

Means C-16. Pre-detection means for detecting all game balls that have entered the specific area on the upstream side of the special area, and
A plurality of arrival detection means for detecting the arrival of the game ball in each of the special areas, and
A arrival information storage means for storing each detection information of the plurality of arrival detection means, and
It is provided with a remaining ball grasping means capable of grasping the number of game balls existing in the specific area.
The ball entry effect is performed based on the detection of the pre-detection means.
The arrival effect is performed based on the detection of the arrival detection means.
The pattern of the ball entry effect is determined according to the storage information of the remaining ball grasping means and the arrival information storage means.
The gaming machine according to any one of means C-5 to C-15, wherein the pattern of the arrival effect is determined according to the stored information of the arrival information storage means.

According to the means C-16, it is possible to easily recognize how close the state is to the granting of the privilege, and the production becomes more flashy as the expectation for the granting of the privilege and the granting of the special privilege increases. It is possible to greatly excite the game. Further, it is possible to derive different effects depending on the number and combination of arrival detection means for which detection has been performed, and it is possible to improve the effectability.

Means C-17. As the plurality of special regions, a first special region, a second special region, and a third special region are provided.
The game ball that has reached the first special region is configured to be reachable to one of the second special region and the third special region.
When the game ball that has entered the specific area reaches the first special area and the second special area, the first privilege is given, and the game ball that has entered the specific area is the first special area. The gaming machine according to any one of means C-5 to C-16, wherein a second privilege different from the first privilege is given when the third specific area is reached.

According to the means C-17, the privilege to be given changes depending on what kind of route the game ball that has entered the specific area takes. Therefore, the behavior of the game ball in a specific area can be more interesting, and the interest can be improved.

Means C-18. Described in any of means C-5 to C-17, wherein at least one of the plurality of predetermined special regions is configured to be relatively displaceable with respect to the other special regions. Game machine.

According to the means C-18, the behavior of the game ball, such as whether or not the game ball reaches a plurality of predetermined special areas, can be made even more interesting.

D. There is a pachinko machine as a kind of game machine. In pachinko machines, when a game ball launched by a launching means enters a starting ball entry means provided on a game board, a lottery is held to determine whether or not a special game state advantageous to the player is generated. The variable display means is used to perform variable display for teaching the result of the winning / failing lottery (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-271480).

By the way, as a gaming machine, there is a demand for new improvements in interest, such as by constantly incorporating new configurations.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest.

Means D-1. There are preconditions and specific conditions,
When the specific condition is achieved while the precondition is achieved, a privilege advantageous to the player is given as compared with the case where the specific condition is achieved without achieving the precondition. , A gaming machine characterized by being easily granted.

According to the means D-1, even when the specific condition is achieved, the privilege to be given differs depending on whether or not the precondition is achieved. As a result, more diverse playability can be added, and the interest can be improved. In addition, when the specific condition is achieved, even if the precondition is not achieved, a privilege with a smaller benefit than when the precondition is achieved may be given, or the specific condition is achieved. In this case, if the preconditions are not achieved, no privilege may be given.

Means D-2. The gaming machine according to means D-1, characterized in that it includes a precondition teaching means for teaching the preconditions for granting the privilege.

According to the means D-2, it is possible to easily recognize what kind of preconditions should be achieved. In addition, when the opportunity to achieve a specific condition is given, the opportunity to achieve the precondition may be always given, or it may be configured so that it may or may not be given. Good. Further, the derivation timing of the trigger for generating the opportunity to achieve the precondition may be one pattern, or a plurality of patterns may be provided.

Means D-3. The gaming machine according to means D-1 or D-2, characterized in that it includes a premise achievement teaching means for teaching that the precondition is achieved.

According to the means D-3, it is possible to easily recognize that the value of achieving the specific condition is increasing, and the feeling of exhilaration in such a state can be enjoyed.

Means D-4. The gaming machine according to means D-3, wherein the premise achievement teaching means may or may not be taught that the precondition has been achieved.

According to the means D-4, it is possible to add a wider variety of playability by generating a state in which it is difficult to know whether or not the preconditions have been achieved.

Means D-5. There are an achievement teaching state in which it is taught that the precondition has been achieved by the premise achievement teaching means, and an achievement non-teaching state in which the premise is not taught.
The gaming machine according to means D-4, wherein an opportunity to shift to the achievement teaching state is given based on a designated operation of the player during a designated period.

According to the means D-5, it is considered that it is advantageous for the player to be in the achievement teaching state, and by making the transition to such a state feasible according to the result of the player's intention and action, the game is played. It is possible to improve motivation. In addition, as the designated operation, the operation of the effect operating means for deriving the behavior of the effect means corresponding to the predetermined period by performing the operation in the predetermined period, or in the case of a pachinko machine, a specific input provided in the game area. Examples include entering a ball into a ball.

Means D-6. A precondition validity period in which the achievement of the precondition is valid and a specific validity period in which the achievement of the specific condition is valid are provided.
Any of the means D-1 to D-4, characterized in that the precondition, the precondition validity period, and the specific validity period may end in a state where the specific condition is not achieved. Described gaming machine.

According to the means D-6, it is possible to add sharpness and intonation to the game, and it is possible to avoid a situation in which the gambling is unnecessarily inflamed. The premise validity period and the specific validity period may be determined by time, or detection of a predetermined behavior (detection of a predetermined number of times of a predetermined operation means, detection of a specified number of times of a game ball passing through a specific area). Etc.).

Means D-7. The gaming machine according to means D-6, wherein the premise valid period and the remaining period of the specific valid period can be taught.

According to the means D-7, the game can be properly executed by having the player understand the game playability. In addition, there may be a case where the remaining period is taught and a case where the remaining period is not taught.

Means D-8. Means D-1 to D, characterized in that when the specific condition is achieved while the precondition is achieved, the state in which the precondition is achieved may or may not be resolved. The gaming machine according to any one of -7.

According to the means D-8, it is possible to provide a state in which the privilege is easily given continuously, and it is possible to add sharpness and intonation to the game.

Means D-9. A first privilege and a second privilege are provided as the privilege given when the precondition is achieved and the specific condition is achieved.
The gaming machine according to any one of means D-1 to D-8, wherein the second privilege is a privilege that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege.

According to the means D-9, sharpness and intonation can be added to the game.

Means D-10. It is configured so that opportunities that can be achieved by both the first precondition and the second precondition can be granted.
The second precondition is more difficult than achieving the first precondition,
Described in means D-9, wherein when the second precondition is achieved, the second precondition is more likely to be granted as compared with the case where the first precondition is achieved. Gaming machine.

According to the means D-10, sharpness and intonation can be added to the game.

Means D-11. To grasp the approach grasping means, the approach grasping means for grasping at least one of the approach to the achievement of the precondition and the approach to the achievement of the specific condition after the achievement of the precondition is provided. The gaming machine according to any one of means D-1 to D-10, wherein the corresponding effect is derived based on the above.

According to the means D-11, it is possible to excite the situation with an accurate effect, and it is possible to relatively improve the effectability.

E. There is a pachinko machine as a kind of game machine. In pachinko machines, when a game ball launched by a launching means enters a starting ball entry means provided on a game board, a lottery is held to determine whether or not a special game state advantageous to the player is generated. The variable display means is used to perform variable display for teaching the result of the winning / failing lottery (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-271480).

By the way, as a gaming machine, there is a demand for new improvements in interest, such as by constantly incorporating new configurations.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest.

Means E-1. A lottery is held by achieving specific conditions, and by winning the lottery, advantageous benefits are given to the player.
The lottery means for performing the lottery includes a displacement means that can displace the lottery area based on the achievement of the specific condition.
A gaming machine characterized in that the result of the lottery is determined based on the stopping mode of the displacement means in the lottery area or the discharge pattern from the lottery area.

According to the means E-1, a lottery is performed by displacing the displacement means, and the result (whether or not) of the lottery is determined by the stopping mode of the displacement means or the discharge pattern from the lottery area. Therefore, it is possible to watch the progress from the start of the lottery to the finalization, and it is possible to predict the behavior of the displacement means and enjoy it. In particular, compared to, for example, a lottery using a random number generating means and an effect of teaching the result of a lottery that has already been decided, it is possible to narrow down the development of the behavior of the displacement means to some extent from the way of displacement of the displacement means. You can enjoy the process of the lottery itself, such as grasping the timing when the result of the displacement means comes out shortly before that. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest.

Means E-2. The first lottery by software is performed based on the first opportunity, and when the first lottery is won, the specific condition can be achieved as the second opportunity.
The gaming machine according to means E-1, wherein the second lottery as the lottery is executed based on the second opportunity, and the privilege is given when the second lottery is won.

According to the means E-2, by making the first lottery software, it is possible to make the probability that the privilege is given appropriate while avoiding the complicated configuration of the lottery means. Further, by using the software in the first stage, the burden on the lottery means can be reduced and deterioration and the like can be suppressed.

Means E-3. The gaming machine according to means E-1 or E-2, wherein the displacement means includes a displacement determining means capable of discriminating between a state in which the displacement means is displaced in the lottery region and a state other than that.

According to the means E-3, it is possible to wait until the displacement means is stopped by the displacement determination means, so that the lottery by the lottery means can be enjoyed more, and a sense of fairness can be obtained as compared with the case of forcibly stopping, for example. Can be improved. In addition, it is possible to quickly recognize whether or not it is the timing to judge and teach the result of the lottery using the displacement means and move to the next process, or the vibration of the gaming machine or the like is illegal in the displacement state of the displacement means. The period for monitoring the behavior can be set appropriately.

Means E-4. The gaming machine according to any one of means E-1 to E-3, which comprises a reset means capable of resetting the lottery area to an initial state.

According to the means E-4, it is possible to improve the convenience such as when an error occurs or the reset work at the end of business of the amusement park. The initial state is a state in which the displacement means is discharged from the lottery area if the state in which the displacement means is not in the lottery area is set as the initial state, and the state in which the displacement means is in the lottery state is set as the initial state. For example, the reference state is that the displacement means is in a specified posture at a specified position, and the initial state is that the front / rear, left / right, and upper / lower surfaces of the displacement means are oriented in a predetermined direction.

Means E-5. The gaming machine according to any one of means E-1 to E-4, wherein a plurality of members used as the displacement means are provided, and the members used as the displacement means are interchangeably configured.

According to the means E-5, deterioration of the member used as the displacement means can be suppressed.

Means E-6. It is characterized by having a first lottery state in which the result of the lottery by the displacement means is likely to be the first result, and a second lottery state in which the result of the lottery is likely to be a second result more advantageous to the player than the first result. The gaming machine according to any one of E-1 to E-5.

According to the means E-6, a large inflection can be added to the game by changing the state between the first lottery state and the second lottery state.

Means E-7. The game area where the game ball launched by the launching means is guided, and
A specific area whose state can be changed to an open state in which a game ball moving in the game area can enter and a closed state in which a game ball cannot enter.
A special area that can be reached by a game ball moving in the specific area,
It is equipped with a lottery means for drawing a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege that is advantageous to the player.
The lottery means
Displacement means that is displaced based on the arrival of the game ball in the special area, and
A determination means for determining the mode of the displacement means when the displacement means is displaced and then stopped is provided.
A gaming machine characterized in that the displacement of the displacement means is defined as the lottery, and the result of the lottery is determined based on the determination of the determination means.

According to the means E-7, a lottery is performed by displacing the displacement means, and the result (whether or not) of the lottery is determined depending on the stopping mode of the displacement means. Therefore, it is possible to watch the progress from the start of the lottery to the finalization, and it is possible to predict the stopping mode of the displacement means and enjoy it. In particular, compared to, for example, a lottery using a random number generating means and an effect of teaching the result of a lottery that has already been decided, it is possible to narrow down the pattern of the stopping mode of the displacement means to some extent from the way of displacement of the displacement means. You can enjoy the process of the lottery itself, such as making it easier to predict the stop timing of the displacement means from a stage shortly before the stop.

The mode of the displacement means includes the posture, position, orientation, shape, etc. of the displacement means, and it is possible to distinguish between a mode corresponding to winning and a mode corresponding to non-winning. Just do it. Further, "the arrival of the game ball in the special area" corresponds to "achieving the specific condition" of the means E-1 and "second opportunity" of the means E-2. Further, "making the specific area open" corresponds to "when winning in the first lottery" of the means E-2. Further, the configuration of the means E-1 to the means E-6 can be appropriately combined with the configuration of the present means.

Means E-8. The gaming machine according to means E-7, wherein the displacement amount of the displacement means changes according to the speed of the gaming ball that has reached the special region.

According to the means E-8, the displacement amount of the displacement means can be made random, and the result of the lottery can be made random. Therefore, in the lottery using the displacement means, the result of the lottery is predicted at the speed of the game ball reaching the special area, or the game ball is placed in the special area at a speed at which the player thinks that it is easy to win the lottery. It is possible to surely give a new playability such as intentionally aiming to reach it.

An interlocking means for interlocking the game ball that has reached the special area and the displacement means is provided, and the game ball that has reached the special area comes into contact with the interlocking means, and the interlocking means is displaced to displace the displacement means. It may be configured to be displaced (the amount of displacement of the displacement means changes depending on the speed at which it comes into contact with the interlocking means of the game ball or the contact position with the interlocking means of the game ball), or the game ball that has reached the special area. A means for measuring the speed and a means for measuring the pressure generated when the game ball reaches the special area are provided, and a separate driving means provides the displacement means with the strength according to the measured value of the measuring means. It may be configured to be displaced.

Means E-9. The gaming machine according to means E-7 or E-8, wherein the winning mode determining lottery for determining the mode of the displacement means corresponding to the winning in the lottery is executable.

According to the means E-9, the mode of the displacement means for winning the lottery is not uniform, and is changed according to the result of the winning mode determination lottery. Therefore, for example, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the momentum of a game ball to be entered into a specific area is adjusted to make it easier to actually win a lottery by a displacement means, and any player can proceed with the game relatively equally. be able to.

Means E-10. An arrival detection means for detecting that the game ball has reached the special area is provided.
The winning mode determination lottery is performed based on the detection of the arrival detection means.
The gaming machine according to means E-9, wherein the result of the winning mode determination lottery is taught before the displacement means is stopped.

According to the means E-4, the winning is dealt with while suppressing as much as possible the suspicion that the mode of the displacement means corresponding to the winning is decided based on the result of the lottery and the prediction of the result. You can enjoy the game of watching the displacement of the displacement means while grasping the mode of the displacement means.

Means E-11. A stop determining means for determining whether or not the displacement means displaced based on the arrival of the game ball in the special area is in a state corresponding to a stop, and
When the stop determining means determines that the displacement means is in a state corresponding to a stop, the stop determining means is provided with a displacement limiting means that contacts the displacement means and limits the displacement of the displacement means. The gaming machine according to any one of means E-7 to E-10.

According to the means E-11, for example, it seemed that the displacement means stopped and the result of the lottery was confirmed, but the displacement means was inadvertently displaced and the result of the lottery changed. The situation can be prevented. Further, for example, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the result of the lottery changes due to an act such as the player shaking the gaming machine. In addition, it is possible to make it easy for the player to understand that the displacement means is stopped and the result of the lottery is confirmed. Further, the displacement limiting means can adjust the posture and position of the stopped displacement means within a range in which the result of the lottery does not change, which facilitates the judgment by the judgment means (makes it possible to make a judgment accurately and quickly). ), And it is possible to avoid a situation in which the player is at a loss in making a decision.

If the lottery means has a roulette-like configuration and it is difficult to know where the needle tip as the displacement means is, the displacement means is moved to a position (center of the same square) that is easy to understand by the displacement limiting means. It may be configured as follows. Further, the displacement limiting means may be configured so as to prevent displacement of the displacement means that changes the result of the lottery, may be configured to hold the displacement means, or a fence-shaped one may be raised. It may be configured to surround the displacement means.

Means E-12. The gaming machine according to means E-11, wherein the determination means determines the displacement means after the displacement of the displacement means is restricted by the displacement limiting means.

According to the means E-12, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the mode of the displacement means and the result of the lottery based on the determination of the determination means are inconsistent with each other, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of troubles and the like.

Means E-13. Any of the means E-7 to E-12, characterized in that the determination means is provided with a reset means for returning the aspect of the displacement means to the reference mode after the mode of the displacement means is determined. Described gaming machine.

According to the means E-13, the mode (posture, position, etc.) of the displacement means when the lottery is started can be made constant. Therefore, basically, the lottery can be performed under the same conditions at all times, and fairness can be improved.

Means E-14. An RFID tag (for example, a passive tag) is provided in the displacement means, and the displacement means is provided with an RFID tag (for example, a passive tag).
The determination means is any of means E-7 to E-13, comprising a reading means capable of reading the RFID tag, and determining the mode of the displacement means based on the information of the RFID tag. Described gaming machine.

According to the means E-14, the mode of the displacement means can be determined more accurately and quickly than when a camera or the like is used. It can also be suitably used when returning the displacement means to the reference mode as in the above means E-7. Furthermore, even if the surface of the displacement means is damaged or the display mode becomes difficult to recognize due to wear or the like, if the RFID tag (and the reading means) is not damaged, the result of the lottery can be surely grasped. it can. In addition, for example, a dice that is not connected to the main body of the gaming machine at all (there is no structure such as a linking arm, wiring, etc.) can be adopted as the displacement means, and the effectability can be achieved. It is possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing a game machine.

It is desirable to provide a magnetic detection means capable of detecting magnetism corresponding to the area where the displacement means is installed to prevent fraudulent acts using magnetism. Further, for example, in the case of adopting a dice-shaped displacement means, in a configuration in which whether or not the displacement means is determined according to a number attached to the front surface of the displacement means, RFID tags are embedded in each surface of the displacement means. By reading the RFID tag on the rear surface (and upper surface) of the displacement means with a highly directional (narrow reading range) reading means, it may be possible to grasp the number (and the orientation of the displacement means) on the front surface of the displacement means.

Means E-15. The gaming machine according to any one of means E-7 to E-14, wherein the displacement region in which the displacement means is displaced is configured to be displaceable.

According to the means E-15, for example, it can be used as one of the effects of a lottery in which the displacement means is displaced. Further, the stopped displacement means is displaced by the displacement limiting means of the means E-3 (holding the displacement means) and displaced for each displacement region so that the player can easily see the stopped mode of the displacement means. It is also possible to.

Means E-16. A lottery result storage means for accumulating and storing the lottery results,
It is characterized by including an appropriate value determining means for determining whether or not the winning probability of the lottery is within a preset numerical range based on the information accumulated and stored in the lottery result storing means. The gaming machine according to any one of E-7 to E-15.

According to the means E-16, it can be determined whether or not the lottery is properly performed, and when it is determined that the lottery is not performed, fraudulent (for example, a displacement means outside business hours or a displacement means) It is possible to check the area where the displacement means is displaced to make it easier for the displacement means to be in a mode corresponding to winning, etc.) and failure. In addition, it may be said that "a determination result display means capable of displaying the determination result of the appropriate value determination means is provided". In this case, the winning probability of the lottery can be displayed and grasped on the gaming machine (by the operation of the player), and it can be confirmed before the game whether or not the gaming machine can play the game with a normal probability. ..

Means E-17. Equipped with vibration detection means to detect vibration
The game according to any one of means E-7 to E-16, which comprises performing a process corresponding to an error state when the vibration detecting means is detected in a state where the displacement means is displaced. Machine.

According to the means E-17, it is possible to prevent the displacement means from being displaced improperly. In addition, if the displacement means is not displaced, the gaming machine is installed by configuring it so as not to cause an error in consideration of the possibility that the player has hit the gaming machine unintentionally. It is possible to reduce the time and effort of the parties involved in the game hall and the like. However, regarding the detection of vibration, it is desirable that the detection information be output from the gaming machine to a computer or the like in the gaming hall. In the error state, the lottery of the lottery means is invalidated. Further, the error state may be configured so as not to be resolved unless a person involved in the game hall performs a corresponding operation, or may be configured to be automatically resolved after a specified time from the detection of vibration or the like. , Depending on the degree of detection of vibration, magnetic force, etc. (for example, make it possible to detect the magnitude of vibration, make it possible to measure the length and number of vibrations, and judge whether it exceeds or does not exceed the specified threshold value) It may be configured to be divided into a case where the problem is solved by and a case where the problem is not solved automatically.

Means E-18. A switching means capable of changing the state between an allowable state in which the game ball moving in the specific area can reach the special area and a regulated state in which the game ball moving in the specific area is restricted from reaching the special area. With
The gaming machine according to any one of means E-7 to E-17, wherein the switching means is in the regulated state at least when the displacement means is displaced.

According to the means E-18, for example, in a situation where it is highly likely that the displacement means will be won by lottery, another game ball reaches the special area and the displacement means is vigorously displaced again. It is possible to avoid situations that may lead to a decline in interest, such as starting to do so.

Means E-19. It has a special special area where the above benefits are given by reaching the game ball.
The specific area includes a first specific area provided with the special area and a second specific area provided separately from the first specific area and provided with the special special area.
The second specific region is configured to be displaceable in a range including a part of the second specific region, and is allowed to allow a game ball moving in the second specific region to reach the special special region. Means E-7 to means that a state-changeable switching means is provided between a state and a regulated state that regulates the arrival of a game ball moving in the second specific area to the special special area. The gaming machine according to any one of E-18.

According to the means E-19, the burden on the lottery means can be reduced and the deterioration of the lottery means can be suppressed. In addition, "when the operation determination means for determining whether or not the lottery means is performing a normal operation is provided and the operation determination means determines that the lottery means is not performing a normal operation, the first 2 The first specific area is brought into the open state instead of the specific area, and the ratio between the permissible state of the switching means and the regulated state during the period when the second specific area is in the open state is changed. By doing so, the probability that the game ball that has entered the second specific area will reach the special special area is the probability that the game ball will be won in the lottery that is performed based on the entry of the game ball into the first specific area. It may be configured so that the state can be approximated to. " In this case, first-aid measures can be taken when the lottery means breaks down.

It is also possible to appropriately combine the technical items described in the above means A, means B, means C, means D, and means E (a part of each means can be combined). ). Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, the technical items described in the above-mentioned means A, means B, means C, means D, and means E can be added or omitted as appropriate.

The basic configurations of various gaming machines to which the above means are applied are shown below.

a. The gaming machine in each of the above means is a ball gaming machine. As a more detailed example, "an operating means operated by the player (game ball launching handle), a launching means for flipping and launching the game ball based on the operation of the operating means (launching motor, etc.), and the launching An example is a ball game machine provided with a game area in which the game ball is guided and each ball entry means (general winning opening, variable winning device, operating port, etc.) arranged in the game area.

b. The gaming machine in each of the above means is a ball gaming machine having a gaming area extending in a substantially vertical direction. As a more detailed example, "an operating means operated by the player (game ball launching handle), a launching means for flipping and launching the game ball based on the operation of the operating means (launching motor, etc.), and the launching A predetermined game area (for example, the game area is composed of a game board surface, etc.) extending along a substantially vertical direction, and each ball entry means (general winning opening, etc.) arranged in the game area. A ball-and-ball game machine provided with a variable winning device, an operating port, etc.) so that the behavior of a game ball flowing down the game area can be visually recognized.

c. The game machine in each of the above means, or each of the ball game machines, is a pachinko machine or a game machine equivalent to a pachinko machine.

d. The gaming machine in each of the above means shall be a rotating gaming machine such as a slot machine. As a more detailed example, "an identification information string (design string; specifically, a rotating body such as a reel or a belt with a symbol) composed of a plurality of identification information (designs) is displayed in a variable manner (specifically, a reel). It is equipped with a variable display means (specifically, a rotating body unit such as a reel unit) that stops and displays the identification information sequence after (rotation of, etc.), and is caused by the operation of the starting operation means (specifically, the start lever). The fluctuation of the identification information (design) is started, the fluctuation of the identification information (design) is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (specifically, the stop button), and the identification aligned on the effective line at the time of the stop. An example is a "reel-type gaming machine" configured so that a game value is given on condition that the information is specific identification information.

e. The gaming machine in each of the above means is a gaming machine of a type in which a slot machine and a pachinko machine are fused (particularly, a spinning-type gaming machine using a ball of a slot machine specification that uses a gaming ball as a gaming medium). As a more detailed example, "an identification information string (design string; specifically, a rotating body such as a reel or a belt with a symbol) composed of a plurality of identification information (designs) is displayed in a variable manner (specifically, a reel). It is equipped with a variable display means (specifically, a rotating body unit such as a reel unit) that stops and displays the identification information string after (rotation of, etc.), and is caused by the operation of the starting operation means (specifically, the start lever). The fluctuation of the identification information (design) is started, the fluctuation of the identification information (design) is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (specifically, the stop button), and the identification aligned on the effective line at the time of the stop. The game value is given on the condition that the information is specific identification information, and a ball tray (upper plate, etc.) is provided, and a catching means for taking in the game ball from the ball saucer and the ball saucer An example is a gaming machine provided with a payout means for paying out a game ball, and configured so that a game start condition is satisfied when the game ball is taken in by the take-in means.

10 ... Pachinko machine, 18 ... Handle, 32a ... 1st variable winning device, 32b ... 2nd variable winning device, 33a ... 1st starting winning device, 33b ... 2nd starting winning device, 34 ... Through gate, 42 ... Decorative design Display device, 43a ... 1st special display device, 43b ... 2nd special display device, 261 ... main control device, 262 ... sub control device.

Claims (5)

Equipped with multiple means of achieving specific conditions
The condition achievement means includes a first condition achievement means capable of achieving the first specific condition and a second condition achievement means capable of achieving the second specific condition.
A gaming machine characterized in that a privilege advantageous to a player is given by achieving a plurality of predetermined specific conditions including at least one of the first specific condition and the second specific condition. .. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein a plurality of patterns are provided for the combination of the plurality of specific conditions that must be achieved before the privilege is granted. The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, further comprising a target teaching means for teaching the condition achievement means for achieving the specific condition for granting the privilege. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the privilege is granted by achieving the plurality of predetermined specific conditions in a designated order. The game area where the game ball launched by the launching means is guided, and
In a gaming machine provided with a specific region into which a gaming ball moving in the gaming area can enter.
It is provided with a plurality of special areas provided at positions where the game ball moving in the specific area may or may not reach.
The plurality of special regions include at least a first special region and a second special region.
When the game ball moving in the specific area reaches the second special area without reaching the first special area, and when it reaches the first special area without reaching the second special area. There is,
A game ball moving in the specific area is visibly configured from the front of the game machine.
A gaming machine characterized in that a privilege advantageous to a player is given by causing a game ball to reach the first special area and a plurality of predetermined special areas including the second special area.

Images